Infortrend
External RAID Controller & Subsystem
Generic Operation Manual
Revision 1.61
Firmware Version: 3.31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DEC and Alpha are registered trademarks of Compaq
Computer Corp. (formerly of Digital Equipment Corporation).
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and MS-DOS are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries.
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
in the U.S. and other countries.
SCO, OpenServer, and UnixWare are trademarks or registered
trademarks of The Santa Cruz Operation, Inc. in the U.S. and
other countries.
Solaris is a trademark of SUN Microsystems, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the U.S.
and other countries. All other names, brands, products or
services are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
RMA Policy
Please visit our websites
(www.infortrend.com/www.infortrend.com.tw/ww.infortrend.com.cn/
www.infortrend-europe.com) where our RMA policy is given a
detailed explanation.
Supported Models
This manual supports the following Infortrend
controllers/ subsystems:
•
SentinelRAID: SCSI-based external RAID controllers
(including the 5.25” full-height and 1U canister
configuration)
•
EonRAID: Fibre-based external RAID controllers
(including the 5.25” full-height and 1U canister
configuration)
•
•
EonStor: subsystems that come with SCSI or Fibre host
channels.
IFT-6230 and 6330 series ATA RAID subsystems.
Printed in Taiwan
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 RAID Functions: An Introduction
1.1
1.2
Logical Drive................................................................................................... 1
Logical Volume............................................................................................... 1
What is a logical volume?.................................................................................. 1
RAID Levels..................................................................................................... 2
What are the RAID levels? ................................................................................ 2
NRAID................................................................................................................ 3
JBOD ................................................................................................................. 3
RAID 0 ............................................................................................................... 4
RAID 1 ............................................................................................................... 4
RAID (0+1)......................................................................................................... 4
RAID 3 ............................................................................................................... 5
RAID 5 ............................................................................................................... 5
Spare Drives ................................................................................................... 6
Global and Local Spare Drives.......................................................................... 6
Identifying Drives ........................................................................................... 8
Flash Selected SCSI Drive ................................................................................ 8
Flash All SCSI Drives ........................................................................................ 8
Flash All but Selected Drives............................................................................. 8
Rebuild ............................................................................................................ 9
Automatic Rebuild and Manual Rebuild............................................................. 9
1. Automatic Rebuild ........................................................................................ 9
2. Manual Rebuild........................................................................................... 10
3. Concurrent Rebuild in RAID (0+1).............................................................. 11
Logical Volume (Multi-Level RAID)............................................................. 12
What is a logical volume?................................................................................ 12
Spare drives assigned to a logical volume? .................................................... 14
Limitations:....................................................................................................... 15
Partitioning - partitioning the logical drive or partitioning the logical volume? . 15
Different write policies within a logical volume?............................................... 16
RAID expansion with logical volume?.............................................................. 16
Different controller settings using logical volume? .......................................... 16
A logical volume with logical drives of different levels? ................................... 17
Multi-level RAID systems................................................................................. 17
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Chapter 2 RAID Planning
2.1
2.2
Considerations ............................................................................................... 1
Configuring the Array: ................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 Starting a RAID System........................................................................... 5
Operation Theory ........................................................................................... 7
2.3.1 I/O Channel, SCSI ID, and LUN .............................................................. 7
2.3.2 Grouping Drives into an Array ................................................................. 7
2.3.3 Making Arrays Available to Hosts............................................................ 9
Tunable Parameters..................................................................................... 10
2.3
2.4
Chapter 3 Accessing the Array through Serial Port and Ethernet
3.1
RS-232C Serial Port....................................................................................... 1
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.1 Configuring RS-232C Connection via Front Panel ..................................2
3.1.2 Starting RS-232C Terminal Emulation.....................................................3
Out-of-Band via Ethernet..............................................................................4
What Is the “Disk Reserved Space?”.................................................................4
Other Concerns..................................................................................................5
Web-Based Management..................................................................................5
Requirements.....................................................................................................5
3.2.1 Connecting Ethernet Port:........................................................................5
3.2.2 Configuring the Controller........................................................................6
3.2.3 NPC Onboard ..........................................................................................9
The SNMP_TRAP section ...............................................................................10
The EMAIL section...........................................................................................10
The BROADCAST section...............................................................................10
3.2
Chapter 4 LCD Screen Messages
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
The Initial Screen............................................................................................1
Quick Installation Screen...............................................................................1
Logical Drive Status .......................................................................................2
Logical Volume Status ...................................................................................3
SCSI Drive Status ...........................................................................................4
SCSI Channel Status ......................................................................................5
Controller Voltage and Temperature ............................................................6
Cache Dirty Percentage .................................................................................7
View and Edit Event Logs..............................................................................7
Chapter 5 LCD Keypad Operation
5.1 Power on RAID Enclosure ............................................................................1
5.2 Caching Parameters......................................................................................1
Optimization Modes ...........................................................................................1
Optimization Mode and Stripe Size....................................................................2
Optimization for Random or Sequential I/O .......................................................3
Write-Back/Write-Through Cache Enable/Disable ............................................3
5.3
5.4
View Connected Drives:................................................................................5
Creating a Logical Drive................................................................................6
Choosing a RAID Level:.....................................................................................6
Choosing Member Drives: .................................................................................6
Logical Drive Preferences:.................................................................................6
Maximum Drive Capacity:..................................................................................7
Spare Drive Assignments: .................................................................................7
Disk Reserved Space: .......................................................................................7
Write Policy:.......................................................................................................7
Initialization Mode: .............................................................................................7
Stripe Size:.........................................................................................................8
Beginning Initialization........................................................................................8
Creating a Logical Volume..........................................................................10
Initialization Mode ............................................................................................10
Write Policy......................................................................................................10
Partitioning a Logical Drive/Logical Volume .............................................12
Mapping a Logical Volume/Logical Drive to Host LUN.............................13
Assigning Spare Drive and Rebuild Settings.............................................14
Adding a Local Spare Drive .............................................................................14
Adding a Global Spare Drive............................................................................15
Rebuild Settings...............................................................................................15
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.9
Viewing and Editing Logical Drives and Drive Members......................... 16
Deleting a Logical Drive................................................................................... 16
Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive.............................................................. 17
Assigning a Name to a Logical Drive............................................................... 18
Rebuilding a Logical Drive............................................................................... 18
Regenerating Logical Drive Parity ................................................................... 19
Media Scan...................................................................................................... 20
Write Policy...................................................................................................... 21
5.10 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs................................................................. 22
Viewing and Deleting LUN Mappings .............................................................. 22
Pass-through SCSI Commands ...................................................................... 22
5.11 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives............................................................... 23
Scanning New SCSI Drive............................................................................... 23
Identifying a Drive............................................................................................ 24
Deleting Spare Drive (Global / Local Spare Drive) .......................................... 25
5.12 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels ......................................................... 25
Redefining Channel Mode ............................................................................... 25
Setting a SCSI Channel’s ID - Host Channel................................................... 26
Viewing IDs...................................................................................................... 26
Adding a Channel ID........................................................................................ 26
Deleting a Channel ID...................................................................................... 27
Setting a SCSI Channel’s Primary ID - Drive Channel ................................... 27
Setting a SCSI Channel’s Secondary ID - Drive Channel ............................... 28
Setting Channel Bus Terminator ..................................................................... 28
Setting Transfer Speed.................................................................................... 29
Setting Transfer Width..................................................................................... 30
Viewing and Editing SCSI Target - Drive Channel .......................................... 30
Slot Number..................................................................................................... 31
Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock .......................................................... 31
Maximum Transfer Width................................................................................ 31
Parity Check .................................................................................................... 32
Disconnecting Support..................................................................................... 32
Maximum Tag Count ....................................................................................... 32
Restore to Default Setting................................................................................ 33
5.13 System Functions ....................................................................................... 34
Mute Beeper .................................................................................................... 34
Change Password ........................................................................................... 34
Changing Password......................................................................................... 34
Disabling Password ......................................................................................... 35
Reset Controller............................................................................................... 35
Shutdown Controller ........................................................................................ 35
Controller Maintenance.................................................................................... 36
Saving NVRAM to Disks.................................................................................. 36
Restore NVRAM from Disks............................................................................ 36
5.14 Controller Parameters................................................................................. 37
Controller Name .............................................................................................. 37
LCD Title Display Controller Name.................................................................. 37
Password Validation Timeout.......................................................................... 37
Controller Unique Identifier.............................................................................. 37
Controller Date and Time ................................................................................ 38
Time Zone ....................................................................................................... 38
Date and Time................................................................................................. 39
5.15 SCSI Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 40
SCSI Drive Low-level Format .......................................................................... 40
SCSI Drive Read/Write Test............................................................................ 41
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Terminal Screen Messages
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
The Initial Screen............................................................................................1
Main Menu.......................................................................................................2
Quick Installation............................................................................................2
Logical Drive Status .......................................................................................4
Logical Volume Status ...................................................................................5
SCSI Drive Status ...........................................................................................6
SCSI Channel’s Status ...................................................................................7
Controller Voltage and Temperature ............................................................9
Viewing Event Logs on the Screen.............................................................10
Chapter 7 Terminal Operation
7.1
7.2
Power on RAID Enclosure .............................................................................1
Caching Parameters.......................................................................................1
Optimization Modes ...........................................................................................1
Optimization Mode and Stripe Size....................................................................3
Optimization for Random or Sequential I/O .......................................................3
Write-Back/Write-Through Cache Enable/Disable ............................................3
Viewing the Connected Drives......................................................................4
Creating a Logical Drive.................................................................................5
Choosing a RAID Level:.....................................................................................6
Choosing Member Drives: .................................................................................6
Logical Drive Preferences:.................................................................................6
Maximum Drive Capacity:..................................................................................6
Assign Spare Drives: .........................................................................................7
Disk Reserved Space ........................................................................................7
Logical Drive Assignments:................................................................................7
Write Policy........................................................................................................7
Initialization Mode ..............................................................................................8
Stripe Size..........................................................................................................8
Creating a Logical Volume...........................................................................10
Partitioning a Logical Drive/Logical Volume .............................................11
Mapping a Logical Volume to Host LUN ....................................................13
Assigning Spare Drive, Rebuild Settings...................................................15
Adding Local Spare Drive ................................................................................15
Adding a Global Spare Drive............................................................................16
Viewing and Editing Logical Drive and Drive Members ...........................16
Deleting a Logical Drive ...................................................................................17
Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive..............................................................17
Assigning a Name to a Logical Drive...............................................................17
Rebuilding a Logical Drive ...............................................................................18
Regenerating Logical Drive Parity....................................................................19
Media Scan ......................................................................................................19
Write Policy......................................................................................................20
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs..................................................................21
Viewing or Deleting LUN Mappings .................................................................21
Edit Host-ID/WWN Name List..........................................................................21
Pass-through SCSI Commands.......................................................................21
7.11 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives................................................................22
Scanning New Drive.........................................................................................23
Slot Number.....................................................................................................23
Drive Entry .......................................................................................................23
Identifying Drive ...............................................................................................23
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Spare Drive (Global / Local Spare Drive) .......................................... 24
7.12 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels .......................................................... 25
Redefining Channel Mode ............................................................................... 25
Viewing and Editing SCSI IDs - Host Channel ................................................ 26
Viewing and Editing SCSI IDs ......................................................................... 26
Adding a SCSI ID (Primary/Secondary Controller ID) ..................................... 26
Deleting an ID.................................................................................................. 27
Setting a Primary Controller’s SCSI ID - Drive Channel.................................. 27
Setting a Secondary Controller’s SCSI ID - Drive Channel ............................. 28
Setting Channel Terminator............................................................................. 28
Setting a Transfer Speed................................................................................. 28
Drive Channel.................................................................................................. 28
Setting the Transfer Width............................................................................... 29
Viewing and Editing SCSI Target / Drive Channel........................................... 30
Slot Number..................................................................................................... 30
Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock .......................................................... 31
Maximum Transfer Width................................................................................ 31
Parity Check .................................................................................................... 31
Disconnecting Support..................................................................................... 32
Maximum Tag Count ....................................................................................... 32
Data Rate......................................................................................................... 32
7.13 System Functions ........................................................................................ 34
Mute Beeper .................................................................................................... 34
Change Password ........................................................................................... 34
Changing the Password................................................................................... 35
Setting a New Password.................................................................................. 35
Disabling the Password ................................................................................... 36
Reset Controller............................................................................................... 36
Shutdown Controller ........................................................................................ 36
7.14 Controller Parameters.................................................................................. 37
Controller Name .............................................................................................. 37
LCD Title Display Controller Name.................................................................. 37
Saving NVRAM to Disks.................................................................................. 38
Restore NVRAM from Disks............................................................................ 38
Password Validation Timeout.......................................................................... 39
Controller Unique Identifier.............................................................................. 39
Set Controller Date and Time.......................................................................... 41
Time Zone ....................................................................................................... 41
Date and Time................................................................................................. 41
7.15 Drive Information.......................................................................................... 42
View Drive Information..................................................................................... 42
SCSI Drive Utilities .......................................................................................... 42
SCSI Drive Low-level Format .......................................................................... 43
SCSI Drive Read/Write Test............................................................................ 44
Chapter 8 Fibre Operation
8.1
8.2
8.3
Overview ......................................................................................................... 1
Major Concerns .............................................................................................. 2
Supported Features ....................................................................................... 4
Fibre Chip .......................................................................................................... 4
Multiple Target IDs:............................................................................................ 4
Drive IDs:........................................................................................................... 5
In-band Fibre and S.E.S. Support:..................................................................... 5
Configuration: Host and Drive Parameters ................................................. 6
Channel Mode: .................................................................................................. 6
8.4
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Primary and Secondary Controller IDs:..............................................................6
Redundant Controller Cache Coherency Channel (RCC Channel):..................7
View Channel WWN ..........................................................................................7
View Device Port Name List (WWPN)...............................................................8
View and Edit Fibre Drive...................................................................................8
User-Assigned ID (Scan SCSI Drive) ................................................................8
View Drive Information.......................................................................................9
View and Edit Host-Side Parameters.................................................................9
1. Fibre Channel Connection Type:................................................................10
View and Edit Drive-Side Parameters..............................................................10
2. Drive-Side Dual Loop:.................................................................................10
Controller Unique Identifier ..............................................................................11
Controller Communications over Fibre Loops .................................................12
Multi-Host Access Control: LUN Filtering..................................................14
Creating LUN Masks........................................................................................15
WWN Name List..............................................................................................16
Logical Unit to Host LUN Mapping...................................................................16
LUN Mask (ID Range) Configuration: ..............................................................18
Filter Type: Include or Exclude.........................................................................18
Access Mode: Read Only or Read/Write.........................................................19
Sample Configuration: .....................................................................................20
Configuration Procedure:.................................................................................20
8.5
Chapter 9 Advanced Configuration
9.1
Fault Prevention..............................................................................................1
S.M.A.R.T. .........................................................................................................1
9.1.1 Clone Failing Drive:..................................................................................2
Replace after Clone: ..........................................................................................2
Perpetual Clone: ................................................................................................3
9.1.2 S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology ) ........5
Configuration Procedure....................................................................................7
Enabling the S.M.A.R.T. Feature.......................................................................7
Examining Whether Your Drives Support S.M.A.R.T. .......................................7
Using S.M.A.R.T. Functions...............................................................................8
Host-side and Drive-side SCSI Parameters ...............................................11
Foreword: SCSI Channel, SCSI ID and LUN...................................................11
9.2.1 Host-side SCSI Parameters...................................................................11
Maximum Concurrent Host LUN Connection (“Nexus” in SCSI): ....................11
Number of Tags Reserved for each Host-LUN Connection: ...........................12
Maximum Queued I/O Count:..........................................................................13
LUNs per Host SCSI ID ...................................................................................13
LUN Applicability:.............................................................................................13
Peripheral Device Type:...................................................................................14
In-band (SCSI or Fibre):...................................................................................14
Peripheral Device Type Parameters for Various Operating Systems:.............15
Cylinder/Head/Sector Mapping: .......................................................................16
9.2.2 Drive-side Parameters: ..........................................................................18
SCSI Motor Spin-Up.........................................................................................18
SCSI Reset at Power-Up .................................................................................19
Disk Access Delay Time ..................................................................................20
SCSI I/O Timeout.............................................................................................20
Maximum Tag Count (Tag Command Queuing) .............................................21
Detection of Drive Hot Swap Followed by Auto Rebuild ..................................22
SAF-TE and S.E.S. Enclosure Monitoring .......................................................22
Periodic Drive Check Time ..............................................................................22
9.2
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Idle Drive Failure Detection ............................................................................. 23
Periodic Auto-Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time.................................... 23
Monitoring and Safety Mechanisms........................................................... 25
Dynamic Switch Write-Policy........................................................................... 25
View Peripheral Device Status ........................................................................ 25
Controller Auto-Shutdown - Event Trigger Option ........................................... 26
Disk Array Parameters................................................................................. 27
Rebuild Priority................................................................................................. 27
Verification on Writes....................................................................................... 28
9.3
9.4
Chapter 10 Redundant Controller
10.1 Operation Theory ......................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Setup Flowchart................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Considerations Related to Physical Connection...............................10-2
SCSI-Based Controllers................................................................................10-2
Fibre-Based Controllers................................................................................10-3
10.1.3 Grouping Hard Drives and LUN Mapping.........................................10-4
Logical Drive, Logical Volume, and Logical Partitions..................................10-5
System Drive Mapping:.................................................................................10-6
Primary and Secondary IDs..........................................................................10-6
Mapping........................................................................................................10-7
10.1.4 Fault-Tolerance ................................................................................10-8
What Is a Redundant Controller Configuration?...........................................10-8
How does Failover and Failback Work?.......................................................10-9
A. Channel Bus............................................................................................10-9
B. Controller Failover and Failback............................................................10-11
C. Active-to-Active Configuration:..............................................................10-11
D. Traffic Distribution and Failover Process ..............................................10-12
Symptoms...................................................................................................10-13
Connection:.................................................................................................10-13
10.2 Preparing Controllers .............................................................................10-14
10.2.1 Requirements: ................................................................................10-14
Cabling Requirements:...............................................................................10-14
Controller Settings: .....................................................................................10-15
10.2.2 Limitations.......................................................................................10-16
10.2.3 Configurable Parameters................................................................10-16
Primary or Secondary.................................................................................10-16
Active-to-Active Configuration ....................................................................10-17
Active-to-Standby Configuration.................................................................10-17
Cache Synchronization...............................................................................10-17
Battery Support...........................................................................................10-17
10.3 Configuration...........................................................................................10-19
10.3.1 Via Front Panel Keypad..................................................................10-20
Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting ....................................10-20
Enable Redundant Controller .....................................................................10-20
Autoconfig...................................................................................................10-20
2. Controller Unique ID ...............................................................................10-20
Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting.........................................10-21
1. Enable Redundant Controller .................................................................10-21
2. Controller Unique ID ...............................................................................10-21
Starting the Redundant Controllers ............................................................10-22
Creating Primary and Secondary ID...........................................................10-22
Drive Channel.............................................................................................10-22
Host Channel..............................................................................................10-23
Assigning a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the Secondary Controller.....10-23
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mapping a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the Host LUNs .......................10-24
Front Panel View of Controller Failure ........................................................10-25
When and how is the failed controller replaced?........................................10-25
10.3.2 Via Terminal Emulation...................................................................10-26
Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting.....................................10-26
Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting.........................................10-28
Creating Primary and Secondary ID ...........................................................10-29
Assigning Logical Drives to the Secondary Controller ................................10-29
Mapping a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the Host LUNs .......................10-31
Terminal Interface View of Controller Failure..............................................10-32
What will happen when one of the controllers fails?...................................10-32
10.3.3 When and How Is the Failed Controller Replaced?........................10-32
Forcing Controller Failover for Testing........................................................10-34
RCC Status (Redundant Controller Communications Channel).................10-35
Secondary Controller RS-232 .....................................................................10-35
Remote Redundant Controller ....................................................................10-35
Cache Synchronization on Write-Through..................................................10-35
Chapter 11 Record of Settings
11.1 View and Edit Logical Drives.........................................................................1
Logical Drive Information ...................................................................................1
Partition Information...........................................................................................2
11.2 View and Edit Logical Volumes.......................................................................3
Logical Volume Information ...............................................................................3
Partition Information...........................................................................................3
11.3 View and Edit Host LUN’s ................................................................................4
LUN Mappings ...................................................................................................4
Host-ID/WWN Name List...................................................................................4
11.4 View and Edit SCSI Drives ...............................................................................6
11.5 View and Edit SCSI Channels ..........................................................................7
11.6 View and Edit Configuration Parameters .......................................................8
Communication Parameters ..............................................................................8
PPP Configuration..............................................................................................8
Caching Parameters ..........................................................................................9
Host Side SCSI Parameters ..............................................................................9
Drive Side SCSI Parameters .............................................................................9
Disk Array Parameters.....................................................................................10
Redundant Controller Parameters ...................................................................10
Controller Parameters......................................................................................10
11.7 View and Edit Peripheral Devices..................................................................11
Set Peripheral Device Entry.............................................................................11
Define Peripheral Device Active Signal............................................................11
View System Information .................................................................................11
11.8 Save NVRAM to Disk, Restore from Disk......................................................12
11.9 RAID Security: Password ...............................................................................12
RAID Security...................................................................................................12
Chapter 12 Array Expansion
12.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................1
12.2 Mode 1 Expansion: ..........................................................................................4
Adding Drives to a Logical Drive........................................................................4
Add-Drive Procedure .........................................................................................4
12.3 Mode 2 Expansion: ..........................................................................................7
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copy and Replace Drives with Drives of Larger Capacity................................. 7
Copy and Replace Procedure............................................................................ 7
12.4 Making Use of the Added Capacity: Expand Logical Drive......................... 9
12.5 Expand Logical Volume ................................................................................ 11
12.6 Configuration Example: Volume Extension in Windows 2000® Server.... 12
Appendix A LCD Keypad Navigation Map
Appendix B Firmware Functionality
Specifications ........................................................................................................... 1
Basic RAID Management: ........................................................................................ 1
Advanced Features:.................................................................................................. 2
Caching Operation: .................................................................................................. 3
RAID Expansion:....................................................................................................... 4
On-line RAID Expansion........................................................................................... 4
Fibre Channel Support:............................................................................................ 5
S.M.A.R.T. Support:.................................................................................................. 6
Redundant Controller:.............................................................................................. 6
Data Safety: ............................................................................................................... 7
System Security:....................................................................................................... 8
Environment Management: ..................................................................................... 9
SAF-TE/S.E.S. support ............................................................................................. 9
User Interface:......................................................................................................... 10
RAIDWatch on-board.............................................................................................. 10
RS-232C Terminal................................................................................................... 10
Remote Manageability:........................................................................................... 10
JBOD-Specific:........................................................................................................ 11
Others:..................................................................................................................... 11
Appendix C System Functions: Upgrading Firmware
Upgrading Firmware................................................................................................. 1
New Features Supported with Firmware 3.21........................................................ 1
Background RS-232C Firmware Download: .......................................................... 1
Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Upgrade:................................................ 1
Redundant Controller Firmware Sync-version:..................................................... 2
Upgrading Firmware Using In-band SCSI + RAIDWatch Manager....................... 2
Upgrading Firmware Using RS-232C Terminal Emulation ................................... 4
Appendix D Event Messages
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Functional Table of Contents
This functional table of contents helps you to quickly locate the
descriptions of firmware functions.
Page number
Chapter 1
Functional Description
Identifying Drives
Flash Selected SCSI Drive
Flash All SCSI Drives
Flash All but Selected Drives
Automatic rebuild and manual rebuild
Automatic rebuild
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-11
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
Manual rebuild
Concurrent Rebuild in RAID (0+1)
Page number
Chapter 3
Out-of-Band via Serial Port and
Ethernet
Communication Parameters:
3-1
configuring RS-232 connection
Configuring Ethernet connection: reserved space and port 3-6
IP
NPC Onboard
3-9
Page number
Chapter 4
LCD Screen Messages
View and Edit Event Logs
4-7
Page number:
LCD/ Terminal
Chapter 5 / Starting RAID via the LCD
Chapter 7
Panel/Terminal Emulation
Starting RAID Configuration
Caching Parameters
5-1/7-1
5-2/7-3
5-3/7-3
5-3/7-3
5-5/7-4
5-6/7-5
5-6/7-6
5-6/7-6
5-7/7-6
5-7/7-7
7-7
5-7/7-7
5-7/7-7
5-7/7-8
5-8/7-8
5-10/7-10
5-10/7-10
5.2/7.2
Optimization mode and stripe size
Optimization for sequential or random I/O
Write-Back/Write-Through Cache Enable/Disable
Viewing Connected Drives
Creating a Logical Drive
Choosing a RAID Level
Choosing Member Drives
Maximum Drive Capacity
Spare Drive Assignments
Logical Drive Assignments
Disk Reserved Space
Write Policy
Initialization Mode
Stripe Size
Creating a Logical Volume
Initialization Mode
5.3/7.3
5.4/7.4
5.5/7.5
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Write Policy
5-10/7-10
5-12/7-11
5-13/7-13
5-14/7-15
5-14/7-15
5-15/7-16
5-15
Partitioning a Logical Drive/Logical Volume
Mapping a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to Host LUN
Assigning Spare Drive, Rebuild Settings
Adding a Local Spare Drive
Adding Global Spare Drive
(Logical Drive) Rebuild Settings
5.6/7.6
5.7/7.7
5.8/7.8
5-16/7-16
5.9/7.9 Viewing and Editing Logical Drives and Drive
Members
Deleting a Logical Drive
5-16/7-17
5-17/7-17
5-18/7-17
5-18/7-18
5-19/7-19
5-20/19
Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive
Assigning a Logical Drive Name
Rebuilding a Logical Drive
Regenerating Logical Drive Parity
Media Scan
Write Policy
5-21/20
5-22/7-21
5-22/7-21
5-22/7-21
5-23/7-22
5-23/7-23
5-24/7-23
5-25/7-24
5-25/7-25
5-25/7-25
5-26/7-26
5-26/7-26
5-26/7-26
5-27/7-27
5-27/7-27
5-28/7-28
5-28/7-28
5-29/7-28
5-30/7-29
5-30/7-30
5-31/7-30
5-31/7-31
5-31/7-31
5-32/7-31
5-32/7-32
5-32/7-32
5-33
5.10/7.10 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs
Viewing and Deleting LUN Mappings
Pass-through SCSI Commands
5.11/7.11 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives
Scanning a New SCSI Drive
Identifying a Drive
Deleting Spare Drive (Global/Local Spare Drive)
5.12/7.12 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels
Viewing and Re-defining Channel Mode
Setting Channel ID/Host Channel
Viewing channel ID
Adding a Channel ID
Deleting a Channel ID
Setting a Channel’s Primary ID/Drive Channel
Setting a Channel’s Secondary ID/Drive Channel
Setting a SCSI Channel’s Terminator
Setting the Transfer Speed
Setting the Transfer Width
Viewing and Editing a SCSI Target/Drive Channel
Slot Number
Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock
Maximum Transfer Width
Parity Check
Disconnecting Support
Maximum Tag Count
Restoring the Default Setting (SCSI Bus)
Data Rate
7-32
5-34/7-34
5-34/7-34
5-34/7-34
5-35/7-36
5-35/7-36
5-35/7-36
5.13/7.13 System Functions
Mute Beeper
Change Password
Disabling the Password
Reset Controller
Shutdown Controller
Saving Configuration Data
Saving NVRAM to Disks
Restore NVRAM from Disks
5.14/7.14 Controller Parameters
Controller Name
5-36/7-38
5-36/7-38
5-37/7-37
5-37/7-37
5-37/7-37
5-38/7-41
5-39/7-41
LCD Title Display Controller Name
Time Zone
Date and Time
Setting Password
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Password Validation Timeout
Controller Unique Identifier
5.15/7.15 SCSI Drive Utilities
5-37/7-39
5-37/7-39
5-40/7-42
Low-level format
Read/Write test
5-40/7-43
5-41/7-44
Page number
Chapter 8
Fibre Operation
8-6
8-6
8-6
8.5 Host and Drive Parameters
View and Edit Fibre Channel
Channel Mode
Primary and Secondary Controller IDs
Communications Channel (for cache coherency)
View Channel WWN
8-6
8-7
8-7
View Device Port Name List (WWPN)
View and Edit Fibre Drives
8-8
8-8
User-Assigned ID (Scan Fibre Drive)
View Drive Information
8-8
8-9
View and Edit Host-side Parameters
Fibre Connection Types
View and Edit Drive-side Parameters
Connecting Drives with Dual Loop
Controller Unique Identifier
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-18
8-18
8-19
8-20
Controller Communications over Fibre Loops
8.5 Multi-host Access Control: LUN Filtering
Creating LUN Masks
WWN Name List
Logical Unit to Host LUN Mapping
LUN Mask (ID Range) Configuration
Filter Type: Include or Exclude
Access Mode: Read Only or Read/Write
Configuration Procedure
Page number
Chapter 9
Advanced Configurations
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-5
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-11
9-11
9-12
9.1 Fault Prevention
Clone Failing Drive
Replace after Clone
Perpetual Clone
9.1.2 S.M.A.R.T. with enhanced features
S.M.A.R.T. Features (Enabling S.M.A.R.T.)
“Detect Only”
"Detect, Perpetual Clone"
“Detect, Clone + Replace”
9.2 Host-side & Drive-side SCSI Parameters
9.2.1 Host-side SCSI Parameters
Number of Tags Reserved for each Host-LUN
Connection
Maximum Queued I/O Count
LUNs per Host SCSI ID
LUN Applicability
Peripheral Device Type
In-band SCSI/Fibre
9-13
9-13
9-13
9-14
9-14
9-15
9-15
Peripheral Device Type for Various Operating Systems
Peripheral Device Type Settings
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cylinder/Head/Sector Mapping
9.2.2 Drive-side Parameters
9-16
9-18
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-22
9-22
9-23
9-23
9-25
9-25
9-25
9-26
9-27
9-27
9-28
SCSI Motor Spin-up
SCSI Reset at Power-up
Disk Access Delay Time
SCSI I/O Timeout
Maximum Tag Count (Tag Command Queuing)
Detection of Drive Hot Swap Followed by Auto Rebuild
SAF-TE and S.E.S. Enclosure Monitoring
Periodic Drive Check Time
Idle Drive Failure Detection
Periodic Auto-Detect Swap Check Time
9.3 Monitoring and Safety Mechanisms
Dynamic Switch Write-Policy
View Peripheral Device Status (enclosure modules)
Controller Auto-Shutdown – Event Trigger Option
9.4 Logical Drive Integrity - Disk Array Parameters
Rebuild Priority
Verification on Writes
Page number:
LCD/Terminal
Chapter 10 Redundant Controller Configuration
10-19
10-20
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-22
10-23
10.3 Configuration
10.3.1 Via Front Panel Keypad
Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting
Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting
Starting the Redundant Controllers
Creating Primary and Secondary IDs
Assigning a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the
Secondary Controller
Mapping a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the Host
LUNs
10-24
Front Panel View of Controller Failure
When and How is the Failed Controller Replaced
10.3.2 Via Terminal Emulation
Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting
Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting
Creating Primary and Secondary IDs
Assigning a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the
Secondary Controller
10-25
10-25
10-26
10-26
10-28
10-29
10-29
Mapping a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the Host
LUNs
10-31
Terminal View of Controller Failure
10-32
10-34
10-35
10-35
10-35
10-35
10-35
When and How is the Failed Controller Replaced
Forcing Controller Failure for Testing
RCC status (RCC channels)
Secondary Controller RS-232
Remote Redundant Controller
10.3.3
Cache Synchronization on Write-Through
Page number
Chapter 12 Array Expansion
12-1
12-4
12.1 RAID Expansion
12.2 Mode 1 Expansion: Adding Drive to a logical drive
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-7
12-9
12.3 Mode 2 Expansion: Copy & Replace Drive with drives
of larger capacity
Expand Logical Drive (Making use of the added
capacity)
12.4
Expand Logical Volume
Example: RAID Expansion in Windows 2000
12-11
12-12
12.5
12.6
Page number:
Appendix C Controller Maintenance
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-2
C-2
Upgrading Firmware
New Features Supported with Firmware 3.21
Background RS-232 Firmware Download
Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Download
Redundant Controller Firmware Sync-version
Upgrading Firmware Using In-band SCSI
RAIDWatch Manager
+
Establish the In-band SCSI connection in RAIDWatch C-2
Manager
Upgrade Both Boot Record and Firmware Binaries
Upgrade the Firmware Binary Only
Upgrading Firmware Using RS-232 Terminal
Emulation
C-3
C-4
C-4
Establishing the connection for the RS-232 Terminal C-5
Emulation
C-5
C-6
Upgrading Both Boot Record and Firmware Binaries
Upgrading the Firmware Binary Only
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Tables
Chapter 1
Table 1 - 1 RAID Levels..................................................................................1-2
Chapter 2
Table 2 - 1 RAID Levels..................................................................................2-4
Table 2 - 1 Controller Parameter Settings....................................................2-10
Chapter 8
Table 8 - 1 Supported Configurations with Redundant Controller:............................. 8-8
Chapter 9
Table 9 - 1 Peripheral Device Type Parameters .........................................9-15
Table 9 - 2 Peripheral Device Type Settings: ..............................................9-16
Table 9 - 3 Cylinder/Head/Sector Mapping under Sun Solaris....................9-16
Chapter 10
Table 10 - 1 ID Mapping Status (Normal Operation)..................................10-10
Table 10 - 2 ID Mapping Status (Controller Failed)....................................10-10
List of Figures
Chapter 1
Figure 1 - 1 Logical Drive................................................................................1-1
Figure 1 - 2 NRAID .........................................................................................1-3
Figure 1 - 3 JBOD...........................................................................................1-3
Figure 1 - 4 RAID 0.........................................................................................1-4
Figure 1 - 5 RAID 1.........................................................................................1-4
Figure 1 - 6 RAID (0+1) ..................................................................................1-4
Figure 1 - 7 RAID 3.........................................................................................1-5
Figure 1 - 8 RAID 5.........................................................................................1-5
Figure 1 - 9 Local (Dedicated) Spare .............................................................1-6
Figure 1 - 10 Global Spare .............................................................................1-6
Figure 1 - 11 Global Spare Rebuild ................................................................1-6
Figure 1 - 13 Automatic Rebuild.....................................................................1-9
Figure 1 - 14 Manual Rebuild .......................................................................1-10
Figure 1 - 15 Logical Volume........................................................................1-12
Figure 1 - 16 Logical Drive Composed of 24 Drives.....................................1-13
Figure 1 - 17 Logical Volume with 4 Logical Drives......................................1-13
Figure 1 - 18 Logical Volume with Drives on Different Channels .................1-14
xviii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Figure 2 - 1 Optimization Setting.....................................................................2-3
Figure 2 - 2 Array Configuration Process........................................................2-5
Figure 2 - 3 SCSI ID/LUNs..............................................................................2-7
Figure 2 - 4 Connecting Drives .......................................................................2-7
Figure 2 - 5 Physical locations of drive members ...........................................2-8
Figure 2 - 6 Partitions in Logical Configurations .............................................2-8
Figure 2 - 7 Mapping Partitions to Host ID/LUNs............................................2-9
Figure 2 - 8 Mapping Partitions to LUNs under ID..........................................2-9
Chapter 5
Figure 5 - 1 Drive Space Allocated to the Last Partition ...............................5-17
Chapter 7
Figure 7 - 1 Drive Space Allocated to the Last Partition ...............................7-17
Chapter 8
Figure 8 - 1 Storage Pool..............................................................................8-14
Figure 8 - 2 Host-LUN Mapping....................................................................8-15
Figure 8 - 3 LUN Mask..................................................................................8-15
Figure 8 - 4 LUN Filtering - Configuration Sample........................................8-20
Chapter 9
Figure 9 - 1 SCSI ID/LUNs............................................................................9-11
Chapter 10
Figure 10 - 1 Redundant Controller Configuration Flowchart .......................10-2
Figure 10 - 2 Dual-Controller Using SCSI-Based Controllers.......................10-2
Figure 10 - 3 Dual-Controller Configuration Using Fibre-Based Controllers.10-3
Figure 10 - 4 Grouping Hard Drives..............................................................10-6
Figure 10 - 5 Partitioning of Logical Units.....................................................10-6
Figure 10 - 6 Mapping System Drives (Mapping LUNs) ...............................10-7
Figure 10 - 7 Mapping System Drives (IDs)..................................................10-8
Figure 10 - 8 Redundant Controller Channel Bus.........................................10-9
Figure 10 - 9 Controller Failover .................................................................10-10
Figure 10 - 10 Traffic Distribution................................................................10-12
Figure 10 - 11 Controller Failover ...............................................................10-13
Chapter 12
Figure 12 - 1 Logical Drive Expansion..........................................................12-3
Figure 12 - 2 Expansion by Adding Drive......................................................12-4
Figure 12 - 3 Expansion by Copy & Replace ................................................12-7
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Manual
This manual provides all of the necessary information that a system
administrator needs to configure and maintain one of Infortrend’s
external RAID controllers or subsystems. For hardware-related
information, please refer to the Hardware Manual that came with
your RAID controller. Also available is the User’s Manual for the
Java-based GUI RAID manager for remote and concurrent
management of RAID systems.
The order of the chapters is arranged in accordance with the steps
necessary for creating a RAID.
The terminal screen displays as well as the LCD messages may vary
when using controllers running different firmware versions.
Chapter 1
introduces basic RAID concepts and configurations,
including RAID levels, logical drives, spare drives,
and the use of logical volumes. It is recommended
that users unfamiliar with RAID technologies should
read this chapter before creating a configuration.
tells the user how to begin with a RAID. At the
beginning of this chapter, we raise some basic
questions of which the user should know the
answers prior to creating a RAID.
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
teaches the user how to configure the RS-232C
terminal emulation interface and the connection
through a LAN port.
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
helps the user to understand screen messages on the
LCD display.
gives step-by-step instructions on creating a RAID
using the LCD keypad panel.
teaches the user how to interpret the information
found on the RS-232 terminal emulation.
gives step-by-step instructions on how to create a
RAID via the RS-232 session.
includes all the Fibre channel-specific functions
implemented since the firmware release 3.12.
provides the advanced options for RAID
configuration. Some of the new functions from
firmware release 3.11 and above are given the
detailed explanations in this chapter.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
addresses the concerns regarding the redundant
controller configuration and the configuration
process.
provides the recording forms with which a system
administrator can make
configuration.
a
record of his
shows how to expand a configured array or logical
volume.
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Appendix B
outlines the menu structure of the LCD front panel
operation.
lists the important firmware features supported with
the firmware version, arranged in accordance with
the latest firmware version as of press date.
teaches the user how to upgrade firmware and boot
record.
Appendix C
Appendix D
lists all of the controller event messages.
Firmware Version & Other Information
Firmware version: 3.31E and above
Part number for this manual: M0000U0G16
Date: 6/ 25/ 03
Revision History:
Version 1.0:
Version 1.1:
Version 1.2:
•
•
•
initial release
added redundant controller configuration
Added host-side and drive-side SCSI
parameters
•
added S.M.A.R.T. with implemented Fault-
Prevention methods.
•
•
added system functions
added Fault-bus configuration to be
compatible with 3101 and 3102 series
added Host-side interface installation
details
added Event Messages for error message
identification
added all advanced functions available
since 2.23K and 3.11F upward
added a functional table of content for
quick searching functions
moved SCSI/ Fibre Cable Specifications to
Hardware Manual
•
•
•
•
•
Version 1.3:
•
added Chapter 8 "Fibre Operation" for the
new functions available since firmware
release 3.12.
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Version 1.4:
•
•
•
•
•
added firmware features available with
firmware revisions 3.14, 3.15, and 3.21
revised details about redundant controllers,
host LUN mapping, etc.
modified string definitions in Chapter 14
"In-band SCSI Drives and Utilities" section
Corrected descriptions of "Controller
Unique Identifier"
Added the configuration process for out-of-
band configuration via LAN port
Removed Chapter 14
Revised the descriptions for some
functional items
Added firmware features available from
revision 3.25
Added features available by revision 3.31
Removed Appendix E
Moved array expansion to Chapter 12
Added variable stripe size, write policy per
array
Version 1.5:
Version 1.61:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Added media scan
Added
controller
immediate
array
availability, time zone, date and time
setting
•
•
Added IO channel diagnostics
Added controller Auto-Shutdown and
cache-flush mechanisms
•
•
•
•
Added system monitoring via enclosure
modules
Added disabling cache coherency using
write-through mode
Added descriptions about new firmware
utility items
Added details about enabling RAIDWatch
and its sub-modules via Ethernet port
xxii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
1
RAID Functions:
An Introduction
Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks, or RAID, offers the following
advantages: Availability, Capacity, and Performance. Choosing the
right RAID level and drive failure management can increase
Capacity and Performance, subsequently increasing Availability.
Infortrend's external RAID controllers provide complete RAID
functionality and enhanced drive failure management.
1.1
Logical Drive
Figure 1 - 1 Logical Drive
The advantages mentioned above are achieved by creating
“logical drives.” A logical drive is an array of independent
physical drives. The logical drive appears to the host as a
contiguous volume, the same as a local hard disk drive does.
1
2
The following section describes the different methods to create
logical arrays of disk drives, such as spanning, mirroring and
data parity. These methods are referred to as “RAID levels.”
3
Logical Drive
1.2
Logical Volume
What is a logical volume?
The concept of a logical volume is very similar to that of a logical
drive. A logical volume is the combination of one or several logical
drives. These logical drives are combined into a larger capacity
using the RAID 0 method (striping). When data is written to a
logical volume, it is first broken into data segments and then striped
across different logical drives in a logical volume. Each logical drive
Functional Description
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
then distributes data segments to its member drives according to the
specific RAID level it is composed of.
The member logical drives can be composed of the same RAID level
or each of a different RAID level. A logical volume can be divided
into a maximum of 64 partitions. During operation, the host sees a
non-partitioned logical volume or a partition of a logical volume as
one single physical drive.
1.3
RAID Levels
RAID stands for Redundant Array of Independent Disks. Using a
RAID storage subsystem has the following advantages:
•
Provides disk spanning by weaving all connected drives into
one single volume.
•
Increases disk access speed by breaking data into several blocks
when reading/ writing to several drives in parallel. With RAID,
storage speed increases as more drives are added as the channel
bus allows.
•
Provides fault-tolerance by mirroring or parity operation.
What are the RAID levels?
Table 1 - 1 RAID Levels
RAID Level
NRAID
RAID 0
Description
Non-RAID
Disk Striping
Mirroring Plus Striping (if
N>1)
Striping with Parity on
dedicated disk
Striping with interspersed
parity
Capacity
Data Availability
N
N
N/2
==NRAID
>>NRAID
==RAID 5
>>NRAID
==RAID 5
>>NRAID
==RAID 5
RAID 1 (0+1)
N-1
N-1
RAID 3
RAID 5
Striping with RAID 1
logical drives
/
/
/
>>NRAID
>>RAID 5
RAID 10
(Logical Volume)
RAID 30
Striping with RAID 3
logical drives
>>NRAID
>>RAID 5
(Logical Volume)
RAID 50
Striping with RAID 5
logical drives
>>NRAID
>>RAID 5
(Logical Volume)
NOTE: Drives on different channels can be included in a logical
drive and logical drives of different RAID levels can be used to
Infortrend
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
configure a logical volume. There are more combinations than
RAID 10, 30, and 50.
RAID Level
NRAID
Performance Sequential
Drive
Performance Random
Drive
R: Highest
W: Highest
R: High
W: Medium
R: High
W: Medium
R: High
R: High
RAID 0
W: Highest
R: Medium
W: Low
R: Medium
W: Low
RAID 1 (0+1)
RAID 3
R: High
RAID 5
W: Medium
W: Low
NRAID
Disk Spanning
Figure 1 - 2 NRAID
NRAID
Minimum
Disks required
Capacity
Redundancy
2 G B H a r d D r i v e
3 G B H a r d D r i v e
1 G B H a r d D r i v e
2 G B H a r d D r i v e
1
N
No
NRAID stands for Non-RAID. The capacity of all
the drives is combined to become one logical
drive (no block striping). In other words, the
capacity of the logical drive is the total capacity of
the physical drives. NRAID does not provide
data redundancy.
2 + 3 + 1 + 2 = 8 G B
L o g i c a l D r i v e
JBOD
Single Drive Control
Figure 1 - 3 JBOD
JBOD
Minimum
Disks required
Capacity
Redundancy
1
2 GB Hard Drive
3 GB Hard Drive
2 GB
1
No
3 GB
1 GB Hard Drive
1 GB
JBOD stands for Just a Bunch of Drives. The
controller treats each drive as a stand-alone
disk, therefore each drive is an independent
logical drive. JBOD does not provide data
redundancy.
2 GB Hard Drive
2 GB
Functional Description
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAID 0
Disk Striping
Figure 1 - 4 RAID 0
RAID 0
Minimum
Disks required
Capacity
Redundancy
2
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 8
N
No
Block 1
Block 2
Block 4
Block 6
Block 8
Block 3
Block 5
Block 7
RAID 0 provides the highest performance
but no redundancy. Data in the logical
drive is striped (distributed) across several
physical drives.
RAID 1
Disk Mirroring
Figure 1 - 5 RAID 1
RAID 1
Disks required
Capacity
Logical Drive
2
N/2
Yes
Physical Disks
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Redundancy
Mirroring
Block 1
Block 2
Mirror 1
Mirror 2
Mirror 3
Mirror 4
RAID 1 mirrors the data stored in one
hard drive to another. RAID 1 can only
be performed with two hard drives. If
there are more than two hard drives,
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 8
Block 3
Block 4
RAID
(0+1) will
be
performed
automatically.
RAID (0+1)
Disk Striping with Mirroring
Figure 1 - 6 RAID (0+1)
RAID (0+1)
Minimum
Physical Disks
4
Logical Drive
Disks required
Striping
Block 1
Block 3
Block 5
Block 7
Block 2
Block 4
Block 6
Capacity
Redundancy
N/2
Yes
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 8
.
.
RAID (0+1) combines RAID 0 and RAID 1 -
Mirroring and Striping. RAID (0+1) allows
multiple drive failure because of the full
redundancy of the hard drives. If there are
more than two hard drives assigned to
perform RAID 1, RAID (0+1) will be
automatically applied.
.
.
Mirror 1
Mirror 3
Mirror 5
Mirror 7
Mirror 2
Mirror 4
Mirror 6
Block 8
.
.
Mirror 8
Striping
.
.
.
.
Infortrend
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT!
•
“RAID (0+1)” will not appear in the list of RAID levels supported by the
controller. If you wish to perform RAID 1, the controller will determine
whether to perform RAID 1 or RAID (0+1). This will depend on the
number of drives that has been selected for the logical drive.
RAID 3
Disk Striping with Dedicated Parity Disk
RAID 3
Minimum
Figure 1 - 7 RAID 3
3
Disks required
Logical Drive
Physical Disks
Capacity
Redundancy
N-1
Yes
Dedicated
Parity
Block 1
St r ip in g
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 1
Block 3
Block 5
Block 7
Block 2
Block 4
Block 6
Block 8
Parity (1,2)
Parity (3,4)
Parity (5,6)
Parity (7,8)
RAID 3 performs Block Striping with
Dedicated Parity. One drive member is
dedicated to storing the parity data. When
a drive member fails, the controller can
recover/ regenerate the lost data of the
failed drive from the dedicated parity
drive.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Block 8
.
.
RAID 5
Striping with Interspersed Parity
RAID 5
Minimum
Figure 1 - 8 RAID 5
3
Disks required
Capacity
Logical Drive
Physical Disks
N-1
Yes
Redundancy
Block 1
Striping + non-dedicated Parity
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
RAID 5 is similar to RAID 3 but the
parity data is not stored in one
Block 1
Parity (3,4)
Block 6
Block 2
Block 3
Parity (1,2)
Block 4
Parity (5,6)
Block 8
Block 5
dedicated
hard
drive.
Parity
Block 7
Parity (7,8)
information is interspersed across the
drive array. In the event of a failure, the
controller can recover/ regenerate the
lost data of the failed drive from the
other surviving drives.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Block 8
.
.
RAID 30 an RAID 50 are implemented as logical volumes,
please refer to the proceeding discussions for more details.
Functional Description
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4
Spare Drives
Global and Local Spare Drives
Figure 1 - 9 Local (Dedicated) Spare
Local Spare Drive is a standby drive
assigned to serve one specified logical
drive. When a member drive of this
specified logical drive fails, the Local
Spare Drive becomes a member drive
and automatically starts to rebuild.
When one member
drive fails, the Local
Spare Drive joins the
logical drive and
automatically starts
to rebuild.
Local
Spare
Drive
1
2
X
LS
3
Logical Drive
Figure 1 - 10 Global Spare
Global Spare Drive
GS
Global Spare Drive
GS
Global Spare Drive not only
serves one specified logical
drive. When a member drive
from any of the logical drive
fails, the Global Spare Drive will
join that logical drive and
automatically starts to rebuild.
1
2
1
2
1
4
2
Global Spare Drives serve
any logical drive.
3
3
Logical Drive 0
Logical Drive 1
Logical Drive 2
Figure 1 - 11 Global Spare Rebuild
The external RAID controllers provide
both Local Spare Drive and Global
Spare Drive functions. On certain
occasions,
applying
these
two
functions together will better fit
various needs. Take note though that
the Local Spare Drive always has
higher priority than the Global Spare
Drive.
When a member drive from
any logical drive fails, the
Global Spare Drive joins
that logical drive and
automatically starts to
rebuild.
Functional Description
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the example shown below, the member of Logical Drive 0 are 9
GB drives, and the members in Logical Drives 1 and 2 are 4 GB
drives.
Figure 1 - 12 Mixing Local and Global Spares
It is not possible for the 4 GB Global
Spare Drive to join Logical Drive 0
because of its insufficient capacity.
However, using a 9GB drive as the
Global Spare drive for a failed drive that
comes from Logical Drive 1 or 2 will
bring huge amount of excess capacity
since these logical drives require 4 GB
only. In the diagram below, the 9 GB
Local Spare Drive will aid Logical Drive
0 once a drive in this logical drive fails. If
the failed drive is in Logical Drive 1 or 2,
Local Spare Drive
Global Spare Drive
GS
LS
(9GB)
(4GB)
1
2
1
2
1
2
(4GB) (4GB)
(4GB) (4GB)
(9GB) (9GB)
(4GB) (4GB)
3
(9GB)
4
3
Logical Drive 0
Logical Drive 1
Logical Drive 2
the
4
GB Global Spare drive will
immediately give aid to the failed drive.
A Local Spare always has
higher priority than a
Global Spare.
Infortrend
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5
Identifying Drives
Assuming there is a failed drive in the RAID 5 logical drive, make it
a point to replace the failed drive with a new, healthy drive to keep
the logical drive working.
If, when trying to remove a failed drive you mistakenly remove
the wrong drive, you will no longer be able to access the logical
drive because you have inadequately failed another drive.
To prevent this from happening, the controller provides an easy way
to identify the faulty drive. By forcing certain drive LEDs to light
for a configurable period of time, the faulty drive can be identified,
and thus reducing the chance of removing the wrong drive. This
function is especially helpful in an installation site operating with
hundreds of drives.
R/W LED
R/W LED
Flash Selected SCSI Drive
The Read/ Write LED of the drive you selected will light steadily
for a configurable period of time, from 1 to 999 seconds.
LED Steadily ON
Flash All SCSI Drives
The Read/ Write LEDs of all connected drives will
light for a configurable period of time. If the LED of
R/W LED
R/W LED
LED Steadily ON
the defective drive did not light on the “Flash
LED Steadily ON
Selected SCSI Drive” function, use “Flash All SCSI
Drives” to verify the fault. If the “Flash All SCSI
Drives” function is executed, and the defective drive’s
LED Steadily ON
LED still does not respond, it can be a drive tray
LED Steadily ON
problem or the drive is dead.
L E D
L E D
LED Steadily ON
Flash All but Selected Drives
Except the selected drive, the Read/ Write LEDs of all
R /W
connected drives will light for a configurable period of time ranging
from 1 to 999 seconds. If an administrator can not be sure of the
exact location of specific drive, this function will help to indicate
where it is. This can prevent removal of the wrong drive when a
drive fails and is about to be replaced.
L E D
L E D
The drive identifying function can be selected from “Main
Menu”/ ”View and Edit SCSI Drives”/ ”Identify SCSI Drives.”
Functional Description
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.6
Rebuild
Automatic Rebuild and Manual Rebuild
1. Automatic Rebuild
Figure 1 - 13 Automatic Rebuild
Any
Rebuild using the
local spare drive
Yes
Yes
local spare drive
assigned to logical
drive?
One member drive
fails in logical drive
No
Any
global spare drive
assigned to logical
drive?
Rebuild using the
global spare drive
No
“Periodic
Auto-Detect Failure
Drive Swap Check Time”
enabled?
Waiting for spare
drive to be added
or manual rebuild
No
Yes
Has the
failed drive been
swapped?
Yes
Rebuild using the
swapped drive
No
Keep detecting if drive
has been swapped or
spare drive has been
added
Rebuild with Spare: When a member drive in a logical drive
fails, the controller will first examine whether there is a Local Spare
Drive assigned to this logical drive. If yes, rebuild is automatically
started.
If there is no Local Spare available, the controller will search for a
Global Spare. If there is a Global Spare, rebuild automatically
begins using the Global Spare.
Failed Drive Swap Detect: If neither Local Spare Drive nor
Global Spare Drive is available, and the "Periodic Auto-Detect
Failure Drive Swap Check Time" is "Disabled," the controller will not
attempt to rebuild unless the user applies a forced-manual rebuild.
When the "Periodic Auto-Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time" is
"Enabled" (i.e., a check time interval has been selected), the
controller will detect whether a faulty drive has been swapped (by
checking the failed drive's channel/ ID). Once the failed drive has
been replaced by
immediately.
a
healthy drive, the rebuild will begin
Infortrend
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the failed drive is not swapped but a local spare is added to the
logical drive, rebuild will begin with the spare.
If the S.M.A.R.T. function is enabled on drives and the reaction
scheme is selected for securing data on a failing drive, spare will
also be used for restoring data. Please refer to Chapter 9, Advanced
Functions, for more details.
2. Manual Rebuild
When a user applies forced-manual rebuild, the controller will first
examine whether there is any Local Spare assigned to the logical
drive. If yes, it will automatically start to rebuild.
If there is no Local Spare available, the controller will search for a
Global Spare. If there is a Global Spare, logical drive rebuild will be
automatically conducted.
Figure 1 - 14 Manual Rebuild
Any
User applies
forced-manual
rebuild
Yes
Yes
Yes
Local Spare Drive
assigned to this
logical drive?
Rebuild using the
Local Spare Drive
No
Any
Global Spare Drive
assigned to this
logical drive?
Rebuild using the
Global Spare Drive
No
Rebuild using the
replaced drive
Has the failed drive
been replaced?
No
Wait for
manual rebuild
I
If none of the spares are available, the controller will examine the
SCSI channel and ID of the failed drive. Once the failed drive has
been replaced by a healthy one, it starts to rebuild using the new
drive. If there is no available drive for rebuilding, the controller will
not attempt to rebuild until the user applies another forced-manual
rebuild.
Functional Description
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Concurrent Rebuild in RAID (0+1)
RAID (0+1) allows multiple drive failures and rebuild to be
concurrently conducted on more than one of its members. Drives
newly swapped must be scanned and set as Local Spares. These
drives will be used for rebuild at the same time (you do not need to
repeat the rebuild process for each member drive).
Infortrend
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.7
Logical Volume (Multi-Level RAID)
What is a logical volume?
Figure 1 - 15 Logical Volume
…….
Logical
Drive
…….
Physical Drives
…….
Logical
Logical
Drive
Volume
…….
Physical Drives
…….
Logical
Drive
…….
Physical Drives
A logical volume is a combination of RAID 0 (Striping) and other
RAID levels. Data written to a logical volume is first broken into
smaller data segments and striped across different logical drives in a
logical volume. Each logical drive then distributes data segments to
its member drives according to its mirroring, parity, or striping
scheme. A logical volume can be divided into a maximum of eight
partitions. During normal operation, the host sees a non-partitioned
logical volume or a partition of a partitioned logical volume as one
single physical drive.
The benefits of using a logical volume have been achieved by:
1. Extending the MTBF (mean time between failure) by using more
redundancy drives (spare drives).
2. Decreasing the time to rebuild and reducing the chance of data
loss by simultaneous drive failures because drives are included
in different drive groups using a multi-level logical structure.
3. Avoiding the chance of data loss by channel bus failure with
flexible drive deployment.
As diagramed below, numerous drives can be included in a logical
drive, and one of them is used for redundancy. By grouping these
drives into several logical drives, and then into a logical volume,
chance of failing two drives in a logical unit is greatly reduced. Each
logical drive can have one or more local spares. A failed drive can
be immediately replaced by a local spare, reducing the risk of losing
data if another should fail soon afterwards.
Functional Description
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 1 - 16 Logical Drive Composed of 24 Drives
RAID 5 Logical Drive
24 drives, 1 redundancy drive
Configuration A - One logical drive with all 24 drives
As illustrated above, Configuration A is a RAID 5 logical drive
consisting of 24 physical drives. Configuration B is a logical volume
made of four RAID 5 logical drives.
Figure 1 - 17 Logical Volume with 4 Logical Drives
Configuration B can help to reduce the chance of encountering
points of failure:
a) Higher Redundancy: Configuration A has one dedicated spare,
while Configuration B allows the configuration of four spares. In
Configuration B, the risk of simultaneous drive failure in a logical
drive is significantly reduced than in Configuration A. The total
array capacity is comparatively smaller by the use of spares.
b) Less Rebuild Time: The time during rebuild is a time of hazard.
For example, a RAID 5 logical drive can only withstand single drive
failure, if another drive fails during the rebuild process, data will be
lost. The time span for rebuilding a faulty drive should be
Infortrend
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
minimized to reduce the possibility of having two drives to fail at
the same time.
Configuration A is a large logical drive and takes a long time to
rebuild. All members will be involved during the rebuild process.
In Configuration B, the time span is shorter because only 6 members
will participate when rebuilding any of the logical drives.
c) Channel Failure Protection: Channel failure may sometimes
result from absurd matters like a cable failure. A channel failure
will cause multiple drives to fail at the same time and inevitably
lead to a fatal failure. Using a logical volume with drives coming
from different drive channels can get around this point of failure.
Figure 1 - 18 Logical Volume with Drives on Different
Channels
CH4
CH5 CH6
CH1
CH2 CH3
RAID 5
Logical
Drive
CH2/ID0
CH1/ID0
CH3/ID0
CH4/ID0 CH5/ID0 CH6/ID0
RAID 5
Logical
Drive
CH1/ID1 CH2/ID1 CH3/ID1 CH4/ID1 CH5/ID1 CH6/ID1
Logical
Volume
RAID 5
Logical
Drive
CH4/ID2 CH5/ID2 CH6/ID2
CH1/ID2 CH2/ID2 CH3/ID2
Logical Volume
24 drives, 4 redundancy drive
RAID 5
Logical
Drive
CH4/ID3 CH5/ID3 CH6/ID3
CH1/ID3 CH2/ID3 CH3/ID3
Configuration C - One logical volume with 4 logical drives
As illustrated above, should one of the drive channels fail, each
logical drive loses one of its members. Logical drives still have the
chance to rebuild its members. Data remains intact and the rebuild
can be performed after the failed channel is recovered. No access
interruptions to the logical volume will be experienced from the host
side.
Spare drives assigned to a logical volume?
A Local Spare can not be assigned to a Logical Volume. If a drive
fails, it fails as a member of a logical drive; therefore, the controller
allows Local Spare's assignment to logical drives rather than logical
volumes.
Functional Description
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limitations:
The logical volume can not have any logical drive stated as "fatal
failed.” If there is any failed drive in any of its member logical
drives, controller will start to rebuild that logical drive. Should any
of the member logical drives fail fatally, the logical volume fails
fatally and data will not be accessible.
To avoid a logical volume failure:
1. Logical drives as members to a logical volume should be
configured in RAID levels that provide redundancy - RAID
levels 1 (0+1), 3, or 5.
2. Rebuild the logical drive as soon as possible whenever a drive
failure occurs. Use of local spares is recommended.
3. A logical drive should be composed of physical drives from
different drive channels. Compose the logical drive with drives
from different drive channels to avoid the fatal loss of data
caused by bus failure.
Partitioning - partitioning the logical drive or
partitioning the logical volume?
Once a logical drive has been divided into partitions, the logical
drive can no longer be used as a member of a logical volume. The
members of a logical volume should have one partition only with
the entire capacity.
If you want to use a partitioned logical drive for a logical volume,
delete the other partitions in this logical drive until there remains
one partition only with the entire capacity. Mind that deleting the
partition of the logical drive will also destroy all data. Data should
be backed up before making partition configuration.
When a logical drive is used as a member to a logical volume, this
logical drive can no longer be partitioned in “View and Edit Logical
Drives.” Instead, the Logical Volume can be partitioned into 8 in
“View and Edit Logical Volume.”
The procedure for partitioning a logical volume is the same as that
for partitioning a logical drive. After the logical volume has been
partitioned, map each partition to a host ID/ LUN to make the
partitions available as individual drives.
Infortrend
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different write policies within a logical volume?
As members of a logical volume, all logical drives will be forced to adopt a
consistent write policy. Whenever the write policy of a logical volume is
changed, for example, the corresponding setting in its members will also be
changed.
RAID expansion with logical volume?
The Logical Volume can also be expanded using the RAID
expansion function. The concept of expanding a logical volume is
similar to that of expanding a logical drive. To perform RAID
expansion on a logical drive, replace each member physical drive
with a drive of larger capacity or add a new drive, then perform
logical drive expansion to utilize the newly-added capacity. For
information about RAID expansion, please refer to Chapter 9
"Advanced Configurations."
To perform RAID expansion on a logical volume, expand each
member logical drive, then perform “RAID Expansion” on the
logical volume.
Steps to expand a Logical Volume:
1. Expand each member logical drive.
2. Expand the logical volume.
3. Map the newly-added capacity (in the form of a new partition)
to a host LUN.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
If a logical unit has already been partitioned, and you wish to expand its
capacity, the added capacity will be appended to the last partition. You
will not be able to proceed with expansion using firmware version earlier
than 3.27 when the unit already has 8 partitions.
Unless you move your data and merge two of the partitions, you will be
not allowed to expand your logical volume. This is a precautionary
limitation on logical unit expansion.
Different controller settings using logical volume?
Redundant Controller:
Without logical volume - logical drives can be assigned to the
primary or the secondary controller. The host I/ Os directed to a
logical drive will be managed by the controller which owns the
Functional Description
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
logical drive. If a controller fails, the host I/ Os originally assigned
to the failed controller will be taken over by the existing controller.
When the controller fails back (failed controller being replaced by a
new one), logical drives will be returned to the replacement
controller in its original configuration.
With logical volume - logical volumes can also be assigned to
different controllers. The only difference is logical volumes will be
used as base units when shifting control during controller failure.
A logical volume with logical drives of different
levels?
Multi-level RAID systems
1. RAID (0+1) - this is a standard feature of Infortrend RAID
controllers. It brings the benefits of RAID 1 (high availability)
and RAID 0 (enhanced I/ O performance through striping).
Simply choose multiple drives (more than two) to compose a
RAID 1 logical drive, RAID (0+1) will be automatically
implemented.
2. RAID (3+0) - a logical volume is
a
multi-level RAID
implementation by its own rights. A logical volume is a logical
composition which stripes data across several logical drives (the
RAID 0 method). A logical volume with several RAID 3
members can be considered as a RAID (3+0), or RAID 53 as
defined in "The RAID Book" (from The RAID Advisory Board).
3. RAID (5+0) - a logical volume with several RAID 5 members.
Infortrend
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
2
RAID Planning
This chapter summarizes the procedures and provides some useful
tools for first-time configuration:
2.1 Considerations:
things you should know before setting
up
2.2 Configuring the
Array:
the most common configuration
procedure
2.3 Operation Theory:
the theory behind data bus and system
drive mapping
2.4 Functional Table of
Contents
a useful tool that helps you to quickly
locate a firmware function
2.1 Considerations
After you understand the basic ideas behind RAID levels, you may
still be wondering about how to begin. Here are the answers to
some questions that may help you through the decision making.
1. How many physical drives do you have?
When initially creating the drive groups, you should know how
many drives you have in your RAID system or in the JBOD
attached to the RAID controlling unit.
2. How many drives on each drive channel?
The optimal system planning is always a compromise between
pros and cons. As a general rule, the number of drives you
should connect on each channel equals the data bus bandwidth
divided by the maximum transfer rate you can get from each of
your hard drives. Knowing the mechanical performance of
your hard drives can help to determine how many drives
should be connected over a drive channel.
Always use fast and large drives of the same capacity for your
disk array. A logical drive composed of an adequate number of
2-1
RAID Planning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
larger drives can be more efficient than that of many but
smaller drives.
3. How many drives would you like to appear to the
host computer?
It must be decided what capacity will be included in a logical
configuration of drives, be it a logical drive or a logical volume.
A logical configuration of drives will appear to the host as a
single capacity volume.
You may compose a large logical volume consisting of drives
on different drive channels, and have it partitioned into smaller
partitions. Each partition will appear as an independent
capacity volume. In a performance-oriented configuration, you
may configure the same number of drives into several RAID 0
logical drives just to get the most out of the array performance.
4. What kind of host application?
The frequency of read/ write activities can vary from one host
application to another. The application can be a SQL server,
Oracle server, Informix, or other data base server of a
transaction-based nature. Applications like video playback and
video post-production editing require read/ write activities of
larger files coming in a sequential order.
Choose an appropriate RAID level for what is the most
important for a given application – capacity, availability, or
performance. Before creating your RAID, you need to choose
an optimization scheme and optimize each array/ controller for
your application. Stripe size and write policy can be adjusted
on a per logical drive basis.
5. Dual loop, hub, or switch?
Unpredictable situations like a cable coming loose can cause
system down time. Fibre channel dual loop or redundant data
paths using flexible LUN mapping method can guarantee there
is no single point of failure. The use of Fibre channel hub or
switch makes cabling and topology more flexible. Change the
channel mode, connection type, and other associated settings to
adjust the controller to your demands.
6.
Infortrend
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimization Mode
Figure 2 - 1 Optimization Setting
You should select an optimization scheme best suited to your
applications before configuring a RAID array. Once the
optimization mode is selected, it will be applied to all arrays
managed by the RAID controller.
Two options are available: Sequential I/ Os and Random I/ Os.
You may refer to the “Caching Parameters” section in Chapter
5 and Chapter 7 for the stripe size variables and its relations
with RAID levels.
Numerous controller parameters are tuned for each
optimization mode. Although stripe size can be adjusted on a
per logical drive basis, users are not encouraged to make a
change to the default values.
For example, smaller stripe sizes are ideal for I/ Os that are
transaction-based and randomly accessed. However, using the
wrong stripe size can cause problems. When an array of the
4KB stripe size receives files of 128KB size, each drive will have
to write many more times to store data fragments of the size of
4KB.
Unlike the previous firmware versions, controller optimization
mode can be changed without changing the array stripe size.
The default values in optimization modes guarantee the
optimal performance for most applications. Consult Table 2-2
for all the controller parameters that are related to system
performance and fault- tolerance.
7. What RAID level?
Different RAID levels provide varying levels of performance
and fault tolerance.
RAID Planning
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 2 - 1
RAID Levels
RAID Level Description
Capacity Data Availability
NRAID
RAID 0
Non-RAID
Disk Striping
N
N
N/2
N/A
==NRAID
>>NRAID
==RAID 5
>>NRAID
==RAID 5
>>NRAID
==RAID 5
Higher; depends
on its members
RAID 1 (0+1) Mirroring Plus Striping (if N>1)
RAID 3
RAID 5
Striping with Parity on
dedicated disk
Striping with interspersed
parity
Striping one or more logical
drives of different RAID levels
N-1
N-1
*
Logical
Volume
RAID Level
NRAID
Performance Sequential Performance Random
Drive
Drive
RAID 0
R: Highest
W: Highest
R: High
W: Medium
R: High
W: Medium
R: High
R: High
W: Highest
R: Medium
W: Low
R: Medium
W: Low
RAID 1 (0+1)
RAID 3
RAID 5
R: High
W: Medium
W: Low
Logical Volume
Depends on its members; Depends on its members
see above
8. Any spare drives?
(Swap Drive Rebuild / Spare Drive Rebuild)
Spare drives allow for the unattended rebuilding of a failed
drive, heightening the degree of fault tolerance. If there is no
spare drive, data rebuild has to be manually initiated by
replacing a failed drive with a healthy one.
As is often ignored, a spare drive (whether dedicated or global)
must have a capacity no smaller than the members of a logical
drive.
9. Limitations?
Firmware 3.31 and above support 64-bit LBA. A maximum of
64TB capacity can be included in single logical drive.
Up to 128 members can be included in each logical drive.
Extreme array sizes can cause operational problems with
system backup and should be avoided.
Infortrend
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Configuring the Array:
2.2.1 Starting a RAID System
Here is a flowchart illustrating basic steps to be taken when
configuring a RAID system. Hardware installation should be
completed before any configuration takes place.
Figure 2 - 2 Array Configuration Process
Drives must be configured and the controller properly initialized
before a host computer can access the storage capacity.
1. Use the LCD panel, terminal program, or the RAIDWatch
manager to start configuring your array.
2. When powered on, the controller scans all the hard drives that
are connected through the drive channels. If a hard drive is
connected after the controller completes initialization, use the
"Scan SCSI Drive" function to let the controller recognize its
presence.
3. Optimize controller's parameters for your applications.
4. Configure one or more logical drives to contain your hard drives
based on the desired RAID level, and/ or partition the logical
drive or logical volume into one or several partitions.
RAID Planning
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
•
A "Logical Drive" is a set of drives grouped together to operate under a
given RAID level and it appears as a single contiguous volume. The
controller is capable of grouping drives into as many as 128 logical
drives, configured in the same or different RAID levels.
•
A total of 32 "Logical Volumes" can be created each from one or several
logical drives. A logical drive or logical volume can be divided into a
maximum of 64 "Partitions."
5. The next step is to make logical drives or storage partitions
available through the host ports. When associated with a host
ID or LUN number, each capacity volume appears as one
system drive. The host SCSI or Fibre adapter will recognize the
system drives after the host bus is re-initialized.
6. The last step is to save your configuration profile in the host
system drive or to the logical drives you created.
The controller is totally independent from host operating system.
Host operating system will not be able to tell whether the attached
storage is a physical hard drive or the virtual system drives created
by the RAID controller.
Infortrend
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Operation Theory
2.3.1
I/O Channel, SCSI ID, and LUN
Depending on the interface used by a RAID system, a SCSI drive
channel (SCSI bus) can connect up to 15 drives (excluding the RAID
controller itself). A Fibre channel 125 drives in a loop. Each device
occupies one unique ID.
Figure 2 - 3 SCSI ID/LUNs
The figure on the left illustrates the idea of mapping a system
drive to host ID/ LUN combinations. The host ID is like a
cabinet, and the drawers are the LUNs (LUN is short for Logical
Unit Number). Each cabinet (host ID) can have up to 32
drawers (LUNs). Data can be made available through one of the
LUNs of a host ID. Most host adapters treat a LUN like another
device.
2.3.2
Grouping Drives into an Array
Figure 2 - 4 Connecting Drives
The physical connection of a RAID controller should be similar to
the one shown above. Drives are connected through I/ O paths that
have been designated as drive channels.
The next diagram shows two logical configurations of drives and the
physical locations of its members. Using drives from different
channels can lower the risk of fatal failure if one of the drive
channels should fail. There is no limitation on the locations of
spares.
RAID Planning
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 2 - 5 Physical locations of drive members
A drive can be assigned as the Local Spare Drive that serves one
specific logical drive, or as a Global Spare Drive that participates in
the rebuild of any logical drive. Spares automatically joins a logical
drive when a drive fails. Spares are not applicable to logical drives
that have no data redundancy (NRAID and RAID 0).
Figure 2 - 6 Partitions in Logical Configurations
You may divide a logical drive or logical volume into partitions of
desired capacity, or use the entire capacity as single volume.
1. It is not a requirement to partition any logical configuration.
Partitioning helps to manage a massive capacity.
2. Note that a logical drive can not be included in a logical volume
if it has already been partitioned.
Infortrend
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3.3 Making Arrays Available to Hosts
Figure 2 - 7 Mapping Partitions to Host ID/LUNs
Host ID mapping is a process that associates a logical configuration
of drives with a host channel ID/ LUN. To avail logical partitions on
host channel(s), map each partition to a host ID or one of the LUNs
under host IDs. Each ID or LUN will appear to the host adapter as
one virtual hard drive.
There are alternatives in mapping for different purposes:
1. Mapping a logical configuration to IDs/ LUNs on different host
channels allows two host computers to access the same array.
This method is applicable when the array is shared in a
clustering backup.
2. Mapping partitions of an array to IDs/ LUNs across separate
host channels can distribute workload over multiple data paths.
3. Mapping across separate host channels also helps to make use of
all bandwidth in
a
multi-path configuration.
Firmware
automatically manages the process when one data path fails and
the workload on the failed data path has to be shifted to the
existing data paths.
Figure 2 - 8 Mapping Partitions to LUNs under ID
RAID Planning
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4
Tunable Parameters
Fine-tune the controller and the array parameters for your host
applications. Although the factory defaults guarantee the optimized
controller operation, you may refer to the table below to facilitate
tuning of your array. Some of the performance and fault-tolerance
settings may also be changed later during the preparation process of
your disk array.
Take this table as a check list and make sure you have each item set
to an appropriate value.
Table 2 - 2 Controller Parameter Settings
Parameters that should be configured at the initial stage of system
configuration
➀
Parameters that can be changed later
➀
Non-critical
➀
User-Defined
Parameters
Default
Alternate Settings
Fault Management:
Enabled when
Spare Drive is
available
RAID 1 + Local Spare
RAID 3 + Local Spare
RAID 5 + Local Spare
Global Spare
➀ Automatic Logical
Drive Rebuild - Spare
Drive
Disabled
Detect Only
Perpetual Clone
Clone + Replace
➀ S.M.A.R.T.
Manual function Replace After Clone
Perpetual Clone
➀ Clone Failing Drive
➀ Rebuild Priority
Low (higher
priority requires
more system
resource)
Low
Normal
Improved
High
Disabled
On LD Initialization
On LD Rebuild
On Normal Drive Writes
Enabled
➀ Verification on Write
Disabled
➀ SDRAM ECC
➀ Event Notification
Reports to user
interface and
Over Dial-out Modem
Over SNMP Trap
onboard alarm
Over Java-Based Management
Software
System default
Upper and Lower event triggering
thresholds configurable
➀ System Events
Controller:
*
Host, Drive, RCCOM, Drive +
RCCOM
*
➀ Channel Mode
*
Preset on
➀ Host and Drive channel IDs
hex number from 0 to FFFFF (FW 3.25
and above)
➀ Controller Unique
some
Identifier
models
Auto
Depends on problems solving
➀ Data rate
RAID Planning
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N/ A
➀ Date and time
➀ Time zone
+ 8 hrs
Optimization Mode:
Enabled
Disabled
➀ Write-back Cache
➀ Array stripe size
Related to controller general
setting
4KB to 256KB
Sequential
Either (sequential for LD larger than
512MB and can not be changed)
➀ Optimization for
Random/ Sequential
Related to controller general
setting
W/ B or W/ T
➀ Array write policy
SCSI Parameters:
*
Async. To 100.0MHz
➀ Data Transfer Rate
32
32
1-128
➀ Maximum Tag Count
32 to 1024
➀ Maximum Queued
I/ O Count
8
Up to 32
Enabled
➀ LUN’s per SCSI ID
Disabled
➀ Periodic Drive Check
Time
5
Disabled to 60 seconds
5 to 60 seconds
➀ Periodic SAF-TE and
SES Device Check
Time
Disabled
➀ Periodic Auto-Detect
Failure Drive Swap
Check Time
32
32
1 to 1024
1 to 256
➀ Number of Host-LUN
Connection
➀ Tag per Host-LUN
Connection
*
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
➀ Wide Transfer
➀ Parity Check
Disabled
Spin-Up Parameters:
Disabled
Enabled
*
Enabled
➀ Motor Spin-Up
Disabled
➀ Reset at Power-UP
None to 75 seconds
➀ Initial Disk Access
Delay
Fibre Channel Parameters:
*
Loop Only
Point-to-Point Only
Loop Preferred
➀ Fibre Connection
Options
Point-to-Point Preferred
Enabled by cabling
Enabled
➀ Fibre Channel Dual-
Loop
*
User configurable
➀ Host ID/ WWN name
list
*
Host Access Filter Control
Configurable - filter type - access
right - name
➀ LUN Filtering
*
Dedicated or sharing drive channel(s)
➀ RCC through Fibre
channel
Infortrend
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Array Configuration:
256MB
64KB – backward compatible
Secondary controller
➀ Disk reserved space
➀ Array assignment
Primary
controller
1
Up to 64
➀ Array partitioning
Others:
N/ A
N/ A
User-Defined; Password
Validation Timeout: 1 to Always
Check Configurable
➀ Password
User-Defined
➀ LCD Display
Controller Name
RAID Planning
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
3
Accessing the Array
through Serial Port and
Ethernet
3.1
RS-232C Serial Port
Infortrend’s controllers and subsystems can be configured via a PC
running a VT-100 terminal emulation program, or a VT-100
compatible terminal. RAID enclosures usually provide one or more
DB-9 RS-232C ports. Simply use an RS-232C cable to connect
between the controller/ enclosure’s RS-232C port and the PC serial
(COM) port.
Make sure you use the included null modem (IFT-9011) to convert
the serial port signals. A null modem might have been provided
inside your enclosure. The Null Modem has the serial signals
swapped for connecting to a standard PC serial interface.
The following are guidelines on using the serial port:
•
•
•
The serial port’s default is set at 38400 baud, 8 bit, 1 stop bit and
no parity. Use the COM1 serial port of the controller.
In most cases, connecting RD, TD, and SG is enough to establish
the communication with a terminal.
If you are using a PC as a terminal, any VT-100 terminal
emulation software will suffice. Microsoft® Windows includes a
terminal emulation program as presented with the “(Hyper)
Terminal” icon in the Accessories window.
•
For other details of connecting serial port, please refer to the
Hardware Manual that came with your controller.
Out-of-Band via Serial Port and Ethernet
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.1
Configuring RS-232C Connection via Front Panel
Take the following steps to change the baud rate using the front
panel keypad:
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Configuration ..", then
View and Edit
Config Parms
ꢀ
press ENT.
Select "Communication Parameters ..",
then press ENT.
Communication
Parameters
..
Select "RS-232 Configuration ..", then
press ENT.
RS-232C
Configuration ..
Select "COM1 Configuration ..", then
COM1
Configuration ..
press ENT.
Select "Baud-rate 38400 ..", then press
ENT.
Baud-rate 38400
..
The baud rate default is 38400. If other
baud rate is preferred, press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select the baud rate, then press ENT for 2
seconds to confirm the selected baud
rate. Set identical baud rate to your
RAID array and your terminal computer.
Baud-rate 38400
Change to 19200?
•
•
The following baud rates are available: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
and 38400.
Terminal connection should work properly using the above
setting. You may check the following options in your COM port
configuration if you encounter problems:
1. “Comm Route Dir ..”: The communication route should be
configured as “direct to port” instead of “through PPP”.
2. “Term Emul. Enab ..”: Make sure the terminal function has
not been accidentally disabled.
Infortrend
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.2
Starting RS-232C Terminal Emulation
The keys used when operating via the terminal are as follows:
To select options
← → ↑ ↓
[Enter]
[Esc]
To go to a submenu or to execute a selected option
To escape and go back to the previous menu
The controller will refresh the screen information
[Ctrl] [L]
IMPORTANT!
•
If the RS-232C cable is connected while the controller is powered on, press
[Ctrl] [L] to refresh the screen information.
The initial screen appears when the controller finishes self-test and
is properly initialized. Use ↑ ↓ arrow keys to select terminal
emulation mode, then press [ENTER] to enter the Main Menu.
Choose a functional item from the main menu to begin configuring
your RAID.
Connecting Terminal
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2
Out-of-Band via Ethernet
The RAIDWatch manager software provides graphical interface to the
subsystem. Before you can access the RAID system using the software
manager, your must:
1. Create a reserved space on your array(s)
2. Set up the related TCP/IP configurations to enable the Ethernet
port and the http service
3. FTP RAIDWatch program files to the controller IP address
What Is the “Disk Reserved Space?”
RAIDWatch and Reserved Space:
•
There is no need to install the RAIDWatch program to your
management computer if you access the software using the controller
Ethernet port. In order to simplify the installation process, system
firmware already contains important software agents.
•
•
User’s configuration data and the manager’s main programs are kept in
a small section of disk space on each data drive. The segregated disk
space is called a “Disk Reserved Space.” When configuring a
logical drive, firmware automatically segregates a 256MB of
disk space from each of the member drives.
Because the manager’s main program is run from the reserved space on
drives, in the event of RAID controller failure, the manager interface
can “failover” to a counterpart controller. Operators’ access to the
system will not be interrupted.
Infortrend
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Concerns
Availability Concern:
For safety reason, it is better to create a reserved space on more than one
logical drive.
Whatever data is put into the reserved space, firmware will automatically
duplicate and distribute it to the reserved section on every data drive. Even
if one hard drive or one logical drive fails, an exact replica still resides on
other drives.
Web-Based Management
The controller firmware has embedded http server. Once properly
configured, the controller/subsystem’s Ethernet port behaves like an HTTP
server.
Requirements
1. Controller/subsystem running Firmware revision 3.21 and above
[3.25 onwards has embedded NPC (Notification Processing Center)
support]
2. Management Station:
Pentium or above compatible (or equivalent PC) running Windows NT
4/Windows 2000; Solaris 7 & 8 (SPARC, x86); AIX 4.3; or Red Hat
Linux 6.1 (kernel v2.2.xx); Red Hat 7/8, SUSE 7, WIN95/98, or
Windows Me/XP
3. Standard Web Browser.
4. A management station (computer) accessing RAIDWatch manager must
support:
-TCP/IP
-Java Runtime: a package is bundled with RAIDWatch installer or
it can be downloaded from SUN Microsystems’ web site.
5. A static IP address
3.2.1
Connecting Ethernet Port:
Use a LAN cable to connect the Ethernet port(s) on the subsystem’s RAID
controller unit(s). Use only shielded cable to avoid radiated emissions that
may cause interruptions. Connect the cable between controller’s LAN port
and a LAN port from your local network.
Connecting Terminal
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2.2
Configuring the Controller
To prepare the controller for using the RAIDWatch manager, do the
following:
1. Use a Terminal Emulator to Begin Configuration
Connect the subsystem’s serial port to a PC running a VT-100 terminal
emulation program or a VT-100 compatible terminal.
Make sure the included Null Modem is already attached to enclosure serial
port or the host computer’s COM port. The Null Modem converts the
serial signals for connecting to a standard PC serial interface. For more
details, please refer to the descriptions above in section 3.1.
2. Create a Reserved Space on Drives
Create one or more logical drives and the reserved space option will be
automatically available. The default size is 256MB, and it is recommended
to keep it as is. A reserved disk space will be formatted on every member
drives.
If you delete a logical drive later, the reserved space will remain intact.
Unless you manually remove the reserved space, data kept in it will be
unaffected. These drives can later be used to create a new logical drive
without making additional changes.
Infortrend
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When formatted, a meta-filesystem is created on the 256MB reserved
space. A drive configured with a reserved space will be stated as a
“formatted drive.”
3. Assign an IP Address to Ethernet Port:
Assign an IP address to the controller Ethernet port and specify the Net
Mask and gateway values. Power off your system and then power on again
for the configuration to take effect.
Select "View and Edit Configuration Parameters" from the main menu.
Select "Communication Parameters" -> "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" ->
press [ENTER] on the chip hardware address -> and then select "Set IP
Address."
Provide the IP address, NetMask, and Gateway values accordingly.
PING the IP address from your management computer to make sure the link
is up and running.
4. FTP Manager Programs to the Controller IP
Address
There are several RAIDWatch programs that need to be FTP’ed to the
controller IP address.
1. Necessary program files can be found in a zip file (GUI.zip) in the CD-
ROM that came with your machine. Unzip “grem.htm”, “grem.jar”,
“grm.htm”, and “grm.jar” to your PC. Files are available in the
following directory: X:\Java where X is the CD-ROM letter.
2. Open a DOS prompt. You may use an FTP program to complete the
same process. Key in “ftp xx.xx.xx.xx” (controller IP address).
Connecting Terminal
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Login as “root” and there is no password for the first login. Press Enter
to skip password entry.
4. Use the “put” command to transfer the following files:
put grm.htm
put grm.jar
put grem.htm
put grem.jar
5. Proceed to install Java Run-time environment from the CD (If the
management station is a P4-based computer, it is required to install
Java JRE version1.3.1).
6. Reset the RAID subsystem using the Reset command for the
configuration to take effect.
5. Starting the Manager:
Start your web browser and enter the IP address assigned to the
controller followed by “grm.htm” as your URL (e.g.,
http://xx.xx.xx.xx/grm.htm).
Enter the IP address followed by “grem.htm” to start Event Monitor.
Infortrend
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2.3
NPC Onboard
NPC is short for Notification Processing Center, a sub-module for
use with system event notification.
To activate the NPC module, do the following:
1. Create an NPC configuration file (in a simple text file format)
using a text editor program.
2. Save it in the name of “agent.ini”
3. FTP it to the controller IP address, and then reset the controller
for the configuration to take effect.
Listed below is the sample configuration.
Specify your
configuration using simple defining parameters as shown below.
[SNMP_TRAP]
ENABLED=0
SEVERITY=1
(1=on; 0=off)
COMMUNITY=public
RECEIVER1=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX,2 ("2" specifies the level of
events to be received by this receiver)
[EMAIL]
ENABLED=0
SEVERITY=1
SUBJECT=Event Message
SMTP_SERVER=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
[BROADCAST]
ENABLED=0
SEVERITY=1
RECEIVER=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, 1
RECEIVER=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, 1
NOTE:
NPC will be automatically activated if any of the notifier settings
(email, SNMP, or broadcast) is set to “enabled.”
The configuration file is comprised of three major sections: SNMP, Email
and Broadcast. Each notifying method can be separately enabled or
disabled.
Connecting Terminal
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The SNMP_TRAP section
[SNMP_TRAP] – section header
[ENABLED] – 1=enabled, 0=disabled (applies to this section only)
[SEVERITY] - level of severity of the messages to be received:
1. notification, 2. warning, 3. alert. “1” covers events of all levels. “3”
sends only the most serious events.)
[COMMUNITY] – SNMP community name of the destination/ receiver
[RECEIVER] – The IP address of the receiver computer. Add additional
lines to specify multiple receivers. Up to 4 receivers can be configured.
The EMAIL section
[EMAIL] – section header
[ENABLED] – 1=enabled, 0=disabled (applies to this section only)
[SEVERITY] - level of severity of the messages to be received:
notification, 2. warning, 3. alert. “1” covers events of all levels. “3” sends
only the most serious events.)
[SUBJECT] – add a topic to email. This can be used to specify the location
of the RAID system, if there are many.
[SENDER_MAIL_BOX] – a valid email address to be used as the “from”
part of the email message.
[SMTP_SERVER] – SMTP server used to send email. IP address only, do
not enter a host name here.
[RECEIVER#] – receiver’s email address. The receiver’s number followed
by an “=” mark, an email address, “comma,” and the number to specify the
message severity level.
* * * *
The BROADCAST section
[BROADCAST] – section header
[ENABLED] – 1=enabled, 0=disabled (applies to this section only)
[SEVERITY] – level of severity of the messages to be received:
1. notification, 2. warning, 3. alert. “1” covers events of all levels. “3”
only the most serious events will be broadcast.)
[RECEIVER#] – The IP address of the receiver computer. Add additional
lines to specify multiple receivers. Up to 4 receivers can be configured.
Infortrend
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
4
LCD Screen Messages
4.1 The Initial Screen
Product Model
Firmware Version
SR2500 v3.**
Ready
Status/Data Transfer Indicator
Status/Data Transfer Indicator:
Ready
There is at least one logical drive or logical volume
mapped to a host ID/ LUN.
No Host
LUN
No logical drive created or the logical drive has not
yet been mapped to any host ID/ LUN.
❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚
Indicates data transfer. Each block indicates
256Kbytes of data throughput.
4.2 Quick Installation Screen
Quick Logical
Drive Install
¯
Press [ENT] to create a logical drive, the controller will start
initialization of one logical drive with all the connected SCSI drives
and automatically map the logical drive to LUN 0 of the first host
channel. The “Quick Installation” can only be performed when
there is no Logical Drive.
LCD Screen Messages
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Logical Drive Status
RAID level
Number of drives
Logical Drive
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
2021MB GD SB=1
Logical Drive status
Logical Drive:
The Logical Drive number.
RAID level:
The RAID level used in this logical drive
Drive numbers:
The number of physical drives included in
this configuration.
Logical Drive status:
XxxxMB
The capacity of this logical drive.
SB=x
Standby drives available to this logical
drive. Except the spares dedicated to other
logical configurations, all spare drive(s) will
be counted in this field, including Global
and Local Spares.
xxxxMB INITING
xxxxMB INVALID
The logical drive is now initializing.
For firmware version before 3.31:
The logical drive has been created with
“Optimization for Sequential I/ O”, but the
current setting is “Optimization for
Random I/ O.”
-OR-
The logical drive has been created with
“Optimization for Random I/ O,” but the
current setting is “Optimization for
Sequential I/ O.”
Firmware version 3.31 has separate settings
for array optimization and array stripe size.
This message will not appear when the
optimization mode is changed.
xxxxMB GD SB=x
xxxxMB FL SB=x
xxxxMB RB SB=x
xxxxMB DRVMISS
The logical drive is in good condition.
One drive failed in this logical drive.
Logical Drive is rebuilding.
One of the drives is missing.
INCOMPLETE
ARRAY
Two or more drives failed in this logical
drive.
Infortrend
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Logical Volume Status
Logical Volume
Logical Volume
ID Status
LV=0 ID=09816DE9
00002021MB DRV=1
Volume capacity
Number of drives
Logical Volume:
DRV=x:
The Logical Volume number.
The number of logical drive(s) contained
in this logical volume.
Logical Volume ID:
The unique ID number of the logical
volume (controller random generated).
Logical Volume Status:
xxxMB
The capacity of this logical volume.
DRV=X:
The number of member logical drive(s) in
this logical volume.
Infortrend
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5 SCSI Drive Status
SCSI Channel
SCSI ID
Drive Capacity
C=1 I=0 1010MB
LG=0 LN SEAGATE
Logical Drive
Drive Vendor
Drive Status
Number
Drive Status:
LG=x IN
Initializing
LG=x LN
On-line (already a member of a logical
configuration)
LG=x RB
LG=x SB
GlobalSB
NEW DRV
BAD DRV
ABSENT
MISSING
SB-MISS
Rebuilding
Local Spare Drive
Global Spare Drive
New drive
Failed drive
Drive does not exist
Drive missing (drive was once there)
Spare drive missing
LCD Screen Messages
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 SCSI Channel Status
Channel
Channel
Number
Mode
SCSI ID
CH0=Host PID
=*
SSIDI=NDA=SXNF=A80.0M
Default Bus
Sync. Clock
Secondary Controller
SCSI ID Mapping
Channel Mode:
Host
Host Channel mode
Drive Channel mode
Drive
Default SCSI Bus Sync Clock:
80.0M
The default setting of this channel is
80.0MHz in Synchronous mode
Async
The default setting of this SCSI channel
is in Asynchronous mode
Primary Controller SCSI ID Mapping:
*
Multiple SCSI ID’s applied (Host
Channel mode only)
(ID number)
Primary Controller is using this SCSI
ID for host LUN mapping.
NA
No SCSI ID applied (Drive Channel
mode only)
Secondary Controller SCSI ID Mapping:
*
Multiple SCSI ID’s applied (Host
Channel mode only)
(ID number)
Secondary Controller is using this SCSI
ID for host LUN mapping.
NA
No SCSI ID applied (Drive Channel
mode only)
Infortrend
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7 Controller Voltage and Temperature
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
Peripheral Dev ❚
Main Menu. Press ❚ or ❚ to select
"View and Edit Peripheral Dev,” then
press ENT.
Ctlr Peripheral
Device Config..
Press ❚ or ❚ to select "Ctlr Peripheral
Device Config..”, press ENT and then
choose “View Ctlr Periph Device
Status..”, then press ENT.
View Ctlr Periph
Device Status..
Press ❚ or ❚ to choose either “Voltage
Monitor”, or “Temperature Monitor”.
Voltage Monitor
..
Temperature
Monitor ..
Select “Temperature and Voltage
Monitor” by pressing Enter. Press ❚
or ❚ to browse through the various
voltage and temperature statuses.
[+12V] 12.077V
Operation Normal
[+5v]
4.938v
Operation Normal
[+3.3V] 3.384V
Operation Normal
[CPU] 43.5°C
in Safe Range
[+12v] 12.077v
Operation Normal
[CPU] 43.5°C
in Safe Range
[Board]46.5°C
in Safe Range
[Board1]46.5°C
in Safe Range
LCD Screen Messages
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8 Cache Dirty Percentage
The LCD panel indicates the cache dirty percentage. The amber-
colored “busy” light blinking on front panel also indicates that the
cache is being accessed.
4.9 View and Edit Event Logs
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ❚ or ❚ to select "View
and Edit Event Logs,” then press ENT.
View and Edit
Event Logs
↑
UPS Power
Failure Detected
Press ❚ or ❚ to browse through the
existing event log items.
To delete a specified item and all events
prior to this event, press ENT for 2
seconds.
Press 2 Seconds
to Clear Events
IMPORTANT!
•
The event log will be cleared after the controller is powered off or reset.
Infortrend
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
5
LCD Keypad Operation
5.1
Power on RAID Enclosure
Before you start to configure a RAID system, make sure that
hardware installation is completed before any configuration takes
place. Power on your RAID enclosure.
5.2
Caching Parameters
Optimization Modes
Mass storage applications can be categorized into two according to
its read/ write characteristics: database and video/ imaging. To
optimize the controller for these two categories, the controller has
two embedded optimization modes with controller behaviors
adjusted to different read/ write parameters.
They are the
Optimization for Random I/ O and the Optimization for Sequential
I/ O.
Limitations: There are limitations on the use of optimization
modes.
1. You can select the stripe size of each array (logical drive) during
the initial configuration. However, changing stripe size is only
recommended for experienced engineers who have tested the
effects tuning stripe sizes for different applications.
2. The array stripe size can only be changed during the initial
configuration process.
3. Once the controller optimization mode is applied, access to
different logical drives in a RAID system will follow the same
optimized pattern. You can change the optimization mode later
without having to re-organize your array.
Front Panel Operation
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Database and Transaction-based Applications:
This kind of applications usually include SQL server, Oracle server,
Informix, or other data base services. These applications keep the
size of each transaction down to the minimum, so that I/ Os can be
rapidly processed. Due to its transaction-based nature, these
applications do not read or write a bunch of data in a sequential
order. Access to data occurs randomly. The transaction size usually
ranges from 2K to 4K. Transaction performance is measured in
“I/ Os per second” or “IOPS.”
Video Recording/Playback and Imaging Applications:
This kind of applications usually includes video playback, video
post-production editing, or other similar applications.
These
applications have the tendency to read or write large files from and
into storage in a sequential order. The size of each I/ O can be 128K,
256K, 512K, or up to 1MB. The efficiency of these applications is
measured in “MB/ Sec.”
When an array works with applications such as video or image
oriented applications, the application reads/ writes from the drive as
large-block, sequential threads instead of small and randomly
accessed files.
The controller optimization modes have read-ahead buffer and
other R/ W characteristics tuned to obtain the best performance for
these two major application categories.
Optimization Mode and Stripe Size
Each controller optimization mode has preset values for the stripe
size of arrays created in different RAID levels. If you want a
different value for your array, you may change the controller
optimization mode, reset the controller, and then go back to create
the array. Once the array is created, stripe size can not be
changed.
Using the default value should be sufficient for most applications.
Opt. For Sequential I/O
Opt. for Random I/O
RAID0
RAID1
RAID3
RAID5
128
128
16
32
32
4
128
32
Infortrend
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimization for Random or Sequential I/O
Select from main menu “View and Edit
Config Parms,” “Caching Parameters,”
and press ENT. Choose “Optimization for
Random I/ O” or “Optimization for
Sequential I/ O,” then press ENT for two
seconds to confirm. Press ESC to leave
and the setting will take effect after the
controller is restarted.
Caching
Parameters
..
Optimization I/O
Random ..
Optimization for
Sequential I/O?
IMPORTANT!
•
The original 512GB threshold on array optimization mode is canceled. If
the size of an array is larger than 16TB, only the optimization for
sequential I/O can be applied. Logical drives of this size are not practical;
therefore, there is actually no limitation on the optimization mode and
array capacity.
Write-Back/Write-Through Cache Enable/Disable
As one of the submenus in "Caching
Write-Back Cache
Parameters," this option controls the
cached write function. Press ENT to
enable or disable “Write-Back Cache.”
Press ENT for two seconds to confirm.
The current status will be displayed on the
LCD.
Enabled
..
The Write-through mode is safer if your
controller is not configured in a redundant
pair and there is no battery backup.
Disable Write
-Back Cache
?
Write-back caching can dramatically improve write performance by
caching the unfinished writes in memory and let them be committed
to drives in a more efficient manner. In the event of power failure, a
battery module can hold cached data for days. In the event of
controller failure, data cached in the failed controller has an exact
replica on its counterpart controller and therefore remains intact.
Front Panel Operation
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
Every time you change the Caching Parameters, you must reset the
controller for the changes to take effect.
In the Redundant Controller configuration, write-back will only be
applicable when there is a synchronized cache channel between partner
controllers.
Infortrend
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3
View Connected Drives:
A RAID system consists of many physical drives that can be
modified and configured as the members of one or several logical
drives.
Press the front panel ENT button for
two seconds to enter the Main Menu.
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to navigate through the
menus. Choose "View and Edit SCSI
Drives," then press ENT.
View and Edit
SCSI Drives
C=2 I=0 1010MB
New DRV SEAGATE
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to scroll down the list of
connected drives’ information screens.
You may first examine whether there is any drive installed but not
shown here. If there is a drive installed but not listed, the drive may
be defective or not installed correctly, please check your enclosure
installation and contact your system vendor.
Press ENT on a drive. Choose "View
View Drive
Information ..
Drive Information" by pressing ENT.
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to navigate through the
screens.
The Revision Number of the selected
SCSI drive will be shown. Press ꢀ to
see other information.
Revision Number:
0274
Other information screens include
"Serial Number" and "Disk Capacity"
(displayed in blocks- each block equals
512K Bytes).
IMPORTANT!
•
Drives of the same brand/model/capacity might not have the same block
number.
•
The basic read/write unit of a hard drive is block. If members of a logical
drive have different block numbers (capacity), the smallest block number
will be taken as the maximum capacity to be used in every drive.
Therefore, use drives of the same capacity.
•
You may assign a Local/Global Spare Drive to a logical drive whose
members has a block number equal or smaller than the Local/Global
Spare Drive but you should not do the reverse.
Front Panel Operation
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4
Creating a Logical Drive
To create a logical drive, press ENT for
two seconds to enter the Main Menu.
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to navigate through the
menus. Choose "View and Edit Logical
Drives," and then press ENT.
View and Edit
Logical Drives
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a logical drive
entry, then press ENT for two seconds
to proceed. "LG" is short for Logical
Drive.
LG=0
Not Defined
?
Choosing a RAID Level:
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose the desired
RAID level, then press ENT for two
seconds. "TDRV" (Total Drives) refers
to the number of available SCSI drives.
TDRV=4 Create
LG Level=RAID5 ?
Choosing Member Drives:
Press ENT for two seconds, a message,
“RAID X selected To Select drives”,
will prompt. Confirm your selection
by pressing ENT.
RAID X Selected
To Select drives
Press ENT, then use ꢀ or ꢀ to browse
through the available drives. Press
ENT again to select/ deselect the
drives. An asterisk (*) mark will appear
on the selected drive(s). To deselect a
drive, press ENT again on the selected
drive. The (*) mark will disappear.
"C=1 I=0" refers to "Channel 1, SCSI ID
0".
C=1 I=0 1010MB
NEW DRV SEAGATE
After all the desired drives have been
selected, press ENT for two seconds to
continue. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose
“Create Logical Drive,” then press
ENT for two seconds to start
initializing the logical drive.
Create Logical
Drive
?
Logical Drive Preferences:
You may also choose “Change Logical
Drive Parameter,” then press ENT to
change related parameters before
initializing the logical drive.
Change Logical
Drive Parameter?
Infortrend
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Drive Capacity:
Choose “Maximum Drive Capacity,”
then press ENT. The maximum drive
capacity refers to the maximum
capacity that will be used in each
member drive.
Maximum Drive
Capacity
..
MaxSiz= 1010MB
Set to 1010MB?
Use ꢀ and ꢀ to change the maximum
size that will be used on each drive.
Spare Drive Assignments:
Local Spare Drive can also be assigned
here. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose “Spare
Drive Assignments,” then press ENT.
Spare Drive
Assignments ..
Available drives will be listed. Use ꢀ
or ꢀ to browse through the drive list,
then press ENT to select the drive you
wish to use as the Local Spare Drive.
Press ENT again for two seconds.
C=1 I=15 1010MB
*LG=0 SL SEAGATE
Disk Reserved Space:
Disk Rev. Space
This menu allows you to change the
size of disk reserved space. Default is
256MB. We recommended using the
default value.
256MB
..
Choices are 256MB and 64KB. With 64KB, logical drives are
backward compatible to RAID controllers running earlier firmware
versions. Press ENT and use the ꢀ or ꢀ keys to choose the size you
prefer. You may also refer to Appendix E for more details about
disk reserved space.
Write Policy:
Write Policy
Default
This menu allows you to set the
caching mode policy for this specific
logical drive. “Default” is a neutral
value that is coordinated with the
controller’s caching mode setting.
Other choices are “Write-Back” and
“Write-Through.”
..
Initialization Mode:
Initialization
Mode Online..
This menu allows you to determine if
the logical drive is immediately
accessible. If the Online method is
used, data can be written onto it before
the array’s initialization is completed.
Front Panel Operation
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Users may proceed with array
configuration, e.g., including this array
in a logical volume.
Array initialization can take a long time especially for those
comprised of large capacity. Setting to “Online” means the array is
immediately accessible and that the controller will complete the
initialization when IO demands become less intensive.
Stripe Size:
Stripe size
Default
This menu allows you to change the
array stripe size. Setting to an
?
incongruous value can severely drag
the performance. This item should
only be changed when you can be sure
of the performance gains it might bring
you.
Listed below are the default values for an array. The default value
for stripe size is determined by controller Optimization Mode and
the RAID level chosen for an array.
Opt. for Sequential I/O
Opt. for Random I/O
RAID0
RAID1
RAID3
RAID5
128
128
16
32
32
4
128
32
When you are done with setting logical drive preferences, press ESC
and use your arrow keys to select “Create Logical Drive?”. Press
ENT for two seconds to proceed.
Beginning Initialization
Press ESC to return to the previous
Create Logical
Drive
menu. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to choose “Create
Logical Drive,” then press ENT for two
seconds to start initializing the logical
drive.
?
The On-Line Mode:
If online initialization method is
applied, the array will be available for
LG=0 Creation
Completed!
use
immediately.
The
array
initialization runs in the background
while data can be written onto it and
users can continue configuring the
RAID system.
Infortrend
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Off-Line Mode:
The controller will start to initialize the
array parity if using the “Off-line”
mode. Note that if NRAID or RAID 0
is selected, initialization time is short
and completes almost immediately.
Initializing090%
Please Wait!
LG=0 Initializat
Ion Completed
The logical drive’s information displays
when the initialization process is
LG=0 RAID5 DRV=3
2012MB GD SB=0
completed.
If “On-line” mode is
adopted, array information will be
displayed immediately.
Front Panel Operation
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5
Creating a Logical Volume
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Logical Volume," then
press ENT.
View and Edit
Logical Volume ꢀ
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select an undefined
entry for logical volume, then press
ENT for two seconds to proceed. "LV"
is short for Logical Volume.
LV=0
Not Defined
?
Proceed to select one or more logical
drives. Press ENT to proceed. “LD” is
short for Logical Drive.
LV=0 Selected To
Select LD Drives?
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to browse through the
logical drives. Press ENT again to
select/ deselect the drives. An asterisk
(*) mark will appear when the logical
drive is selected. After all the desired
logical drive(s) have been selected,
press ENT for two seconds to continue.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
2021MB GD SB=0
Two submenus will appear.
Initialization Mode
Initialization
Array initialization can take a long
time especially for those comprised of
large capacity. Setting to “Online”
means the array is immediately
accessible and that the controller will
complete the initialization when IO
demands become less intensive.
Mode
Online..
Write Policy
Write Policy
Default
This menu allows you to set the
caching mode policy for this specific
logical volume. “Default” is a neutral
value that is coordinated with the
controller’s caching mode setting.
Other choices are “Write-Back” and
“Write-Through.”
..
When finished with setting the
preferences, press ENT for two
Infortrend
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Create
Logical Volume ?
seconds to display the confirm box.
Press ENT for two seconds to start
initializing the logical volume.
Lv=0 Creation
Completed
The
logical
volume
has
been
successfully created.
Lv=0 ID=07548332
0024488MB DRV=2
Press ESC to clear the message.
Another message will prompt, press
ESC to clear it.
Create Logical
Volume Successed
Logical volume information will be
displayed below.
Logical Volume Assignment
If you have two controllers, you may
choose to assign this logical volume to
the secondary controller.
assignment can be done during or after
the initial configuration.
The
Change Logical
Volume Params ?
Logical Volume
Assignments ..
If the redundant controller function has
been enabled, secondary controller IDs
assigned
to
IO
channels,
the
Red Ctlr Assign
to Sec. Ctlr ?
assignment menus should appear as
listed on the right.
If settings related to redundant
controllers
have
not
been
accomplished, you may find the option
after the volume is successfully created.
Logical Volume
Assignment
..
Press ENT on a configured logical
volume. Use arrow keys to select
“Logical Volume Assignment..”, and
press ENT to proceed. Press ENT for
two seconds to confirm.
Red Ctlr Assign
to Sec. Ctlr ?
LV=0 ID=685AE502
2021MB DRV=1
Press ESC, and the LCD will display
the logical volume’s information when
initialization is finished.
Front Panel Operation
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.6 Partitioning a Logical Drive/Logical
Volume
Partitioning, as well as the creation of logical volume, are not the
requirements for creating a RAID system. The configuration
processes for partitioning a logical drive are the same as those for
partitioning a logical volume.
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
Logical Volume ꢀ
"View and Edit Logical Volume," then
press ENT.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a logical volume,
then press ENT.
LV=0 ID=685AE502
2021MB DRV=1
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Partition
Logical Volume,” then press ENT.
Partition
Logical Volume..
The total capacity of the logical volume
will be displayed as the first partition
LV=0 Part=0:
2021MB
?
(partition 0).
Press ENT for two
seconds to change the size of the first
partition.
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to change the number of
the flashing digit, (see the arrow mark)
then press ENT to move to the next
digit. After changing all the digits,
press ENT for two seconds to confirm
the capacity of this partition. You may
also use arrow keys to move down to
the next partition.
LV=0 Part=0:
2021MB
LV=0 Part=0:
700MB
?
LV=0 Partition=1
The rest of the drive space will be
automatically allocated as the last
partition. You may go on to create up
to 32 partitions using the same method
as described above.
1321MB
?
Press ESC for several times to go back
to the main menu.
Infortrend
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7 Mapping a Logical Volume/Logical
Drive to Host LUN
The process of mapping a logical drive is identical to that of
mapping a logical volume. The process of mapping a logical volume
is used as an example.
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Host Luns," then press
ENT.
View and Edit
Host Luns
ꢀ
Note some details before proceeding:
1.
A
logical group of drives (logical drive/ logical volume)
previously assigned to the primary controller can not be mapped
to a secondary ID. Neither can those assigned to the secondary
controller be mapped to a primary ID.
2. For a SCSI-based controller, ID 7 is reserved for the controller
itself. If there are two controllers, controllers might occupy ID 6
and ID 7. Please check your system Hardware Manual for
details on preserved IDs.
Press ꢀ \ or ꢀ to select a configured
CH=0 ID=000
Pri. Ctlr
host ID, and then press ENT for two
seconds to confirm. IDs are available
as Primary or Secondary Controller
IDs.
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select the type of
Map to
Logical Volume ?
logical configuration.
Available
choices are “Map to Logical Volume,”
“Map to Logical Drive,” or “Map to
Physical Drive.” Confirm your choice
by pressing ENT.
CH=0 ID=0 LUN=0
Not Mapped
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a LUN number,
then press ENT to proceed.
Press ENT for two seconds to confirm
Map Host LUN ?
the selected LUN mapping.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a partition from
the logical volume. Press ENT for two
seconds to map the selected partition
LV=0 ID=685AE502
2021MB
DRV=1
?
to this LUN.
If the logical
LV=0 PART=0
700MB
configuration has not been partitioned,
Front Panel Operation
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
you can map the whole capacity to a
host LUN.
Mapping information will be displayed
on the subsequent screen. Press ENT
for two seconds to confirm the LUN
mapping.
CH=0 ID0 LUN0
MAP to LV=0 PRT=0?
With any of the Host ID/ LUN successfully associated with a logical
capacity, the “No Host LUN” message in the main menu will change
to “Ready.”
If you want to create more host IDs, please move to section 5.11 for
more details on channel mode and channel IDs setting.
5.8
Assigning Spare Drive and Rebuild
Settings
Adding a Local Spare Drive
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Drives," then
press ENT.
View and Edit
SCSI Drives ꢀ
SCSI drive information will be
displayed on the LCD. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select a drive that is stated as “NEW
DRV” or “USED DRV” that has not
been assigned to any logical drive, as
spare drive or failed drive, then press
ENT to select it.
C=2 I=4 1010MB
NEW DRV SEAGATE
Add Local Spare
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Add Local
Spare Drive,” then press ENT.
Drive
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select the logical drive
where the Local Spare Drive will be
assigned, then press ENT for two
seconds to confirm.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
2012MB GD SB=0
Add Local Spare
Drive Successful
The message “Add Local Spare Drive
Successful” will be displayed on the
LCD.
Infortrend
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Global Spare Drive
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
SCSI Drives ꢀ
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Drives," then
press ENT.
SCSI drive information will be
displayed on the LCD. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select a SCSI drive that has not been
assigned to any logical drive yet, then
press ENT.
C=2 I=4 1010MB
NEW DRV SEAGATE
Add Global Spare
Drive
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Add Global
Spare Drive,” then press ENT.
Press ENT again for two seconds to
add the spare drive. The message
“Add Global Spare Drive Successful”
will be displayed on the LCD.
Add Global Spare
Drive Successful
Rebuild Settings
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Config Parms," then
press ENT.
View and Edit
Config Parms
ꢀ
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Disk Array
Parameters,” then press ENT.
Disk Array
Parameters..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Rebuild
Priority Low,” then press ENT. “Low”
refers to the temporary setting.
Rebuild Priority
Low
..
Press ENT again and the abbreviation
mark “..” will change to question mark
“?”. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select priority
“Low,” “Normal,” “Improved,” or
“High”.
Rebuild Priority
Low
?
Press ENT to confirm and the question
mark “?” will turn into “..”.
Rebuild Priority
High
..
Infortrend
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
•
The rebuild priority determines how much of controller resources is
conducted when rebuilding a logical drive. The default setting of the
rebuild priority is “LOW.” Rebuild will have smaller impact on host I/O
access, but rebuild will take a longer time to complete. Changing the
rebuild priority to a higher level you will have a faster rebuild, but will
certainly increase the Host I/O response time. The default setting “LOW”
is recommended.
5.9
Viewing and Editing Logical Drives and
Drive Members
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Logical Drives..,” then
View and Edit
Logical Drives ꢀ
press ENT.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select the logical drive,
then press ENT.
2012MB GD SB=1
View SCSI Drives
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “View SCSI
Drives..", then press ENT .
C=1 I=0 1010MB
LG=0 LN SEAGATE
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to scroll through the list
of member drives.
Deleting a Logical Drive
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
Logical Drives ꢀ
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Logical Drives," then
press ENT.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
2012MB GD SB=1
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a logical drive,
then press ENT.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Delete Logical
Drive," then press ENT .
Delete Logical
Drive
..
?
Press ENT for two seconds to delete.
The selected logical drive has now
been deleted.
LG=0
Not Defined
Front Panel Operation
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Logical Drives..,” then
press ENT.
View and Edit
Logical Drives ꢀ
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a logical drive,
then press ENT.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
2012MB GD SB=1
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose “Partition
Logical Drive," then press ENT.
Partition
Logical Drive ..
The first partition’s information will be
shown on the LCD. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to
browse through the existing partitions
in the logical drive. Select a partition
by pressing ENT for two seconds.
LG=0 Partition=1
200MB
?
LG=0 Partition=1
300MB
?
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to change the number of
the flashing digit to “0," then press
ENT to move to the next digit. After
changing all the digits, press ENT for
two seconds.
LG=0 Partition=2
600MB
?
The rest of the drive space will be
automatically allocated to the last
partition as diagrammed below.
Figure 5 - 1 Drive Space Allocated to the Last Partition
Logical Drive
1000MB
Logical Drive
1000MB
Partition 0 - 100MB
Partition 1 - 200MB
• The capacity of the deleted
partitions will be added to
the last partition.
Partition 0 - 100MB
Partition 1 - 300MB
Delete
Partition 1
Partition 2 - 300MB
Partition 3 - 400MB
Partition 2 - 600MB
400 + 200
WARNING!
•
Whenever there is a partition change, data will be erased, and all host LUN
mappings will be removed. Therefore, every time the size of a partition has
been changed, it is necessary to re-configure all host LUN mappings of the
associated partitions.
Front Panel Operation
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning a Name to a Logical Drive
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Logical Drives..," then
press ENT.
View and Edit
Logical Drives ꢀ
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a logical drive,
then press ENT.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
2012MB GD SB=1
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Logical Drive
Name," then press ENT.
Logical Drive
Name
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to change the character of
the flashing cursor. Press ENT to
move the cursor to the next space. The
maximum number of characters for a
logical drive name is 25.
Enter LD Name:
_
Rebuilding a Logical Drive
If you want the controller to auto-detect a replacement drive, make
sure you have the following items set to enabled:
1. Periodic Drive Check Time
2. Periodic Auto-Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time
These two configuration options can be found under “View and Edit
Configuration Parameters” -> “ Drive-Side SCSI Parameters”.
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Logical Drives..", then
View and Edit
Logical Drives ꢀ
press ENT.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select the logical drive
that has a failed member, then press
2012MB FL SB=0
ENT.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Rebuild Logical
Drive," then press ENT.
Rebuild Logical
Drive
..
Press ENT for two seconds to start
rebuilding the logical drive.
Rebuild Logical
Drive
?
The rebuilding progress will be
displayed (as a percentage) on the
LCD.
Rebuilding 25%
Please Wait!
Front Panel Operation
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When rebuilding is already started or
the logical drive is being rebuilt by a
Local Spare Drive or Global Spare
Drive, choose “Rebuild Progress” to
see the rebuild progress.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
2012MB RB SB=0
Rebuild Progress
..
IMPORTANT!
•
•
The Rebuild function will appear only if a logical drive (with RAID level 1,
3 or 5) has a failed member.
Use the "Identify Drive" function to check the exact location of a failed
drive. Removing the wrong drive may cause a logical drive to fail and data
loss is unrecoverable.
Regenerating Logical Drive Parity
If no verifying method is applied to data writes, this function can be
manually performed to ensure that parity errors can be mended.
From the Main Menu, press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select "View and Edit Logical Drives."
View and Edit
Logical Drives
If you have more than one logical drive,
use the ꢀ or ꢀ to select the logical drive
you would like to check the parity for;
and then press ENT.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
4095MB GD SB=0
Regenerate
Parity
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select "Regenerate Parity"
and then press ENT.
..
To stop the regeneration process, press
ESC and enter the submenu to select Parity
Abort Regenerate
..
“Abort Regenerate Parity”.
IMPORTANT!
•
If Parity Regenerating process is stopped by a drive failure, the process
cannot restart until the logical drive is rebuilt.
Infortrend
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media Scan
Media Scan is used to examine drives and is able to detect the
presence of bad blocks. If any data blocks have not been properly
committed, data from those blocks are automatically recalculated,
retrieved and stored onto undamaged sectors. If bad blocks are
encountered on yet another drive during the rebuild process, the
block LBA (Logical Block Address) of those bad blocks will be
shown. If rebuild is carried out under this situation, rebuild will
continue with he unaffected sectors, salvaging a majority of the
stored data.
View and Edit
Logical Drives
From the Main Menu, press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select "View and Edit Logical Drives".
The first logical drive displays. If you
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
have more than one logical drive, use
4095MB GD SB=0
the ꢀ or ꢀ keys to select the logical
drive you want to scan; and then press
ENT.
Media Scan
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select "Media Scan"
and then press ENT.
..
Press ENT again to display the first
configuration option. Press ENT on it
and use arrow keys to select an option.
Press ENT to confirm the change on
priority level.
Priority
Normal
..
?
Priority
To High
Iteration Count
Use arrow keys to move one level
down to another option, “Iteration
Count”. This option determines how
many times the scan is performed on
the logical drive. If set to the
continuous, the scan will run in the
background continuously until it is
stopped by user.
Single
..
Iteration Count
to Continuous ?
Press ENT on your option to confirm.
Execute Media
Scanning
Press ENT for two seconds to display
the confirm message, press ENT to
start scanning the array.
?
Front Panel Operation
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Write Policy
View and Edit
Logical Drives
From the Main Menu, press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select "View and Edit Logical Drives".
The first logical drive displays. If you
have more than one logical drive, use
the ꢀ or ꢀ keys to select the logical
drive you want to change the write
policy of; and then press ENT.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
4095MB GD SB=0
Write Policy
..
Use arrow keys to select "Write Policy"
and then press ENT.
Write Policy
Write-Back
?
The Write-Back cache setting is configurable on a per array basis.
Setting to the default value means the array setting is coordinated
with the controller’s general setting. The controller’s general setting
option can be found in “View and Edit Config Parms” -> “Caching
Parameters” -> “Write-Back Cache”. Note that cached writes are
lost if power failure should occur unless cached data has been
duplicated to a partner controller and a battery is supporting cache
memory.
Infortrend
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.10 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs
Viewing and Deleting LUN Mappings
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
Host Luns
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit Host Luns", then press
ENT.
ꢀ
CH=0 ID=002
Sec. Ctlr
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a host ID, then
press ENT to proceed.
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to browse through the
LUN number and its LUN mapping
information.
CH=0 ID=0 LUN=0
Mapto LG0 PRT0
Delete CH0 ID0
LUN=00 Mapping ?
Press ENT on the LUN you wish to
delete.
Press ENT for two seconds to confirm
deletion. The deleted LUN has now
been unmapped.
CH=0 ID=0 LUN=0
Not Mapped
For LUN Filtering functions, e.g., Create Host Filter Entry, Edit Host-
ID/ WWN Name List, please refer to Chapter 8 “Fibre Operation.”
Pass-through SCSI Commands
Pass-through SCSI commands facilitate functions like downloading
firmware for drives or devices (not controller firmware), setting
SCSI drive mode parameters, or monitoring a SAF-TE/ S.E.S. device
directly from the host. To perform such a function, the SCSI device
must be mapped to a host SCSI ID.
From the Main Menu, press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select "View and Edit Host LUNs."
View and Edit
Host Luns
If you have primary and secondary
controllers, use the ꢀ or ꢀ to select the
controller for the device that you
would like to map.
Map Channel=0
ID=0 Pri Ctlr ?
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose to map a SCSI
ID to "Physical Drive" or other device
and then press ENT.
Map to
Physical Drive ?
Front Panel Operation
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING!
•
•
Pass-through SCSI Commands are only intended to perform maintenance
functions for a drive or device on the drive side. Do not perform any
destructive commands to a disk drive (i.e., any commands that write data
to a drive media). If a disk drive is a spare drive or a member of a logical
drive, such a destructive command may cause a data inconsistency.
When a drive/device is mapped to a host SCSI ID so that Pass-through
SCSI Commands can be used, the data on that drive/device will not be
protected by the controller. Users who employ Pass-through SCSI
Commands to perform any write commands to drive media do so at their
own risk.
5.11 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives
Scanning New SCSI Drive
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Drives," then
press ENT.
View and Edit
SCSI Drives ꢀ
SCSI drive information will be
displayed on the LCD. Press ENT on a
drive. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Scan New
SCSI Drive," then press ENT again.
Scan new SCSI
Drive
..
Scan Channel=1 ?
Scan Channel=1
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI channel,
then press ENT for two seconds.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI ID, then
press ENT for two seconds.
ID= 01
?
C=1 I=0 1010MB
NEW DRV SEAGATE
The information of the scanned SCSI
drive will be displayed on the LCD.
If the drive was not detected on the
selected SCSI channel and ID, the LCD
will display “Scan Fail!”
Scan Channel=1
ID=1 Scan Fail!
Infortrend
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C=1 I=1 ABSENT
An empty drive entry is added for this
channel/ SCSI ID for enclosure
management. The drive status is
“ABSENT.”
To clear the empty drive entry, press
ENT and use arrow keys to select
“Clear Drive Status,” then press ENT
to proceed.
Clear Drive
Status
..
?
Press ENT for two seconds to confirm
the drive entry’s deletion. Information
of other drives will be displayed
instead.
Clear Drive
Status
Identifying a Drive
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Drives," then
press ENT.
View and Edit
SCSI Drives ꢀ
SCSI drive information will be
displayed. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a
SCSI drive, then press ENT.
C=1 I=0 1010MB
GlobalSB SEAGATE
Identify Drive
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Identify Drive,”
then press ENT to continue.
Flash All
Drives
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Flash All
Drives”, “Flash Selected Drive”, or
“Flash All But Selected Drive”. Press
ENT for two seconds to flash the
read/ write LEDs of all the connected
drives.
?
Flash Selected
SCSI Drives
Or, press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Flash
Selected SCSI Drives," then press ENT
for two seconds to flash the read/ write
LED of the selected drive. The
?
Flash all But
Selected Drives?
read/ write LED will light for
a
configurable time period from 1 to 999
seconds.
Front Panel Operation
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Spare Drive (Global / Local Spare Drive)
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Drives," then
press ENT.
SCSI Drives ꢀ
C=1 I=0 1010MB
GlobalSB SEAGATE
SCSI drive information will be
displayed on the LCD. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select the spare drive you wish to
delete, then press ENT.
Delete Spare
Drive
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Delete Spare
Drive," then press ENT to continue.
..
Press ENT for two seconds to delete
Delete Spare
Drive Successful
the spare drive.
5.12 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels
Redefining Channel Mode
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
SCSI Channels
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Channels," then
press ENT.
ꢀ
Channel information will be displayed.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to browse through the
information of all channels. Press ENT
on the channel you wish the channel
mode changed.
CH0=Host PID=0
SID=NA SXF=20.0M
Redefine Channel
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Redefine
Channel Mode,” then press ENT.
Mode
..
Press ENT for two seconds to change
the channel mode.
Redefine? CHL=0
To=Drive Channel
The new setting will be displayed.
CH0=Drive PID=7
SID=NA SXF=20.8M
Infortrend
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT!
•
Every time you change channel mode, you must reset the controller for the
changes to take effect.
Setting a SCSI Channel’s ID - Host Channel
Viewing IDs
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Channels," then
press ENT.
View and Edit
SCSI Channels
ꢀ
Channel information will be displayed.
Press ENT on the host channel you
wish the ID changed.
CH0=Host PID=0
SID=NA SXF=20.0M
Set SCSI Channel
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Set SCSI
Channel ID," then press ENT.
ID
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to browse through the
existing ID settings. Press ENT on any
to continue.
CHL=0 ID=0
Primary Ctrl ..
Adding a Channel ID
Press ENT on a host channel, on “Set
SCSI Channel ID”, and then on an
existing ID.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose “Add Channel
SCSI ID", then press ENT.
Add Channel
SCSI ID
..
?
Primary
Controller
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose “Primary
Controller” or “Secondary Controller”,
then press ENT for two seconds to
confirm.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose the SCSI ID you
wish to add, then press ENT for two
seconds to complete the process.
Add CHL=0 ID=2
Primary Ctlr ?
Front Panel Operation
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Channel ID
Press ENT on an existing host channel
Delete Channel
SCSI ID
ID you want to delete. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to
choose “Delete Channel SCSI ID," then
press ENT.
..
Press ENT for two seconds to confirm.
Delete ID=2
Primary Ctlr ?
IMPORTANT!
•
•
Every time you make changes to channel IDs, you must reset the
controller for the configuration to take effect.
The reserved IDs for SCSI-based controllers are shown below:
Single controller configuration (SCSI-based controllers):
Drive channels – “7”
Redundant controller configuration:
Drive channels – “8” and “9”
For IDs reserved in different controller configurations, please refer to the
hardware manual that came with your system. For controllers
connected through back-end PCBs, firmware can detect its board type
and automatically apply the preset IDs. There is no need to set IDs for
these models.
•
In single controller mode, you should set the Secondary Controller’s ID
to “NA.” If a secondary controller exists, you need to set an ID for it on
each of your drive channels.
•
•
Multiple target IDs can be applied to Host channels while each Drive
channel has only one or two IDs (in redundant mode).
At least a controller’s ID has to be present on each channel bus.
Setting a SCSI Channel’s Primary ID - Drive Channel
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
SCSI Channels
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Channels," then
press ENT.
ꢀ
Infortrend
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel information will be displayed.
Press ENT on the drive channel you
wish the ID changed.
CH1=Drive PID=7
SID=NA SXF=80.0M
Set SCSI Channel
Pri. Ctlr ID ..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Set SCSI
Channel Pri. Ctlr ID..”, then press
ENT.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a new ID, then
press ENT for two seconds to confirm.
Set Pri. Ctlr
ID= 7 to ID: 8 ?
Setting a SCSI Channel’s Secondary ID - Drive Channel
View and Edit
SCSI Channels
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
ꢀ
"View and Edit SCSI Channels," then
press ENT.
Channel information will be displayed.
Press ENT on the drive channel you
wish the ID changed.
CH1=Drive PID=7
SID=NA SXF=20.0M
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Set SCSI
Channel Sec. Ctlr ID..”, then press
ENT.
Set SCSI Channel
Sec. Ctlr ID ..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a new ID, then
press ENT for two seconds to confirm.
Set Sec. Ctlr
ID=NA to ID: 9 ?
Setting Channel Bus Terminator
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Channels," then
press ENT.
View and Edit
SCSI Channels
ꢀ
Channel information will be displayed.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a channel. Press
CH0=Host PID=0
SID=NA SXF=20.0M
ENT on
a
channel you wish the
terminator mode changed.
Set SCSI Channel
Terminator
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Set SCSI
Channel Terminator,” then press ENT.
Front Panel Operation
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Its current status will be displayed on
the LCD. Press ENT to continue.
SCSI Terminator
Enabled
..
Press ENT again for two seconds to
change the terminator mode to the
alternate setting.
CHL=0 Disable
Terminator
?
IMPORTANT!
•
You can use terminator jumpers on the controller board to control SCSI
bus termination of the SentinelRAID series controllers. When using
jumpers to control, firmware termination setting must be disabled. To
disable SCSI termination of a SCSI bus, the associated terminator jumpers
must be left open, and firmware setting must be disabled.
Setting Transfer Speed
Transfer speed refers to the SCSI bus speed in synchronous mode.
Asynchronous mode is also available in this option setting. In
Ultra/ Ultra Wide SCSI, the maximum synchronous speed is
20.8Mhz.
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
SCSI Channels
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Channels," then
press ENT.
ꢀ
Channel information will be displayed.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a channel. Press
ENT on the channel you wish the
transfer speed changed.
CH0=Host PID=0
SID=NA SXF=80.0M
Set Transfer
Speed
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Set Transfer
Speed," then press ENT.
..
The current speed of this SCSI channel
will be displayed. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to
select the desired speed, then press
ENT for two seconds to confirm.
CHL=0 Clk=80.0M
Change to=40.0M?
IMPORTANT!
•
Every time you change the Transfer Speed, you must reset the controller
for the changes to take effect.
Infortrend
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Transfer Width
The controller supports 8-bit SCSI and 16-bit SCSI. Enable “Wide
Transfer” to use the 16-bit SCSI function. Disabling “Wide Transfer”
will limit the channel transfer speed to 8-bit SCSI.
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
SCSI Channels
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Channels," then
press ENT.
ꢀ
Channel information will be displayed.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to browse through the
channels. Press ENT on the channel
you wish the transfer width changed.
CH0=Host PID=0
SID=NA SXF=20.0M
Set Transfer
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Set Transfer
Width," then press ENT.
Width
..
..
The current mode will be displayed.
Press ENT to continue.
Wide Transfer
Enabled
Press ENT again for two seconds.
Disable
Wide Transfer ?
IMPORTANT!
•
Every time you change the SCSI Transfer Width, you must reset the
controller for the changes to take effect.
Viewing and Editing SCSI Target - Drive Channel
Press ENT for two seconds to enter the
View and Edit
SCSI Channels
Main Menu. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
"View and Edit SCSI Channels," then
press ENT.
ꢀ
CH1=Drive PID=7
SID=NA SXF=20.0M
SCSI channel information will be
displayed on the LCD. Press ENT on
the drive channel you wish the SCSI ID
changed.
View and Edit
SCSI Target ..
Front Panel Operation
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select “View and Edit
SCSI Target,” then press ENT.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI target,
then press ENT.
SCSI Target
CHL=1 ID=0
..
Slot Number
Slot Assignment
Default No Set..
To set the Slot number of the SCSI
target, choose “Slot Assignment," then
press ENT. The current slot number
will be displayed.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to change the slot
number, then press ENT for two
seconds.
Slot Assignment
Set to
# 9 ?
Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI target,
then press ENT.
SCSI Target
CHL=1 ID=0
..
To set the maximum synchronous
clock of this SCSI target, choose “Max.
Synchronous Xfer Clock," then press
ENT. The current clock setting will be
displayed on the LCD.
Max Synchronous
Xfer Clock# 12..
Period Factor
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to change the clock, then
press ENT for two seconds.
Def= 12 to
?
--
Maximum Transfer Width
SCSI Target
CHL=1 ID=0
..
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI target,
then press ENT.
To set the maximum transfer width of
this SCSI target, choose “Max. Xfer
Narrow Only” or “Max. Xfer Wide
Supported,” then press ENT. The
Max Xfer Wide
Supported
Infortrend
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
current clock setting will be displayed
on the LCD.
Max Xfer Narrow
Only
Press ENT for two seconds to change
the setting.
?
Parity Check
SCSI Target
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI target,
then press ENT.
CHL=1 ID=0
..
..
Choose “Parity Check," then press
ENT. The current clock setting will be
displayed on the LCD.
Parity Check
Enabled
Press ENT for two seconds to change
the setting.
Disable
Parity Checking?
Disconnecting Support
SCSI Target
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI target,
then press ENT.
CHL=1 ID=0
Disconnect
..
Choose “Disconnect Support," then
press ENT. The current clock setting
will be displayed on the LCD.
Support Enabled
Press ENT for two seconds to change
the setting.
Disable Support
Disconnect
?
Maximum Tag Count
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI target,
then press ENT.
SCSI Target
CHL=1 ID=0
..
Choose “Max Tag Count," then press
ENT. The current clock setting will be
displayed on the LCD.
Max Tag Count:
Default( 32) ..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to change the setting,
then press ENT for two seconds to
change the setting.
Tag Cur=32
Set to:Default ?
Front Panel Operation
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT!
•
Disabling the Maximum Tag Count will disable the internal cache of this
SCSI drive..
Restore to Default Setting
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI target,
then press ENT.
SCSI Target
CHL=1 ID=0
..
Restore to
Default Setting.
Choose “Restore to Default Setting,"
then press ENT.
Press ENT again for two seconds to
restore the SCSI target’s default
settings.
Restore to
Default Setting?
Infortrend
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.13 System Functions
Choose “System Functions” in the main menu, then press ENT.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a submenu, then press ENT.
Mute Beeper
When the controller’s beeper has been
activated, choose “Mute beeper," then
press ENT to turn the beeper off
temporarily for the current event. The
beeper will still activate on the next event.
Mute Beeper
..
Change Password
Use the controller’s password to protect the system from
unauthorized entry. Once the controller’s password is set,
regardless of whether the front panel, the RS-232C terminal interface
or the RAIDWatch Manager is used, the user can only configure and
monitor the RAID controller by providing the correct password.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
The controller requests a password whenever user is entering the main
menu from the initial screen or a configuration change is made. If the
controller is going to be left unattended, the “Password Validation
Timeout” should be set to “Always Check.”
Controller password and controller name share a 16-character space. The
maximum number of characters for controller password is 15. If 15
characters are used for a controller name, there will be only one character
left for controller password and vice versa..
Changing Password
To set or change the controller password,
press or to select “Change
Password,” then press ENT.
Change Password
..
ꢀ
ꢀ
Front Panel Operation
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a password has previously been set, the
controller will ask for the old password
first. If password has not yet been set, the
controller will directly ask for the new
password. The password can not be
replaced unless a correct old password is
provided.
Old
Password
..
Re-Ent Password
..
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select a character, then
press ENT to move to the next space. After
entering all the characters (alphabetic or
numeric), press ENT for two seconds to
confirm. If the password is correct, or
there is no preset password, it will ask for
the new password. Enter the password
again to confirm.
Change Password
Successful
Disabling Password
To disable or delete the password, press ENT on the fist flashing
digit for two seconds when requested to enter a new password. The
existing password will be deleted. No password checking will occur
when entering the Main Menu from the Initial screen or making
configuration.
Reset Controller
Reset This
Controller
To reset the controller without powering
off the system, Press ꢀ or ꢀ to “Reset
Controller,” then press ENT. Press ENT
again for two seconds to confirm. The
controller will now reset.
..
?
Reset This
Controller
Shutdown Controller
Shutdown This
Controller
Before powering off the controller,
unwritten data may still reside in cache
memory. Use the “Shutdown Controller”
..
?
function to flush the cache content. Press Shutdown This
Controller
ꢀ or ꢀ to “Shutdown Controller,” then
press ENT. Press ENT again for two
seconds to confirm.
Infortrend
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The controller will now flush the cache ShutdownComplete
Reset Ctlr?
memory. Press ENT for two seconds to
confirm and reset the controller or power
off the controller.
Controller Maintenance
For Controller Maintenance functions, please refer to Appendix C.
Saving NVRAM to Disks
You can choose to backup your controller-dependent configuration
information to disk. We strongly recommend using this function to
save configuration profile whenever a configuration change is made.
The information will be distributed to every logical drive in the
RAID system. If using the RAIDWatch manager, you can save your
configuration data as a file to a computer system drive.
A RAID configuration of drives must exist for the controller to write
NVRAM content onto it.
From the main menu, choose “System
Functions.” Use arrow keys to scroll
down and select “Controller
Controller
Maintenance ..
Maintenance,” “Save NVRAM to Disks,”
then press ENT. Press ENT for two
seconds on the message prompt, “Save
NVRAM to Disks?”.
Save NVRAM
To Disks
?
A prompt will inform you that NVRAM information has been
successfully saved.
Restore NVRAM from Disks
Once you want to restore your NVRAM information from what you
previously saved onto disk, use this function to restore the
configuration setting.
From the main menu, choose “System
Functions.” Use arrow keys to scroll
down and select “Controller
Restore NVRAM
from Disks
?
Maintenance,” “Restore NVRAM from
Disks..,” and then press ENT. Press ENT
for two seconds to confirm.
A prompt will inform you the controller NVRAM data has been
successfully restored from disks.
Front Panel Operation
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14 Controller Parameters
Controller Name
Select “View and Edit Config Parms” from
the main menu. Choose “View and Edit
Configuration parameters,” “Controller
Parameters," then press ENT. The current
name will be displayed. Press ENT for two
seconds and enter the new controller name
by using ꢀ or ꢀ. Press ENT to move to
another character and then press ENT for
two seconds on the last digit of controller
name to complete the process.
Controller Name:
_ _ _ _
Enter Ctlr Name:
LCD Title Display Controller Name
Choose “View and Edit Configuration
LCD Title Disp –
parameters,” “Controller Parameters,” Controller Logo?
then press ENT. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to choose to
display the embedded controller logo or
any given name on the LCD initial screen.
LCD Title Disp –
Controller Name?
Password Validation Timeout
Choose “View and Edit Configuration
parameters,” “Controller Parameters,”
PasswdValidation
Timeout-5 mins..
then press ENT.
Select “Password
Validation Timeout,” and press ENT.
Press ꢀ or ꢀ to choose to enable a
validation timeout from one to five
minutes to always check. The always
check
timeout
will
disable
any
configuration change without entering the
correct password.
Controller Unique Identifier
Choose “View and Edit Configuration
parameters,” “Controller Parameters,"
then press ENT. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to select
Ctlr Unique
ID-
Infortrend
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Ctlr Unique ID-,” then press ENT. Enter
any hex number between “0” and “FFFFF”
and press ENT to proceed.
Enter a unique ID for any RAID controller no matter it is configured
in a single or dual-controller configuration. The unique ID is
recognized by the controller as the following:
1. A controller-specific identifier that helps controllers to identify
its counterpart in a dual-active configuration.
2. The unique ID is combined to generate a unique WWN node
name for controllers or RAID systems using Fibre channel host
ports. The unique node name helps to prevent host computers
from mis-addressing the storage system during the controller
failback/ failover processes.
3. MAC addresses for the controller’s Ethernet port that should be
taken over by a surviving controller in the event of controller
failure.
Controller Date and Time
This submenu is only available for controllers or subsystems that
come with a real-time clock on board.
Time Zone
View and Edit
Config Parms
Choose “View and Edit Configuration
parameters,” “Controller Parameters,"
then press ENT. Press ꢀ or ꢀ to scroll
down and select “Set Controller Date
and Time”, then press ENT.
Controller
Parameters
..
Set Controller
Date and Time ..
The controller uses GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), a 24-hours clock.
To change the clock to your local time zone, enter the hours later
than the Greenwich mean time following a plus (+) sign. For
example, enter “+9” for Japanese time zone.
Time Zone
Choose “Time Zone” by pressing ENT.
..
Front Panel Operation
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the ꢀ key to enter the plus sign
and the ꢀ key to enter numeric
representatives.
GMT +08:00
-
Date and Time
Date and Time
Use your arrow keys to scroll down and
select “Date and Time” by pressing
ENT. Use your arrow keys to select
and enter the numeric representatives
in the following order: month, day,
hour, minute, and the year.
..
[MMDDhhmm[YYYY]]
Infortrend
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.15 SCSI Drive Utilities
View and Edit
SCSI Drives
From the “View and Edit SCSI Drives”
menu, select the drive that the utility is
to be performed on; then press ENT.
Select “SCSI Drive Utilities; then press
ENT. Choose either “SCSI Drive Low-
level Format” or “Read/ Write Test”.
C=1 I=1 8683MB
NEW DRV SEAGATE
SCSI Drives
Utilities ..
These options are not available for
drives already configured in a logical
configuration, and can only be
performed before a reserved space is
created on drive.
Drive Read/Write
Test
..
SCSI Drive Low-level Format
Drive Low-Level
Format ..
Choose “SCSI Drive Low-level Format”
and confirm by selecting Yes.
IMPORTANT!
•
Do not switch the controller’s and/or disk drive’s power off during the
Drive Low-level Format. If any power failure occurs during a drive low-
level format, the formatting must be started over again when power
resumes.
•
•
All of the data stored in the disk drive will be destroyed during a low-level
format.
The disk drive on which a low-level disk format will be performed cannot be
a spare drive (local or global) nor a member drive of a logical drive. The
"SCSI Drive Low-level Format" option will not appear if the drive’s status
is not stated as a "New Drive" or a "Used Drive".
Front Panel Operation
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCSI Drive Read/Write Test
Drive Read/Write
From the “View and Edit SCSI Drives”
menu, select a new or used drive that
the utility is to be performed on; then
Test
..
Auto Reassign
Disabled
press ENT.
Select “SCSI Drive
..
Utilities;" then press ENT. Choose
“Read/ Write Test” and press ENT.
Abort When Error
Occur-Enabled
Pressꢀ or ꢀ to select and choose to
enable/ disable the following options:
1. "Auto Reassign Bad Block;
2. Abort When Error Occurs;
Drive Test for
Read and Write..
3. Drive Test for - Read Only/ Read
and Write.
Execute Drive
Testing
..
When finished with configuration,
select "Execute Drive Testing" and
press ENT to proceed.
The Read/ Write test progress will be
indicated as a percentage.
Drv Testing 23%
Please Wait !
You may press ESC and select
"Read/ Write Test" later and press ꢀ or
ꢀ to select to "View Read/ Write
Testing Progress" or to "List Current
Bad Block Table." If you want to stop
testing the drive, select "Abort Drive
Testing" and press ENT to proceed.
View Read/Write
Test Progress ..
List Current
Bad Block Table.
Abort Read/Write
Testing
..
Infortrend
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
6
Terminal Screen Messages
6.1
The Initial Screen
Cursor Bar:
Move the cursor bar to a desired item, then
press [ENTER] to select
Controller Name:
Transfer Rate Indicator
Gauge Range:
Identifies type of controller or a preset name
Indicates the current data transfer rate
Use + or - keys to change the gauge range in
order to view the transfer rate indicator
Cache Status:
Write Policy
Date & Time:
Indicates current cache status
Indicates current write-caching policy
Current system date and time, generated by
controller real time clock
PC Graphic (ANSI Mode): Enters the Main Menu and operates in ANSI
mode
Terminal (VT-100 Mode):
Enters the Main Menu and operates in VT-100
mode
PC Graphic (ANSI+Color
Mode):
Enters the Main Menu and operates in ANSI
color mode
Show Transfer Rate+Show Press [ENTER] on this item to show the cache
Cache Status:
status and transfer rate
6-1
Terminal Screen Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Main Menu
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor bar through the menu items, then press
[ENTER] to choose a menu, or [ESC] to return to the previous menu/ screen.
In a subsystem or controller head where battery status can be detected, battery
status will be displayed at the top center. Status will be stated as Good, Bad, or
several “+ ” (plus) marks will be used to indicate battery charge. A battery
fully-charged will be indicated by five plus mark.
When initializing or scanning an array, the controller displays progress
percentage on the upper left corner of the configuration screen. “i” indicates
array initialization. “s” stands for scanning process. The following number
indicates logical drive number.
6.3
Quick Installation
Type Q or use the ↑ ↓ keys to select "Quick installation", then press [ENTER].
Choose Yes to create a logical drive.
All possible RAID levels will be displayed. Use the ↑ ↓ keys to select a RAID
level, then press [ENTER]. The assigned spare drive will be a Local Spare Drive,
not a Global Spare Drive.
Infortrend
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The controller will start initialization and automatically map the logical drive to
LUN 0 of the first host channel.
6-3
Terminal Screen Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4
Logical Drive Status
LG
Logical Drive number
P0: Logical Drive 0 managed by the Primary Controller
S0: Logical Drive 0 managed by the Secondary Controller
The Logical volume to which this logical drive belongs
Controller-generated unique ID
LV
ID
RAID
RAID level
SIZE (MB)
RAID
Capacity of the Logical Drive
RAID Level
Size(MB)
Status 1
Capacity of the Logical Drive
Logical Drive Status – Column 1
The logical drive is in good condition
GOOD
DRV FAILED
CREATING
A drive member failed in the logical drive
Logical drive is being initiated
DRV ABSENT
INCOMPLETE
One of its member drives cannot be detected
Two or more drives failed in the logical drive
Status 2
Status 3
Logical Drive Status – Column 2
Initializing drives
I
A
E
Adding drive(s)
Expanding logical drive
Logical Drive Status – Column 3
Rebuilding the logical drive
R
P
Regenerating array parity
Logical Drive Status – Stripe size
Default
Column O
N/A
2
3
4
5
4KB
6
7
8
64KB
8KB
128KB
256KB
16KB
32KB
Infortrend
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Column C
Logical Drive Status – Write Policy setting
B
Write-back
T
Write-through
#LN
#SB
Total drive members in the logical drive
Standby drives available for the logical drive. This
includes all the spare drives (local spare, global spare)
available for the specific logical drive
#FL
Number of Failed member(s) in the logical drive
Logical drive name (user configurable)
Name
6.5
Logical Volume Status
LV
ID
Logical Volume number.
P0: Logical Volume 0 managed by the Primary Controller
S0: Logical Volume 0 managed by the Secondary Controller
Logical Volume ID number (controller randomly generated)
Size(MB) Capacity of the Logical Volume
#LD
The number of Logical Drive(s) included in this Logical Volume
6-5
Terminal Screen Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.6 SCSI Drive Status
Slot
Chl
Slot number of the drive;
“S” indicates this is the drive used for passing through SES
signals
The drive channel where the drive is connected
X<Y> indicates two channels are configured in a dual-loop
The channel ID assigned to this drive
ID
Size (MB)
Speed
Drive capacity
XxMB Maximum transfer rate of drive channel interface
Async The drive is using asynchronous mode.
LG_DRV
Status
X
The drive is a drive member of logical drive x.
If the Status column shows “STAND-BY”, the drive
is a Local Spare of logical drive x.
Global The SCSI drive is a Global Spare Drive
INITING
Processing array initialization
The drive is in good condition
Processing Rebuild
ON-LINE
REBUILD
STAND-BY
Local Spare Drive or Global Spare Drive. The
Local Spare Drive’s LG_DRV column will show
the logical drive number. The Global Spare
Drive’s LG_DRV column will show “Global”.
NEW DRV
USED DRV
A new drive has not been configured to any
logical drive or as a spare drive
An used drive that is not a member of any
logical drive or configured as spare
BAD
Failed drive
ABSENT
MISSING
SB-MISS
Drive does not exist
Drive once existed, but is missing now
Spare drive missing
Vendor and
Product ID
The vendor and product model information of
the drive
Infortrend
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.7
SCSI Channel’s Status
SCSI channel number
Channel mode
Chl
Mode
RCCom
Host
Redundant controller communication channel
Host Channel mode
Drive Channel mode
Drive
IDs managed by the Primary Controller
PID
*
Multiple IDs were applied (Host Channel mode only)
(ID
Host channel:
number)
Specific IDs managed by the Primary Controller for host
LUN mapping
Drive channel:
Specific ID reserved for the channel processor on the
Primary controller
IDs managed by the Secondary Controller
SID
*
Multiple IDs were applied (Host Channel mode only)
(ID
Host channel:
number)
Specific IDs managed by the Secondary Controller for
host LUN mapping
Drive channel:
Specific ID reserved for the channel processor on the
Secondary controller; used in redundant controller mode
NA
No SCSI ID applied
Default SCSI bus synchronous clock:
DefSynClk
??.?M
The default setting of the channel is ??.? MHz in
Synchronous mode.
Async.
The default setting of the channel is Asynchronous mode.
Default SCSI Bus Width:
DefWid
S
Wide
16-bit SCSI
8-bit SCSI
Narrow
Signal:
S
L
F
Single-ended
LVD
Fibre
6-7
Terminal Screen Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminator Status:
Term
On
Terminator is enabled.
Off
Diff
Terminator is disabled.
The channel is a Differential channel. The terminator can
only be installed/ removed physically.
Current SCSI bus synchronous clock:
CurSynClk
??.?M
The default setting of the SCSI channel is ??.? MHz in
Synchronous mode.
Async.
(empty)
The default setting of the SCSI channel is Asynchronous
mode.
The default SCSI bus synchronous clock has changed.
Reset the controller for the changes to take effect.
Current SCSI Bus Width:
CurWid
Wide
16-bit SCSI
8-bit SCSI
Narrow
(empty)
The default SCSI bus width has changed. Reset the
controller for the changes to take effect.
Infortrend
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
Controller Voltage and Temperature
Controller voltage and temperature monitoring
Choose from main menu “View and Edit Peripheral Devices,” and press
[ENTER].
From the submenu, choose “Controller Peripheral Device
Configuration,” “View Peripheral Device Status”, then press [ENTER].
The current specimens of voltage and temperature detected by the controller
will be displayed on screen and will be stated as normal or out of order.
6-9
Terminal Screen Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.9
Viewing Event Logs on the Screen
There may be a chance when errors occur and you may want to trace down the
record to see what has happened to your system. The controller’s event log
management will record all the events from power on, it can record up to 1,000
events. Powering off or resetting the controller will cause an automatic deletion
of all the recorded event logs. To view the events logs on screen, choose from
main menu “view and edit Event logs” by pressing [ENTER].
The controller can store up to 1000 event logs for use in modifying the
configuration with reference to the present time shown on the upper left of the
configuration screen and the time when the events occurred.
The “P” or “S” icon on the right indicates which one of the controllers (Primary
or Secondary) issued an event in a dual-controller configuration.
To clear the saved event logs, scroll the cursor down to the last event and press
[ENTER].
Choose Yes to clear the recorded event logs.
Infortrend
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
7
Terminal Operation
7.1
Power on RAID Enclosure
Hardware installation should be completed before powering on
your RAID enclosure. Drives must be configured and the controller
properly initialized before host computer can access the storage
capacity. The configuration and administration utility resides in
controller's firmware.
Open the initial terminal screen: use arrow keys to move cursor bar
through menu items, then press [ENTER] to choose the terminal
emulation mode, and [ESC] to return to the previous menu/ screen.
7.2
Caching Parameters
Optimization Modes
Mass storage applications can be roughly categorized into two as
database and video/ imaging, according to its read/ write
characteristics. To optimize the controller for these two categories,
the controller has two embedded optimization modes with
controller behaviors adjusted to different read/ write parameters.
They are the “Optimization for Random I/ O” and the
“Optimization for Sequential I/ O.”
Terminal Operation
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limitations:
There are limitations on the use of optimization modes.
1. You can select the stripe size of each array (logical drive) during
the initial configuration. However, changing stripe size is only
recommended for experienced engineers who have tested the
effects tuning stripe sizes for different applications.
2. The array stripe size can only be changed during the initial
configuration process.
3. Once the controller optimization mode is applied, access to
different logical drives in a RAID system will follow the same
optimized pattern. You can change the optimization mode later
without having to re-organize your array.
Database and Transaction-based Applications:
This kind of applications usually include SQL server, Oracle server,
Informix, or other data base services. These applications keep the
size of each transaction down to the minimum, so that I/ Os can be
rapidly processed. Due to its transaction-based nature, these
applications do not read or write a bunch of data in a sequential
order. Access to data occurs randomly. The transaction size usually
ranges from 2K to 4K. Transaction performance is measured in
“I/ Os per second” or “IOPS.”
Video Recording/Playback and Imaging Applications:
This kind of applications usually includes video playback, video
post-production editing, or other applications of the similar nature.
These applications have the tendency to read or write large files
from and into storage in a sequential order. The size of each I/ O
can be 128K, 256K, 512K, or up to 1MB. The efficiency of these
applications is measured in “MB/ Sec.”
When an array works with applications such as video or image
oriented applications, the application reads/ writes from the drive as
large-block, sequential threads instead of small and randomly
accessed files.
The controller optimization modes have read-ahead buffer and
other R/ W characteristics tuned to obtain the best performance for
these two major application categories.
Infortrend
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimization Mode and Stripe Size
Each controller optimization mode has preset values for the stripe
size of arrays created in different RAID levels. If you want a
different value for your array, you may change the controller
optimization mode, reset the controller, and then go back to create
the array. Once the array is created, stripe size can not be
changed.
Using the default value should be sufficient for most applications.
Opt. for Sequential I/O
Opt. for Random I/O
RAID0
RAID1
RAID3
RAID5
128
128
16
32
32
4
128
32
Optimization for Random or Sequential I/O
Choose “Optimization for Random I/ O” or “Optimization for
Sequential I/ O,” then press [ENTER].
The “Random” or
“Sequential” dialog box will appear, depending on the option you
have selected. Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm
the setting.
Write-Back/Write-Through Cache Enable/Disable
Choose “Caching Parameters”, then press [ENTER]. Select “Write-
Back Cache,” then press [ENTER]. “Enabled” or “Disabled” will
Terminal Operation
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
display the current setting with the Write-Back caching. Choose Yes
in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting.
The Write-through mode is safer if your controller is not configured
in a redundant pair and there is no battery backup.
Write-back caching can dramatically improve write performance by
caching the unfinished writes in memory and let them be committed
to drives in a more efficient manner. In the event of power failure, a
battery module can hold cached data for days. In the event of
controller failure, data cached in the failed controller has an exact
replica on its counterpart controller and therefore remains intact.
IMPORTANT!
•
The original 512GB threshold on array optimization mode is canceled. If the
size of an array is larger than 16TB, only the optimization for sequential I/O
can be applied. Logical drives of this size are not practical; therefore, there is
actually no limitation on the optimization mode and array capacity.
•
•
Every time you change the Caching Parameters, you must reset the
controller for the changes to take effect.
In the redundant controller configuration, write-back will only be applicable
when there is a synchronized cache channel between partner controllers.
7.3
Viewing the Connected Drives
Prior to configuring disk drives into a logical drive, it is necessary to
understand the status of physical drives in your enclosure.
Use arrow keys to scroll down to “View and Edit SCSI Drives.” This
will display information of all the physical drives installed.
Infortrend
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drives will be listed in the table of “View and Edit SCSI Drives.”
Use arrow keys to scroll the table. You may first examine whether
there is any drive installed but not listed here. If there is a drive
installed but not listed, the drive may be defective or not installed
correctly, please contact your RAID supplier.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
Drives of the same brand/model/capacity might not have the same block
number.
The basic read/write unit of a hard drive is block. If members of a logical
drive have different block numbers (capacity), the smallest block number will
be taken as the maximum capacity to be used in every drive. Therefore, use
drives of the same capacity.
•
You may assign a Local/Global Spare Drive to a logical drive whose
members has a block number equal or smaller than the Local/Global Spare
Drive but you should not do the reverse.
7.4
Creating a Logical Drive
Browse through the main menu and select “View and Edit Logical
Drive.”
For the first logical drive on RAID, simply choose LG 0 and press
[ENTER] to proceed. You may create as many as 128 logical drives
from drives on any drive channel.
When prompted to “Create Logical
Drive?,” select Yes and press
[ENTER] to proceed.
Terminal Operation
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choosing a RAID Level:
A pull-down list of supported RAID levels will
appear. In this chapter, RAID 5 will be used to
demonstrate the configuration process. Choose a
RAID level for this logical drive.
Choosing Member Drives:
Choose your member drive(s) from the list of available physical
drives. The drives can be tagged for inclusion by positioning the
cursor bar on the drive and then pressing [ENTER]. An asterisk ( )
mark will appear on the selected physical drive(s). To deselect the
drive, press [ENTER] again on the selected drive. The “ ” mark will
disappear. Use ↑ ↓ keys to select more drives.
Logical Drive Preferences:
After all member drives have been selected, press ESC to continue
with the next option. A list of array options is displayed.
Maximum Drive Capacity:
As a rule, a logical drive should be composed of drives of the same
capacity. A logical drive can only use the capacity of each drive up
to the maximum capacity of the smallest drive.
Infortrend
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assign Spare Drives:
You can add a spare drive from the list of the unused drives. The
spare chosen here is a Local spare and will automatically replace
any failed drive in the event of drive failure. The controller will
then rebuild data onto the replacement drive.
A logical drive composed in a none-redundancy RAID level
(NRAID or RAID 0) does not support spare drive rebuild.
Disk Reserved Space
The reserved space is a small section of disk space formatted for storing
array configuration and RAIDWatch program. Do not change the size of
reserved space unless you want your array to be accessed by controllers
using older firmware.
Logical Drive Assignments:
If you use two controllers for a dual-active configuration, a logical
drive can be assigned to either of the controllers to balance
workload. The default is primary controller, press [ESC] if change is
not preferred. Logical drive assignment can be changed any time
later.
Write Policy
This sub-menu allows you to set the caching mode for this specific
logical drive. “Default” is a neutral value that is coordinated with
the controller’s current caching mode setting, that you can see
bracketed in the write policy status.
Terminal Operation
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initialization Mode
This sub-menu allows you to set if the logical drive is immediately
available. If the online (default) mode is used, data can be written
onto it and you may continue with array configuration, e.g.,
including the array into a logical volume, before the array’s
initialization is completed.
Stripe Size
This option should only be changed by experienced engineers.
Setting to an incongruous value can severely drag the
performance. This option should only be changed when you can
be sure of the performance gains it might bring you.
The default value is determined by controller Optimization Mode
setting and the RAID level used for the array.
Press [ESC] to continue when all the preferences have been set.
A confirm box will appear on the screen. Verify all information in
the box before choosing “Yes” to confirm and proceed.
If online initialization mode is applied, logical drive will first be created
and the controller will find appropriate time to initialize the array.
Infortrend
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The completion of array creation will be indicated by the above message
prompt.
A controller event will then prompt to indicate the logical drive
initialization has begun. Tap [ESC] to cancel the “Notification”
prompt and a progress indicator displays on the screen as a
percentage bar.
The array initialization runs in the background while you can start
using the array or continue configuring your RAID system.
When a fault-tolerant RAID level (RAID 1, 3, or 5) is selected, the
controller will start initializing parity.
Use the [ESC] key to view the status of the created logical drive.
IMPORTANT!
•
Mind that only logical drives with RAID level 1, 3 and 5 will take the time
to initialize the logical drive. Logical drives with RAID level 0 and NRAID
do not have the necessity to perform logical drive initialization; the drive
initialization will be finished almost immediately.
Terminal Operation
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.5
Creating a Logical Volume
A logical volume consists of one or several logical drives. Choose
“View and Edit logical volumes” in the main menu. The current
logical volume configuration and status will be displayed on the
screen.
Choose a logical volume
number (0-7) that has not yet been
defined, then press [ENTER] to
proceed. A prompt “Create Logical
Volume?” will appear. Select “Yes”
and press [ENTER].
Select one or more logical drive(s) available on the list. The same as
creating a logical drive, the logical drive(s) can be tagged for
inclusion by positioning the cursor bar on the desired drive and then
press [ENTER] to select. An asterisk (*) mark will appear on the
selected drive. Press [ENTER] again will deselect a logical drive.
Use arrow keys to select a sub-menu and make change to the
initialization mode, write policy, or the managing controller.
Infortrend
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Logical volumes can be assigned to different controllers (primary or
secondary). Default is primary.
Note that if a logical volume is manually assigned to a specific
controller, all its members’ assignment will also be shifted to that
controller.
As all the member logical drives are selected, press [ESC] to
continue. The confirm box displays. Choose Yes to create the
logical volume.
Press [ENTER] and the information of the created logical volume
displays.
LV:
P0:
S0:
Logical Volume ID
Logical Volume 0 managed by the primary controller
Logical Volume 0 managed by the secondary
controller
ID:
Unique ID for the logical volume, randomly
generated by the controller
Size:
#LD:
Capacity of this volume
Number of the included members
7.6
Partitioning a Logical Drive/Logical
Volume
The process of partitioning a logical drive is the same as that of
partitioning a logical volume. We take the partitioning of a logical
volume for an example in the proceeding discussion.
Please note that partitioning can be very useful when dealing with a
very large capacity but partitioning a logical drive or logical volume
is not a must for RAID configuration.
Terminal Operation
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choose the logical volume you wish to partition, then press
[ENTER]. Choose “Partition logical volume”, then press [ENTER].
Select from the list of undefined partitions and Press [ENTER].
A list of partitions displays. If the logical volume has not yet been
partitioned, all volume capacity will list as “partition 0.”
Press [ENTER] and type the desired size for the selected partition,
and then press [ENTER] to proceed. The remaining size will be
automatically allotted to the next partition.
Choose Yes to confirm when prompted to the “Partition Logical
Volume?” message. Press [ENTER] to confirm. Follow the same
procedure to partition the remaining capacity of your logical
volume.
When a partition of a logical drive/ logical volume is deleted, the
capacity of the deleted partition will be added to the last partition.
WARNING!
•
As long as a partition has been changed, it is necessary to re-configure all
host LUN mappings. All data in it will be lost and all the host LUN
mappings will be removed with any change to partition capacity.
Infortrend
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.7
Mapping a Logical Volume to Host LUN
Select “View and Edit Host luns” in the main menu, then press
[ENTER].
A list of host channel/ ID combinations appears on the screen. The
diagram above shows two host channels and each is designated
with both a primary and a secondary ID.
Multiple IDs on host channels are necessary for redundant controller
configuration. Details on creating multiple IDs and changing
channel mode will be discussed later. Choose a host ID by pressing
[ENTER].
Several details are noticeable here:
1.
A
logical group of drives (logical drive/ logical volume)
previously assigned to the primary controller can not be
mapped to a secondary ID. Neither can those assigned to the
secondary controller mapped to a primary ID.
2. For a SCSI-based controller, ID 7 is reserved for the controller
itself. If there are two controllers, controllers might occupy ID6
and ID7, or ID8 and ID9. Please check your system Hardware
Manual for details on preserved IDs.
Choose the "channel-ID" combination you wish to map, then press
[ENTER] to proceed. Choose mapping a “Logical Drive” or a
“Logical Volume” on the drop box.
Terminal Operation
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. A list of LUN entries and their respective mappings will be
displayed. To map a host LUN to a logical volume’s partition,
select an available LUN entry (one not mapped yet) by moving
the cursor bar to the LUN, then press [ENTER].
2. A list of available logical volumes displays. Move the cursor bar
to the desired logical unit, then press [ENTER].
3. A list of available partitions will prompt. Move cursor bar to the
desired partition, then press [ENTER].
If you have not
partitioned the logical volume, the whole capacity will be
displayed as one logical partition.
4. When prompted to “Map
Host LUN," press [ENTER]
to proceed. For access control over Fibre network, find in
Chapter 8 details about "Create Host Filter Entry."
5. When prompted to "Map Logical Volume?,” select Yes to
continue.
A prompt will display the
mapping you wish to create.
Choose Yes to confirm the
LUN mapping you selected.
The detail in the confirm box
reads: partition 0 of logical
volume 0 will map to LUN 0
of SCSI ID 0 on host channel 0.
Continue to map other partitions to host LUNs.
With any of the Host ID/ LUN successfully associated with a logical
capacity, the “No Host LUN” message in the LCD screen will
change to “Ready.”
If your controller has not been configured with a host channel and
assigned with SCSI ID, please move on to section 7.12
Infortrend
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.8
Assigning Spare Drive, Rebuild
Settings
Adding Local Spare Drive
A spare drive is a standby drive automatically initiated by controller
firmware to replace a failed drive. A spare drive must have an
equal or larger capacity than the array members. A local spare
should have a capacity equal or larger than the members of the
logical drive it is assigned to. A global spare should have a capacity
equal or larger than all physical drives in a RAID system.
1. Choose “View and Edit SCSI Drives” on the main menu, press
[ENTER]. Move the cursor bar to a SCSI drive that is not
assigned to a logical drive or as a spare drive (usually indicated
as a "New Drive"), and then press [ENTER].
2. Choose “Add Local Spare Drive” and press [ENTER]. A list of
logical drives displays.
3. Move the cursor bar to a logical drive, then press [ENTER]. The
unassigned SCSI drive will be associated with to this logical
drive as a Local Spare.
4. When prompted to “Add Local Spare Drive?”, choose Yes to
confirm.
Terminal Operation
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Global Spare Drive
A global spare replaces the failed drive in any logical drive of a
RAID system.
Move cursor bar to the SCSI drive that is not a member drive or a
spare (usually indicated as a "New Drive"), and then press
[ENTER]. Choose “Add Global Spare Drive.” When prompted to
“Add Global Spare Drive?”, choose Yes.
7.9
Viewing and Editing Logical Drive and
Drive Members
Choose “View and Edit Logical Drives” in the main menu. The array
status will be displayed. Refer to the previous chapter for more
details on the legends used in Logical Drive’s Status. To see the
drive member information, choose the logical drive by pressing
[ENTER].
Choose “View SCSI Drives.” Drive member information will be
displayed on the screen.
Infortrend
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Logical Drive
Choose the logical drive you wish to delete, then press [ENTER].
Choose “Delete logical drive.” Choose Yes when prompted to
confirm.
Deleting a Partition of a Logical Drive
Choose the logical drive which has a partition you wish to delete,
then press [ENTER]. Choose “Partition logical drive.” Partitions of
the logical drive will be displayed in tabulated form. Move the
cursor bar to the partition you wish to delete, then press [ENTER].
Enter “0” on the partition size to delete the partition.
Figure 7 - 1 Drive Space Allocated to the Last Partition
Logical Drive
1000MB
Logical Drive
1000MB
Partition 0 - 100MB
Partition 1 - 200MB
• The capacity of the deleted
partitions will be added to
the last partition.
Partition 0 - 100MB
Partition 1 - 300MB
Delete
Partition 1
Partition 2 - 300MB
Partition 3 - 400MB
Partition 2 - 600MB
400 + 200
As illustrated above, the capacity of the deleted partition will be
added to the last partition.
WARNING!
•
As long as a partition has been changed, it is necessary to reconfigure all
host LUN mappings. All data kept in the partition and the host LUN
mappings will be removed with any partition change.
Assigning a Name to a Logical Drive
Naming can help with identifying different arrays in a multi-array
configuration. This function is also useful in special situations. For
Terminal Operation
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
example, when one or more logical drives have been deleted, the
array indexing is changed after system reboot. The second logical
drive might become the first on the list.
Choose the logical drive you wish to assign a name, then press
[ENTER]. Choose “logical drive name,” then press [ENTER] again.
The current name will be displayed. You may now enter a new
name in this field. Enter a name, then press [ENTER] to save the
configuration.
Rebuilding a Logical Drive
If there is no spare drive in the system, a failed drive should be
immediately replaced by a drive known to be good. Once the failed
drive is replaced, the rebuild process can be manually initiated.
If you want the controller to auto-detect a replacement drive, make
sure you have the following items set to enabled:
1. Periodic Drive Check Time
2. Periodic Auto-Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time
These two configuration options can be found under “View and Edit
Configuration Parameters” -> “ Drive-Side SCSI Parameters”.
Choose the logical drive that has a failed member drive, then press
[ENTER]. Choose “Rebuild logical drive”, then press [ENTER].
When prompted to “Rebuild Logical Drive?,” select Yes.
The rebuild progress will be displayed.
Infortrend
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When rebuild has already started, choose “Rebuild progress” to see
the rebuilding progress.
IMPORTANT!
•
The Rebuild function is only available when a logical drive (with RAID
level 1, 3 or 5) has a failed member. NRAID and RAID 0 configurations
provide no data redundancy.
Regenerating Logical Drive Parity
(Applies to RAID1, 3, and 5)
If no verifying method is applied to data writes, this function can be
often performed to verify parity blocks of a selected array. This
function compares and recalculates parity data to correct parity
errors.
Choose the logical drive that you want to regenerate the parity for,
and then press [ENTER]. Choose “Regenerate Parity,” then press
[ENTER]. When prompted to “Regenerate Parity?”, select Yes.
IMPORTANT!
•
If a regenerating process is stopped by a drive failure, the process cannot
restart until the logical drive is successfully rebuilt by having its failed
member replaced.
Media Scan
Media Scan is used to examine drives and is able to detect the
presence of bad blocks. If any data blocks have not been properly
committed and are found during the scanning process, data from
Terminal Operation
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
those blocks are automatically recalculated, retrieved and stored
onto undamaged sectors. If bad blocks are encountered on yet
another drive during the rebuild process, the block LBA (Logical
Block Address) of those bad blocks will be shown. If rebuild is
carried out under this situation, rebuild will continue with he
unaffected sectors, salvaging a majority of the stored data.
There are two options with performing the media scan:
1. Media Scan Priority: determines how much system resources
will be used for drive scanning and recalculating process.
2. Iteration Count:
The iteration setting determines how many times the scan is
performed. If set to the continuous, the scan will run in the
background continuously until it is stopped by user.
Write Policy
The Write-Back cache setting is configurable on the per array basis.
Setting to the default value means the array setting is coordinated with the
controller’s general setting. The controller’s general setting option can be
found in “View and Edit Configuration Parameters” -> “Caching
Parameters” -> “Write-Back Cache”. Note that cached writes are lost if
power failure should occur.
Infortrend
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.10 Viewing and Editing Host LUNs
Viewing or Deleting LUN Mappings
Choose the host channel and host ID combination you wish to view
or delete.
A list of the current LUN mapping will be displayed on the screen.
Move the cursor bar to the LUN mapping you wish to delete, then
press [ENTER]. Select Yes to delete the LUN mapping, or No to
cancel.
Edit Host-ID/WWN Name List
This is a specific item used for systems communicating over Fibre
host loops. Please refer to Chapter 8 Fibre Operation for more
details.
Pass-through SCSI Commands
If you have primary and secondary controllers, move the cursor to
the controller for the device that you wish to map; then press
[ENTER]. You will be prompted to map a SCSI ID to a physical
drive.
WARNING!
Infortrend
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
Pass-through SCSI Commands are only intended to perform maintenance
functions for a drive or device on the drive side. Do not perform any
destructive commands to a disk drive (i.e., any commands that write data
to a drive media). This will result in inconsistent parity among drives
included in a logical configuration of drives. If a disk drive is a spare drive
or a member of a logical drive, such a destructive command may cause a
data inconsistency.
When a drive/device is mapped to a host SCSI ID so that Pass-through
SCSI Commands can be used, the data on that drive/device will not be
protected by the controller. Users who employ Pass-through SCSI
Commands to perform any write commands to drive media do so at their
own risk.
7.11 Viewing and Editing SCSI Drives
Choose “View and Edit SCSI Drives” in the main menu. All drives
attached to the drive channels will be displayed on the screen.
Scanning New Drive
Terminal Operation
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a drive connected after the array is started, choose a drive
and press [ENTER]. Choose “Scan SCSI drive”, then press
[ENTER]. The menu may vary according to the drive status.
Choose the drive channel and ID of the drive you wish to scan, then
press [ENTER].
Slot Number
Drive Entry
These two functions are reserved for Fault Bus configuration.
Identifying Drive
Move the cursor bar to the drive you wish to identify, then press
[ENTER]. Choose “Identify SCSI drive,” then choose “flash all
drives” to flash the read/ write LEDs of all the drives in the drive
channel. Choose Yes.
You may also choose “flash selected drive” or “flash all But
Selected drives” to flash the read/ write LED of the selected drive
only, or all the drives except the selected drive. Choose Yes and
choose an extent of time from 1 to 999 seconds.
Deleting Spare Drive (Global / Local Spare Drive)
Infortrend
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the cursor to a Local Spare Drive or Global Spare Drive, then
press [ENTER]. Choose “Delete Global/ Local Spare Drive,” then
press [ENTER] again. Choose Yes to confirm.
NOTE:
•
The spare drive you deleted or any drive you replaced from a logical unit
will be indicated as a "used drive."
Terminal Operation
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.12 Viewing and Editing SCSI Channels
Except for those shipped in dual-redundant chassis, SCSI-based
controllers use channel 0 as the host channel and also as the
communications path between controllers. If redundant controller
configuration is preferred, you may need to assign other channels as
host. Flexibility is added for all channels can be configured as host
or drive.
Choose “View and Edit SCSI Channels” in the main menu. Channel
status displays.
Redefining Channel Mode
For Fibre and SCSI-based controllers, all channels can be operated in
host or drive mode. Choose the channel you wish to change, then
press [ENTER]. Choose “Channel Mode,” then press [ENTER]. A
dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the change.
IMPORTANT!
•
Every time you change the channel mode, you must reset the controller for
the change to take effect.
Infortrend
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing and Editing SCSI IDs - Host Channel
Choose a host channel, then press [ENTER]. Choose “View and Edit
SCSI ID.” A list of existing ID(s) will be displayed on the screen.
You may then choose to add or delete an existing ID.
Viewing and Editing SCSI IDs
Adding a SCSI ID (Primary/Secondary Controller ID)
In single controller mode, you should set the Secondary Controller’s
ID to “NA”. In dual-controller mode, you need to set an ID for the
Secondary controller on each of your drive channels.
Press [ENTER] on one of the existing IDs. Choose “Add Channel
SCSI ID,” then choose to assign an ID for either the “Primary
Controller” or "Secondary Controller." A list of SCSI IDs will
appear. Choose a SCSI ID. DO NOT choose a SCSI ID used by
another device on the same channel. The defaults are PID=8 and
SID=9 (SCSI channel). In redundant mode, logical drives mapped to
a primary ID will be managed by the primary controller, and vice
versa.
Terminal Operation
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting an ID
Choose the SCSI ID you wish to delete. Choose “Delete Channel
SCSI ID.” The dialog box “Delete Primary/ Secondary Controller
SCSI ID?” will appear. Select Yes, then press [ENTER] to confirm.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
•
Every time you change a channel ID, you must reset the controller for the
changes to take effect.
The default SCSI ID of the primary controller (single controller
configuration) on a host channel is 0, on a Drive channel is 7.
If only one controller exists, you must set the Secondary Controller’s ID to
“NA.” If a secondary controller exists, you need to set a secondary ID on
host and drive channels.
•
•
Multiple target IDs can be applied to the Host channels while each Drive
channel has only one or two IDs (in redundant mode).
At least a controller’s ID has to present on each channel bus.
Setting a Primary Controller’s SCSI ID - Drive Channel
Choose a drive channel, then press [ENTER]. Choose “Primary
Controller SCSI ID.” A list of channel IDs displays. Choose an ID.
The dialog box “Change Primary Controller SCSI ID?” displays.
Select Yes, then press [ENTER].
Infortrend
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more details on ID settings in redundant mode, please refer to
Chapter 10.
Setting a Secondary Controller’s SCSI ID - Drive Channel
Choose a Drive channel, then press [ENTER]. Choose “Secondary
Controller SCSI ID.” A list of channel IDs displays. Assign an ID to
the chip processor of the secondary controller’s drive channel.
Choose an ID. The dialog box “Change Secondary Controller SCSI
ID?” will appear. Select Yes, then press [ENTER].
Setting Channel Terminator
Choose the channel you wish the terminator enabled or disabled,
then press [ENTER]. Choose “SCSI Terminator”, then press
[ENTER]. A dialog box will appear. Choose Yes, then press
[ENTER]. Terminator can also be enabled by switch jumpers, please
refer to the controller hardware manual for more details.
Setting a Transfer Speed
Drive Channel
Terminal Operation
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Channel
Move the cursor bar to a channel, then press [ENTER]. Choose
“Sync Transfer Clock”, then press [ENTER]. A list of the clock
speed will appear. Move the cursor bar to the desired speed and
press [ENTER]. A dialog box “Change Sync Transfer Clock?” will
appear. Choose Yes to confirm.
IMPORTANT!
•
Every time you change the SCSI Transfer Speed, you must reset the
controller for the changes to take effect.
Setting the Transfer Width
Move the cursor bar to a channel, then press [ENTER]. Select “Wide
Transfer,” then press [ENTER]. A dialog box “Disable Wide
Transfer?” or “Enable Wide Transfer?” will appear. Choose Yes to
confirm.
IMPORTANT!
•
Every time you change the SCSI Transfer Width, you must reset the
controller for the changes to take effect.
Infortrend
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing and Editing SCSI Target / Drive Channel
Move the cursor bar to a Drive channel, then press [ENTER]. Select
“View and Edit SCSI Target,” then press [ENTER].
A list of all the SCSI targets and their current settings will appear.
Press [ENTER] on a SCSI target and a menu list will appear on the
screen.
NOTE:
•
It is only recommended to alter the SCSI target settings when adjustments
should be made to specific devices on a drive channel. You may change the
SCSI parameters for specific drives when mixing different drives or
connecting other SCSI device like a CD-ROM on a drive channel. Please
note that neither mixing drives nor connecting CD-ROM is recommended
for the controller.
Slot Number
Choose “Slot Number”, then press [ENTER]. Enter a slot number,
then press [ENTER] again.
This setting is reserved for the "Fault-Bus" option.
Terminal Operation
7-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Synchronous Transfer Clock
Choose “Maximum Sync. Xfer Clock,” then press [ENTER]. A
dialog box will appear on the screen. Enter the clock, then press
[ENTER].
Maximum Transfer Width
Choose “Maximum Xfer Width”, then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes
in the dialog box to confirm the setting.
Parity Check
Choose “Parity Check.” Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to
confirm the setting.
Infortrend
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disconnecting Support
Choose “Disconnect Support.” Choose Yes in the dialog box that
follows to confirm the setting.
Maximum Tag Count
Choose “Maximum Tag Count,” then press [ENTER]. A list of
available tag count numbers will appear. Move the cursor bar to a
number, then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog box that
follows to confirm the setting.
IMPORTANT!
•
Disabling the Maximum Tag Count will disable the internal cache of a
SCSI drive.
Data Rate
This option is available in the drive channel configuration menus of
Fibre, ATA, or SATA-based subsystems. Default is “AUTO” and
Terminal Operation
7-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should work fine with most drives. Changing this setting is not
recommended unless some particular bus signal issues occur.
All SATA/ ATA-based system connects only one drive per
SATA/ ATA channel. This helps to avoid single drive failure from
affecting other drives. The maximum mechanical performance of
today’s drives can reach around 30MB/ sec (sustained read). This is
still far below the bandwidth of a drive channel bus. Setting the
SATA/ ATA bus speed to a lower value can get around some
problems, but will not become a bottleneck to system performance.
Mind that the SATA/ ATA speed is the maximum transfer rate of
SATA/ ATA bus in that mode. It does not mean the drive can
actually carry out that amount of sustained read/ write performance.
For the performance of each drive model, please refer to the
documentation provided by drive manufacturer.
Infortrend
7-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.13 System Functions
Choose “System Functions” in the main menu, then press [ENTER].
The System Functions menu displays. Move the cursor bar to an
item, then press [ENTER].
Mute Beeper
When the controller’s beeper has been activated, choose “Mute
beeper,” then press [ENTER]. Choose “Yes” and press [ENTER] in
the next dialog box to turn the beeper off temporarily for the current
event. The beeper will still be activated on the next event.
Change Password
Use the controller’s password to protect the array from
unauthorized entry. Once the controller’s password has been set,
regardless of whether the front panel, the RS-232C terminal interface
Terminal Operation
7-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or RAIDWatch Manager is used, you can only access the RAID
controller by providing the correct password.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
The controller verifies password when entering the main menu from the
initial screen or making configuration change. If the controller is going to
be left unattended, the “Password Validation Timeout” can be set to
“Always Check.” Setting validation timeout to “always check” will
protect the controller configuration from any unauthorized access.
The controller password and controller name share a 16-character space.
The maximum characters for the controller password is 15. When the
controller name occupies 15 characters, there is only one character left for
the controller password, and vice versa.
Changing the Password
To set or change the controller password, move the cursor bar to
“Change Password,” then press [ENTER].
If a password has previously been set, the controller will ask for the
old password first. If the password has not yet been set, the
controller will directly ask for the new password. The password can
not be replaced unless a correct old password is provided.
Key-in the old password, then press [ENTER]. If the password is
incorrect, it will not allow you to change the password. Instead, it
will display the message “Password incorrect!,” then go back to the
previous menu.
If the password is correct, or there is no preset password, it will ask
for the new password.
Setting a New Password
Enter the desired password in the column, then press [ENTER]. The
next dialog box will display “Re-Enter Password”. Enter the
password again to confirm and press [ENTER].
Infortrend
7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The new password will now become the controller’s password.
Providing the correct password is necessary when entering the main
menu from the initial screen.
Disabling the Password
To disable or delete the password, press [ENTER] in the empty
column that is used for entering a new password. The existing
password will be deleted. No password checking will occur when
entering the main menu or when making configuration change.
Reset Controller
To reset the controller without powering off the system, move the
cursor bar to “Reset Controller,” then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes
in the dialog box that follows, then press [ENTER]. The controller
will now reset as well as power-off or re-power-on.
Shutdown Controller
Before powering off the controller, unwritten data may still reside in
cache memory. Use the “Shutdown Controller” function to flush the
cache content. Move the cursor bar to “Shutdown Controller,” then
press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows, then
press [ENTER]. The controller will now flush the cache memory.
For "Controller Maintenance" functions, such as "Download
Firmware," please refer to Appendix C.
Terminal Operation
7-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.14 Controller Parameters
Controller Name
Choose “View and Edit Configuration Parameters,” “Controller
Parameters,” then press [ENTER]. The current name displays.
Press [ENTER]. Enter a name in the dialog box that prompts, then
press [ENTER].
LCD Title Display Controller Name
Choose “View and Edit Configuration Parameters,” “Controller
Parameters,” then press [ENTER]. Choose to display the embedded
controller logo or any given name on the LCD. Giving a specific
name to controller can give you the ease of identification if you have
multiple RAID systems remotely monitored.
Infortrend
7-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving NVRAM to Disks
You can choose to backup your controller-dependent configuration
information to disks. We recommend using this function to save
configuration information whenever a configuration change is
made. The information will be duplicated and distributed to all
logical configurations of drives.
At least a RAID configuration must exist for the controller to write
your configuration data onto it.
From the main menu, choose “system functions.” Use arrow keys to
scroll down and select “controller maintenance,” “save NVRAM to
disks,” then press [ENTER].
Choose Yes to confirm.
A prompt will inform you that NVRAM information has been
successfully saved.
Restore NVRAM from Disks
When you want to restore your NVRAM information from what you
previously saved onto disk, use this function to restore the
configuration information.
From the main menu, choose “system functions.” Use arrow keys to
scroll down and select “controller maintenance,” “restore NVRAM
from disks,” and then press [ENTER].
Terminal Operation
7-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press Yes to confirm.
A prompt will notify you that the controller NVRAM data has been
successfully restored from disks.
Password Validation Timeout
Choose “View and Edit Configuration parameters,” “Controller
Parameters,” then press [ENTER]. Select “Password Validation
Timeout,” and press [ENTER]. Choose to enable a validation
timeout from one minute to always check. The always check
timeout will disable any configuration change made without
entering the correct password.
Controller Unique Identifier
Enter any hex number between “0” and “FFFFF” for the unique
identifier. The value you enter MUST be different for each
controller.
The Controller Unique Identifier is required for configuring every
RAID controller. The controller automatically notifies users to enter
a unique identifier when the first logical drive is created in a dual-
controller system.
Infortrend
7-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enter a unique ID for any RAID controller no matter it is configured
in a single or dual-controller configuration. The unique ID is
necessary for the following:
1. A controller-specific identifier that helps controllers to identify
its counterpart in a dual-active configuration.
2. The unique ID is generated into a Fibre channel WWN node
name for controllers or RAID systems using Fibre channel host
ports. The node name is used to prevent host computers from
mis-addressing the storage system during the controller
failover/ failback processes.
3. MAC addresses for the controller’s Ethernet port that should be
taken over by a surviving controller in the event of controller
failure.
In redundant mode, configuration data is synchronized between
controllers. Host ports on both controllers appear with the same
node name but each with a different port name (WWPN).
When a controller fails and a replacement is combined as the
Secondary controller, the node name will be passed down to the
Secondary controller.
The host will not acknowledge any
differences so that controller failback is totally transparent.
The unique identifier setting can be accessed from "View and Edit
Configuration Parameters" → "Controller Parameters" → "Controller
Unique ID."
Terminal Operation
7-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set Controller Date and Time
This sub-menu only appears when the controller is equipped with a
real-time clock.
Time Zone
The controller uses GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), a 24-hours clock.
To change the clock to your local time zone, enter the hours later
than the Greenwich mean time following a plus (+) sign. For
example, enter “+9” for Japanese time zone.
Date and Time
Enter time and date in its numeric representatives in the following
order: month, day, hour, minute, and the year.
Infortrend
7-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.15 Drive Information
View Drive Information
From the “View and Edit SCSI Drives” menu, select the drive that
the utility is to performed on, then press [ENTER]. Select “View
drive information," then press [ENTER].
SCSI Drive Utilities
From the “View and Edit SCSI Drives” menu, select the drive that
the utility is to performed on, then press [ENTER]. Select “SCSI
Drive Utilities, then press [ENTER]. Choose either “SCSI Drive
Low-level Format” or “Read/ Write Test.”
Terminal Operation
7-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCSI Drive Low-level Format
Choose “SCSI Drive Low-level Format” and confirm by selecting
Yes.
IMPORTANT!
•
Do not switch the controller’s and/or SCSI disk drive’s power off during
the SCSI Drive Low-level Format. If any power failure occurs during the
formatting process, the formatting must be performed again when power
resumes.
•
All data stored in disk drives will be destroyed during the low-level
format.
•
The disk drive on which a low-level disk format will be performed cannot
be a spare drive (local or global) nor a member of a logical drive. The
"SCSI Drive Low-level Format" option will not appear if the drive is not
indicated as a "New Drive" or a "Used Drive." Also, a drive formatted
with a 256MB reserved space is also excluded from selection.
Infortrend
7-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCSI Drive Read/Write Test
From the “View and Edit SCSI Drives” menu, select a new or used
drive that the utility is to perform on; then press [ENTER]. Select
“SCSI Drive Utilities," then press [ENTER]. Choose “Read/ Write
Test” and press [ENTER]. You can choose to enable/ disable the
following options:
1. Auto Reassign Bad Block;
2. Abort When Error Occurs;
3. Drive Test for - Read Only/ Read and Write.
When finished with configuration, select "Execute Drive Testing"
and press [ENTER] to proceed.
The Read/ Write test progress will be indicated by a status bar.
You may press [ESC] and select "Read/ Write Test" later and choose
either to "View Read/ Write Testing Progress" or to "List Current
Bad Block Table." If you want to stop testing the drive, select
"Abort Drive Testing" and press [ENTER] to proceed.
Terminal Operation
7-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
8
Fibre Operation
8.1
Overview
This chapter describes the Fibre-specific functions available since
firmware release 3.21 and above. Optional functions have been
implemented for operations using Fibre channel and access control
under multiple-host environments such as Storage Area Network.
Users familiar with Fibre channel configurations, please jump to
section 8.5.
Summary:
8.2 Major Concerns:
Things you should know before proceeding with
configuration
8.3 Supported Features:
List of functionality supported by controller FC chips
8.4 Configuration Samples:
Configuration options for data bus setting and
system drive mapping
8.5 Configuration: Host and Drive Parameters
The configuration procedures for changing
parameters on FC host and drive channels
8.6 Multi-Host Access Control:
Learning how to setup the LUN Filtering function, a
useful tool for access control in multi-host
environments
Fibre Operation
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2
Major Concerns
Most of the configuration options in this chapter are directly related
to controller redundancy. Joining two controllers into a dual-active
pair can eliminate most possible points of failure. Configuring a
controller pair requires careful planning and proper setup and the
requirements can be summarized as follows:
!
Redundant Cache Coherency Channels (RCC):
1. RCC
FC channels can be manually assigned as
the dedicated communications loops, two
are recommended for path redundancy and
sufficient bandwidth.
2. Drive + RCC
Communications traffic distributed over
drive loops
!
!
Connection between Controllers:
Cabling between controllers, hardware link through a
common backplane, Fibre hub or switch (for SAN
applications and for those models that do not have by-
pass chips)
Channel Mode Assignment
According to the topological plan, your I/ O channels
can be designated as:
•
•
•
•
Host
RCC paths
Drive
Drive + RCC
!
Host Channel Connection Type:
This depends on the way your RAID system is
connected to the host computer(s). The host
connection type can be:
•
•
FC-AL
Fabric (point-to-point)
!
!
Controller Unique ID:
This ID will be used to generate Fibre ports’ node
names, and is necessary for addressing the controller
during the controller failover/ failback operation.
Dual-Loop:
1. Drive-side dual loop provides data path
redundancy. Firmware is capable of executing a
load-sharing algorithm to optimize dual-loop
8-2
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
performance.
2. Host–side dual loop is passively supported and
requires the support of multi-path software on the
host computer.
Fibre Operation
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.3
Supported Features
Fibre Chip
1Gbit Fibre Channel:
Fibre loops (1 Gbit FC-AL) comply with the following standards:
1. (FC-PH) X2.230:1994,
2. (SCSI-FCP) X3.269:1996,
3. (FC-AL-2) Project 1133-D rev.6.5,
4. (SCSI-2) X3.131-1994,
5. Supporting sustained 1 Gigabit/ sec (100MB/ sec) transfer rates.
6. Each Fibre loop can be independently configured for the
connection to host or drive.
2Gbit Fibre Channel:
1. Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL-2) working draft, rev 6.4
2. Fibre Channel Fabric Loop Attach (FC-FLA) working draft, rev
2.7
3. Fibre Channel Private Loop SCSI Direct Attach (FC-PLDA)
working draft, rev 2.1
4. Fibre Channel Tape (FC-TAPE) profile, T11/ 98-124vD, rev 1.13
5. Support Fibre Channel protocol-SCSI (FCP-SCSI)
6. Support Fibre Channel Internet protocol (IP)
Multiple Target IDs:
Each 2Gbit channel configured as a host loop supports multiple
target IDs in the range of 0 to 125.
8-4
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drive IDs:
Supported ways to address a Fibre port include Hard assigned and
Soft assigned.
The controller supports automatic loop ID
assignment on drive channels. A hard loop address ID can be
assigned to disk drives by enclosure jumper setting. If the AL_PA
configuration on drive enclosure has been set to a neutral status,
physical IDs will be automatically assigned to drives.
In-band Fibre and S.E.S. Support:
"SCSI Pass-through" commands are supported over host and drive
loops just as they are over SCSI channels. The "in-band Fibre"
protocol
for
packaging
"External
Interface"
protocol
commands/ responses is supported over host Fibre loops (such as
the RAIDWatch Manager). Drive-side S.E.S. device identification,
monitoring and control are likewise supported over drive loops.
Fibre Operation
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.4 Configuration: Host and Drive
Parameters
Channel Mode:
All Fibre channels can be changed to operate as “Host,” “Drive,”
“RCCOM,” or “Drive + RCCOM”. Choose the channel you wish to
change its mode, then press [ENTER]. Choose “Channel Mode,”
then press [ENTER]. A dialog box will appear asking you to
confirm the change.
Primary and Secondary Controller IDs:
Select a channel by highlighting its status bar and press [ENTER].
Each drive channel should be assigned with both a "Primary
Controller ID" and a "Secondary Controller ID." The factory defaults
for the primary and secondary IDs on drive loops are “119” and
“120”.
Drive Channel
Host Channel
Create host IDs on each specific host channel. Host IDs are
designated as the “Primary controller” or “Secondary controller”
IDs.
8-6
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limitation:
1. If host connection is made in FC-AL mode, there can be a total
of “16” of Primary and Secondary IDs.
2. Although host connection in point-to-point mode is supported,
problems might occur when passing IDs of the failed controller
to its counterpart. HA failover software is required in this
situation to redirect IO access during the controller failover
operation.
Redundant Controller Cache Coherency Channel
(RCC Channel):
A host channel can be selected and converted into a communications
channel. To convert a drive channel, change it into host mode and
then select "RCCOM." Details can be found in the proceeding
discussions.
View Channel WWN
Port name is the unique eight-byte address assigned to a FC port.
The controller has multiple channels (I/ O paths) and each channel is
powered by an I/ O processor. This function allows users to inspect
the processor's node name and port name. Some management
software running on host computers need these names to properly
address a storage subsystem.
Fibre Operation
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
View Device Port Name List (WWPN)
This function displays device port names (host adapter ID) detected
on a host loop. Device port names will be listed here except that of
the controller's I/ O processor.
The HBA port names detected can be added to the "Host-ID WWN
name list" in "View and Edit Host LUN" menu. Adding port names
to list can speed the mapping process that follows.
Each port name should then be assigned a nickname for ease of
identification. This is especially the case when multiple filtering
entries must be defined for granting or denying access to a specific
storage unit. See the following sections for more details.
View and Edit Fibre Drive
Choose "View and Edit SCSI Drives" on the main menu and use the
arrow keys to move the cursor bar through connected drives. Press
[ENTER] to choose a drive, or [ESC] to return to the previous
menu/ screen.
User-Assigned ID (Scan SCSI Drive)
Select "Scan SCSI drive" to assign an ID to drive.
8-8
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A drive enclosure usually has drive slots pre-assigned with specific
IDs. There are occasions when an ID needs to be assigned manually
to a device other than an ID provided otherwise. The "set slot
number" and the "add drive entry" functions are reserved for
Infortrend's Fault-bus operation.
View Drive Information
If the selected drive belongs to a drive group that is configured in a
dual-loop, the "Redundant Loop ID" will be displayed here.
View and Edit Host-Side Parameters
Fibre Operation
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Fibre Channel Connection Type:
Use the ↑ ↓ keys to scroll down to “View and Edit Configuration
Parameters,” "Host-side SCSI Parameters," and then "Fibre
Connection Option." A prompt will display all the options. Select
one appropriate for your Fibre channel topology. If connection to
host is through a Fibre hub, choose "Loop only."
If connection to host is through a Fibre switch F_Port or directly to a
server, choose "Point to point only." Proper selection is necessary
and will decrease overhead on data transmission.
A redundant controller configuration should always have its host
connection configured in FC-AL mode. For a switched fabric
configuration, a redundant controller system can be connected to the
FL_ports on an FC switch and then the host computers connect to its
F_ports.
View and Edit Drive-Side Parameters
2. Drive-Side Dual Loop:
Fibre drives are usually configured in a JBOD enclosure. Through
the enclosure backplane, these drives form one or two circuit loops.
You may choose to assemble certain number of disk drives into a
dual-loop configuration using two of the controller channels.
To configure a dual-loop, connect two of the drive channels each to
an FC-AL port on the drive enclosure (JBOD). Please refer to the
related documents that came with your drive enclosure for the
connection details.
The dual-loop configuration not only doubles traffic bandwidth by
separating the transmitting and receiving paths but also provides
path redundancy. I/ O traffic will be continued should one data
path fail.
8-10
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controller firmware automatically examines the node names and
port names of all the connected drives once initiated. If devices on
two different drive channels appear with the same loop ID and port
name, controller will consider these two drive channels as a "dual
loop."
The dual loop configuration will be displayed as "channel <pair
channel>." For example, channel numbers are displayed as 2<3>
and 3<2> if channel 2 and channel 3 are configured as a dual loop.
The data bus will be operating at the bandwidth of up to 200MB/ sec
(1Gbit Fibre).
Controller Unique Identifier
A Controller Unique Identifier is required for operation with the
Redundant Controller Configuration.
The controller will
automatically notify users to enter a unique identifier when the first
logical drive is being created in a dual-controller system.
The unique identifier will be used to generate a Fibre channel "node
name" (WWNN). The node name is device-unique and comprised
of information such as the IEEE company ID and this user-
configurable identifier in the last two bytes.
In redundant mode, the controller configuration data is
continuously synchronized between controllers. Host ports on both
controllers appear with the identical node names and each with a
different port name (WWPN). When a controller fails and a
replacement is combined, the node name will be passed down to the
Fibre Operation
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
replacement, making the host unaware of controller replacement so
that controller failback is totally transparent.
Choose “View and Edit Peripheral Devices,” “Set Peripheral Device
Entry," then enable the "Redundant Controller" configuration. You
will be requested to enter a value for the “Controller Unique
Identifier.” For firmware release 3.25 and above, enter a hex
number between 0 and FFFFF. The identifier selection box will
prompt automatically. The value you enter MUST be different for
each controller.
The unique identifier can also be accessed from "View and Edit
Configuration Parameters" → "Controller Parameters" → "Controller
Unique ID."
Controller Communications over Fibre Loops
Controllers running firmware version 3.14 and above supports
controller communications over Fibre loops.
There are two options with the controller communications over
Fibre loops. Hardware configuration should be completed before
firmware setting.
1. Select from the main menu "View and Edit SCSI channels,"
and configure the selected FC channels into "RCCOM
(Redundant Controller Communication)" mode. To ensure
the connection with data path redundancy, you may use
two channels as the dedicated RCC loops. The dedicated
channels should not be attached with any other device.
8-12
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Communications Traffic Distributed over All Drive
Loops: Select all drive loops and configure them as "Drive
+
RCCOM (Drive Loops plus Redundant Controller
Communications)." The communications traffic between
the two controllers will be automatically distributed over
all drive loops.
!
!
As displayed above, channel(s) selected as the
communications paths will be displayed as "channel
number (C: connected)" or "channel number (D:
disconnected)." If channels configured in a dual-loop are
selected, channel status will be displayed as "channel
number (pair loop; C or D)."
If any of the communications loops should fail, the inter-
controller traffic will be automatically shifted to the
remaining Drive/ RCC loop(s).
Fibre Operation
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.5
Multi-Host Access Control: LUN
Filtering
RAID-based mapping provides access control over a Storage Area
Network where:
1. Servers may share common storage;
2. File integrity becomes a problem and access contentions
might occur;
3. File access must be coordinated among multiple servers.
Figure 8 - 1 Storage Pool
RAID Storage
Host A
LUN0
LUN1
Host B
Host C
LUN2
SAN
LUN3
Host D
LUN4
Host E
LUN5
Storage Pool
RAID-based mapping provides the centralized management for
host-storage access. It is derived from the concept that storage can
be divided into manageable pieces by mapping storage units to
different Logical Unit Numbers (LUNs). The storage can then be
managed in the context of a LUN map. We then append filtering
mask(s) to the LUNs making specific storage unit accessible or
inaccessible to one or multiple host adapters (HBAs).
8-14
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 8 - 2 Host-LUN Mapping
Creating LUN Masks
User can configure the storage subsystem to appear as 32 LUNs per
Fibre target ID. Each LUN can be mapped with a storage unit -a
partition or the entire logical drive. The configuration of logical
units depends on host applications and how many drives and drive
channels have been employed in the storage system.
The diagram below shows the idea of the virtual connection and the
physical connection from host computers to drives. There can be
many host computers connected across a storage network and a
system administrator may want to make each storage unit available
for certain host systems while forbidden for some others.
Figure 8 - 3 LUN Mask
The access control can also be implemented by filter drivers.
However, comparing to the control by software, access control based
on controller LUN mapping can avoid overheads on server and the
additional I/ O latency.
The LUN map combines Host ID (in the Fibre case, a 64-bit "port
name;" in the SCSI case, the initiator ID) with the list of attributes of
a LUN map that originally only consisted of the channel, target ID,
and the LUN number.
Fibre Operation
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To create LUN masks, select "View and Edit Host LUNs" from the
Main Menu, then select a host data path (channel-ID combination).
In active-to-active mode, selecting a host channel means selecting
either the Primary or the Secondary controller I/ O path.
WWN Name List
Before mapping host LUNs, you may add host adapter port names
to a WWN name list to combine with a nickname given to each
adapter. Names will be recorded in controller NVRAM.
A named adapter (by location or the nature of host applications) can
be easily identified and later combined with filtering masks.
8-16
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Logical Unit to Host LUN Mapping
Assign Logical Unit Numbers (LUNs) to logical units (logical
drives/ logical volumes/ logical partitions). Select a host channel/ ID
and then select a LUN number. Select a Host LUN and associate a
logical unit with it.
When a logical unit is selected, you may choose to "Map Host LUN"
or "Create Host Filter Entry." If you select to map the logical unit
directly to a host LUN without LUN masking, the particular logical
unit will be accessible for all host computers connected through the
network.
If you want the logical unit to be accessible for some host computers
while inaccessible for some others, choose "Create Host Filter Entry."
Fibre Operation
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More than one filter entry can be appended to a host LUN to
compose a more complex mapping scheme. LUN map is port name-
oriented. You can choose to "Add from current device list" or
"Manual(ly) add host filter entry."
Pressing [ENTER] on "Add from current device list" will bring forth
a list of port names detected on host loops. If you have a name list
pre-configured, port names will appear with its nicknames. Select a
port name by pressing [ENTER].
Choose Yes to proceed.
The next step is to edit Host ID/ WWN Mask. Move cursor bar
through the menu items and press ENTER on the "Host ID/ WWN
Mask."
8-18
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUN Mask (ID Range) Configuration:
Ranges can be established by combining a basis ID with a mask
similar to the way routing table entries are set up on a LAN/ WAN.
If the port name ID "AND'ed" with the mask equals the basis ID
AND'ed with the mask, then the port name ID is considered to fall
within the range. If a default value "0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFF" is selected,
then the port name ID must match the basis ID for the port name to
be considered to fall within the range. "0x" means that all values are
presented in hexadecimal.
If, for instance,
a
value
"0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" is selected, and the basic ID is
"0x11111111111111," port name IDs ranging from "0x….1110" to
"0x….1113" will fall in the ID range.
As the general rule, a host HBA's port name can be used as the basic
ID. If a host adapter's port name is used as the basic ID and the
default mask value, "0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFF," is applied, the host will
fall exactly within the ID range for the port name ID AND'ed with
mask equals the basic ID AND'ed with mask.
Filter Type: Include or Exclude
Filter entry can serve both ends: to include or exclude certain
adapters from data access.
Include: If a node's (a workstation or a server) WWN falls in an ID
range specified as "Include," the node will be allowed to access the
storage capacity mapped to the associated LUN. The access mode
can be "read only" or "read/ write."
Exclude: If a node's WWN falls in an ID range specified as
"Exclude," the node will not be allowed to access the storage
capacity mapped with this entry.
Multiple ranges, or filter entries, can be established for a single
channel, target-ID, and LUN combination. Each range can have its
own Exclude/ Include attributes. The rules for determining whether
a particular ID is considered as "included" or "excluded" are listed
below:
1. If an ID falls within one or more Include ranges and does not fall
in any Exclude range, then it is included.
2. If an ID falls within ANY Exclude range no matter if it also falls
in another Include range, then it is excluded.
3. If the ID falls in none of the ranges and there is at least one
Include range specified, then the ID should be considered as
excluded.
4. If the ID falls in none of the ranges and only Exclude ranges are
specified, then the ID is considered as included.
Fibre Operation
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Access Mode: Read Only or Read/Write
A particular extended LUN map can be setup with an attribute of
"Read Only" in the event that certain hosts may need to read the
data on the media but must not be allowed to change it. In the
degenerate case (range only includes a single ID), different hosts can
be mapped with completely different logical drives/ logical
volumes/ logical partitions even when they address the same
channel, target-ID, and LUN.
When completed with configuring LUN mask, press [ESC] to map a
logical unit to LUN.
Multiple filter entries can be created for
a
Host ID/ LUN
combination, select the Host LUN again to enter the editing menu.
You may continue to add more entries, to delete or edit the existing
entries.
Sample Configuration:
Figure 8 - 4 LUN Filtering - Configuration Sample
8-20
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Host HBA port name (WWPN) list:
Host A = 0x…F111
Host B = 0x…F112
Host C = 0x…F222
2. Controller Configuration:
•
Logical drives are LD0 and LD1. LD0 is partitioned into two:
P0 and P1.
•
Filter Entry (LUN map) list
Configuration Procedure:
1. Create an entry list for the specific logical unit from "View and
Edit Host LUN"\ Host Channel\ Create Host Filter Entry."
2. Select Host Channel ID, and then select a configured logical unit
(a logical drive, logical volume, or one of its logical partitions) to
create the entry. The entry submenu will appear.
3. Enter and modify the Host ID, Host ID Mask, Filter Type, and
Access Mode.
The exemplary entry list is shown below. Please refer to the
diagram above:
Entry 1: "LD0-P0, ID=0x…F111, Mask=0x…FFFE, Filter Type =
Include, Access Mode = Read/ Write." It means Host A
and B can read/ write P0 of LD0.
Entry 2: "LD0-P1, ID=0x…F222, Mask=0x…FFFF, Filter Type =
Exclude, Access Mode = Read/ Write." It means Host A
and B can read/ write P1 of LD0, but this partition is
inaccessible for Host C.
Fibre Operation
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entry 3: "LD1-P0, ID=0x…F111, Mask=0x…FFFE, Filter Type =
Include, Access Mode = Read Only." It means P0 of LD1 is
'Read Only ' for Host A and B.
Entry 4: "LD1-P0, ID=0x…F222, Mask=0x…FFFF, Filter Type =
Include, Access Mode = Read/ Write." It means Host C
can read/ write P0 of LD1.
8-22
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
9
Advanced Configurations
This chapter aims to discuss the advanced options for configuring
and maintaining a RAID system. Each function will be given a brief
explanation as well as a configuration sample. Terminal screens will
be used in the configuration samples. Some of the operations
require basic knowledge of RAID technology and the practice of
them is only recommended for an experienced user.
9.1
Fault Prevention
S.M.A.R.T.
With the maturity of technologies like S.M.A.R.T., drive failures can
be predictable to a certain degree. Before S.M.A.R.T., being
recurrently notified of drive bad block reassignments may be the
most common omen for a drive about to fail. In addition to the
S.M.A.R.T.-related functions as will be discussed later in this section,
a system administrator can also choose to manually perform “Clone
Failing Drive” to a drive which is about to fail.
System
administrators can decide when to replace a drive showing
symptoms of defects by a healthy drive. A system administrator
may also replace any drive at will even when the source drive is
healthy.
The “Clone Failing Drive” can be performed under the following
conditions:
1. Replacing a failing drive either detected by S.M.A.R.T. or notified
by the controller.
2. Manually replacing and cloning any drive with a new drive.
Advanced Configurations
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.1.1 Clone Failing Drive:
Unlike the similar functions combined with S.M.A.R.T., the “Clone
Failing Drive” is a manual function. There are two options for
cloning a failing drive: “Replace after Clone” and “Perpetual
Clone.”
Replace after Clone:
Data on the source drive, the drive with predicted error (or any
selected member drive), will be cloned to a standby spare and
replaced later by the spare. The status of the replaced drive, the
original member drive with predicted error, will be redefined as an
“used drive.” System administrators may replace the used drive
with a new one, and then configure the new drive as a spare drive.
Locate the logical drive to which the specific member drive with
predictable errors belongs. Select the “clone failing drive” function.
Select “Replace After Clone.” The controller will automatically start
the cloning process using the existing “stand-by” (dedicated/ global
spare drive) to clone the source drive (the target member drive with
predicted errors). If there is no standby drive (local/ global spare
drive), you need to add a new drive and configure it as a standby
drive.
The cloning process will begin with a notification message. Press
[ESC] to proceed.
Advanced Configurations
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cloning process will be indicated by a status bar.
You may also quit the status bar by pressing [ESC] to return to the
table of the connected drives. Select the drive indicated as
“CLONING” by pressing [ENTER].
Select “clone Failing drive” again to view the current status. You
may identify the source drive and choose to “view clone progress,”
or “abort clone” if you happen to have selected the wrong drive.
When the process is completed, users will be notified by the
following message.
Perpetual Clone:
The standby spare will clone the source drive, member drive with
predicted errors or any selected drive, without substituting it. The
status of the spare drive will be displayed as “clone drive” after the
cloning process. The source drive will remain a member of the
logical drive.
In “View and Edit SCSI drives,” locate the member drive with
predicted errors.
“Perpetual Clone.”
Select “clone Failing drive,” and choose
The controller will automatically start the cloning process using the
existing “stand-by” (local/ global spare drive) to clone the source
drive (the target member drive).
Infortrend
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cloning process will begin with a notification message:
Press [ESC] to view the current progress:
You may also quit viewing the status bar by pressing [ESC] to
return to the previous menu. Select the drive indicated as
“CLONING” by pressing [ENTER]. Select “Clone Failing Drive”
again to view the progress. You may identify the source drive and
choose to “View clone progress” or “Abort clone” if you happen to
have selected the wrong drive.
The cloning progress will be completed by a notification message as
displayed below:
You may press [ESC] to clear the notification message to see the
SCSI drives’ status after the cloning process. The source drive
(Channel 1 ID 5) remains as a member of logical drive “0,” and the
“stand-by” drive (Channel 1 ID 2, the dedicated/ global spare drive)
has become a “CLONE” drive.
Advanced Configurations
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.1.2 S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis
and Reporting Technology )
This section provides a brief introduction to S.M.A.R.T. as one way
to predict drive failure and Infortrend’s implementations with
S.M.A.R.T. for preventing data loss caused by drive failure.
A. Introduction
Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.) is
an emerging technology that provides near-term failure prediction
for disk drives. When S.M.A.R.T. is enabled, the drive monitors
predetermined drive attributes that are susceptible to degradation
over time.
If a failure is likely to occur, S.M.A.R.T. makes a status report
available so that the host can prompt the user to back up data on the
failing drive. However, not all failures can be predicted. S.M.A.R.T.
predictability is limited to the attributes the drive can monitor which
are selected by the device manufacturer based on the attribute’s
ability to contribute to the prediction of degrading or fault
conditions.
Although attributes are drive specific,
characteristics can be identified:
a
variety of typical
• head flying height
• data throughput performance
• spin-up time
• re-allocated sector count
• seek error rate
• seek time performance
• spin try recount
• drive calibration retry count
Drives with reliability prediction capability only communicate a
reliability condition as either good or failing. In SCSI
a
environment, the failure decision occurs at the disk drive, and the
host notifies the user for action. The SCSI specification provides a
sense bit to be flagged if the disk drive determines that a reliability
issue exists. The system then alerts the user/ system administrator.
B. Infortrend's Implementations with S.M.A.R.T.
Infortrend is using ANSI-SCSI Informational Exception Control
(IEC) document X3T10/ 94-190 standard.
Infortrend
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are four selections related to the S.M.A.R.T. functions in
firmware:
Disable:
Disable S.M.A.R.T.-related functions
Detect Only:
S.M.A.R.T. function enabled, controller will send command to
enable all drives' S.M.A.R.T. function, if a drive predicts a problem,
controller will report the problem in the form of an event log.
Perpetual Clone:
S.M.A.R.T. function enabled, controller will send command to
enable all drives' S.M.A.R.T. function. If a drive predicts a problem,
controller will report in the form of an event log. Controller will
clone the drive if there is a Dedicated/ Global spare available. The
drive with predicted errors will not be taken off-line, and the clone
drive will still behave as a standby drive.
If the drive with predicted errors fails, the clone drive will take over
immediately. Under the circumstance that the problematic drive is
still working and another drive in the same logical drive should fail,
the clone drive will resume the role of a standby spare and start to
rebuild the failed drive immediately. This is to prevent a fatal drive
error if yet another drive should fail.
Clone + Replace:
Controller will enable all drives' S.M.A.R.T. function. If a drive
predicts a problem, controller will report in the form of event log.
Controller will then clone the problematic drive to a standby spare
and take the problematic drive off-line as soon as the cloning
process is completed.
NOTE:
•
If you are using drives of different brands in your RAID system, as long as
they are ANSI-SCSI Informational Exception Control (IEC) document
X3T10/94-190 compatible, it should not be an issue working with the
controller.
Advanced Configurations
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Procedure
Enabling the S.M.A.R.T. Feature
Follow the procedure below to enable S.M.A.R.T. on all drives.
1. First, enable the “Periodic Drive Check Time” function. In
\ View and Edit Configuration Parameters\ Drive-side SCSI
Parameters\ Periodic Drive Check Time, choose a time interval.
2. In \ View and Edit Configuration Parameters\ Drive-side SCSI
Parameters\ Drive Predictable Failure Mode <SMART>, choose one
from “Detect Only,” “Detect, Perpetual Clone” and “Detect,
Clone+Replace.”
Examining Whether Your Drives Support S.M.A.R.T.
To see if your drive supports S.M.A.R.T., follow the steps below:
3. Enable “S.M.A.R.T.” for your drives in the RAID system.
4. In “View and Edit SCSI Drives,” choose one drive to test to.
Press [ENTER] on the drive, a sub-menu will appear.
5. Note that a new item “Predictable Failure Test” appears in the
sub-menu. If the SMART” feature is not properly enabled, this item
will not appear in the sub-menu.
Infortrend
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Choose “Predictable Failure Test,” the controller will force the
drive to simulate predictable drive errors.
7. Press [ENTER], and after a while (the next time the controller
performs “Periodic Drive Check”), the controller will detect the
errors simulated by the drive. An error message displays like this:
“[1142] SMART-CH:? ID:? Predictable Failure Detected (TEST).” If
this error message appears, it means your drive supports S.M.A.R.T.
features.
8. Otherwise, you may simply refer to related documentation or
contact drive manufacturer for information about whether the drive
model and drive firmware version support S.M.A.R.T..
Using S.M.A.R.T. Functions
1. Enable “SMART” on the RAID controller.
2. Make sure your drives do support S.M.A.R.T. so that your
system will work fitly.
3. The “Detect Only” Setting:
3a. In \ View and Edit Configuration Parameters\ Drive-side SCSI
Parameters\ Drive Predictable Failure Mode <SMART>, choose
“Detect Only.”
Advanced Configurations
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3b. Whenever a drive predicts symptoms of predictable drive
failure, controller will issue an error message.
4. The “Detect, Perpetual Clone” Setting:
4a. In \ View and Edit Configuration Parameters\ Drive-side SCSI
Parameters\ Drive Predictable Failure Mode <SMART>, choose
“Detect, Perpetual Clone.”
4b. You should have at least one spare drive for the logical drive
(either Local Spare or Global Spare Drive).
4c. When a drive (logical drive member) detects the predictable
drive errors, the controller will “clone” the drive with a spare drive.
You may enter the "View and Edit SCSI Drive" menu and click on
the spare drive (either a local or a global one). Choose from the
menu items if you want to know about the status of the source drive,
the cloning progress, or to abort cloning.
NOTE:
•
With the precaution of untimely drive failure of yet another drive, when
configured as “perpetual clone,” the spare drive will only stay mirrored to
the source drive (the drive with signs of failure), but not replacing it until
the source drive actually fails.
4d. When the spare drive is mirroring the source drive, any
occurrence of drive failure (when there is no other spare drives) will
force the spare drive to give up the mirrored data and resume its
Infortrend
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
original role – it will become a spare drive again and start rebuilding
the failed drive.
5. The “Detect, Clone+Replace” Function:
5a. In \ View and Edit Configuration Parameters\ Drive-side SCSI
Parameters\ Drive Predictable Failure Mode <SMART>, choose
“Detect, Clone+Replace.”
5b. Make sure you have at least one spare drive to the logical drive.
(Either Local Spare Drive or Global Spare Drive)
5c. When a drive (a logical drive member) detects the predictable
drive failure, the controller will “clone” the drive with a spare drive.
After the “clone” process is finished, it will replace the source drive
immediately. The source drive will be stated as a used drive.
If you want to see the progress of cloning, press [ESC] to clear the
notification message and see the status bar.
The source drive’s status will be defined as an “Used drive” and will
be immediately replaced and pulled off-line. This drive should be
replaced with a new one as soon as possible.
Advanced Configurations
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 Host-side and Drive-side SCSI
Parameters
Foreword: SCSI Channel, SCSI ID and LUN
A SCSI channel (SCSI bus) can connect up to 15 devices (not
including the SCSI controller itself) when the Wide
Figure 9 - 1 SCSI ID/LUNs
function is enabled (16-bit SCSI). It can connect up to 7 devices
(not including the controller itself) when the Wide function is
disabled (8-bit SCSI). Each device has one unique SCSI ID. Two
devices owning the same SCSI ID is not allowed.
The figure on the left is a good example. If you are to file
document into a cabinet, you must put the document into one of
the drawers. From a SCSI’s point of view, a SCSI ID is like a
cabinet, and the drawers are the LUNs. Each SCSI ID can have
up to 32 LUNs (Logical Unit). Data can be stored into one of the
LUNs of the SCSI ID. Most SCSI host adapters treat an LUN like
another SCSI device.
The same holds true for a Fibre channel host interface. 32 LUN’s are
supported with each host ID.
9.2.1 Host-side SCSI Parameters
Maximum Concurrent Host LUN Connection (“Nexus” in
SCSI):
The configuration option adjusts the internal resources for use with
a number of current host nexus. If there are four host computers (A,
B, C, and D) accessing the array through four host IDs/ LUNs (ID 0,
1, 2 and 3), host A through ID 0 (one nexus), host B through ID 1
(one nexus), host C through ID 2 (one nexus) and host D through ID
3 (one nexus) - all queued in the cache - that is called 4 nexus. If
there are I/ Os in the cache through 4 different nexus, and another
host I/ O comes down with a nexus different than the four in the
cache (for example, host A access ID 3), controller will return
"busy.” Mind that it is "concurrent" nexus, if the cache is cleared up,
it will accept four different nexus again. Many I/ Os can be accessed
via the same nexus.
Infortrend
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the main menu, select “View and Edit Configuration
Parameters,” “Host-side SCSI Parameters,” then press [ENTER].
Choose “Max Number of Concurrent Host-LUN Connection,” then
press [ENTER]. A list of available selections will appear. Move
cursor bar to an item, then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog
box that follows to confirm your setting. The default setting is “4.”
Number of Tags Reserved for each Host-LUN
Connection:
Each "nexus" has "32" (the default setting) tags reserved. When the
host computer sends 8 of I/ O tags to the controller, and the
controller is too busy to process all, the host might start to send less
than 8 tags during every certain period of time since then. This
setting ensures that the controller will accept at least 32 tags per
nexus. The controller will be able to accept more than that as long as
the controller internal resources allow - if the controller does not
have enough resources, at least 32 tags can be accepted per nexus.
Choose “Host-side SCSI Parameters,” then press [ENTER]. Choose
“Number of Tags Reserved for each Host-LUN Connection,” then
press [ENTER]. A list of available selections will appear. Move
cursor bar to an item, then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog
box that follows to confirm the setting.
Advanced Configurations
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Queued I/O Count:
This function allows you to configure the maximum number of I/ O
queue the controller can accept from the host computer.
Choose “Host-side SCSI Parameters,” then press [ENTER]. Choose
“Maximum Queued I/ O Count,” then press [ENTER]. A list of
available selections will appear. Move cursor bar to an item, then
press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to
confirm the setting.
The controller supports the following Host-side SCSI configurations:
“Maximum Queued I/ O Count,” “LUNs per Host SCSI ID,” “Num
of Host-LUN Connect,” “Tag per Host-LUN Connect,” “Peripheral
Dev Type Parameters,” and “Cyl/ Head/ Sector Mapping Config.”
LUNs per Host SCSI ID
Choose “LUNs per Host SCSI ID,” then press [ENTER]. A list of
selections will appear. Move cursor bar to an item, then press
[ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the
setting.
LUN Applicability:
If no logical drive has been created and mapped to a host LUN, and
the RAID controller is the only device connecting to the host SCSI
card, usually the operating system will not load the driver for the
Infortrend
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
host adapter. If the driver is not loaded, the host computer will not
be able to use the in-band utility to communicate with the RAID
controller. This is often the case when users want to start
configuring a RAID using management software from the host. It
will be necessary to configure the "Peripheral Device Type" setting
for the host to communicate with the controller. If the "LUN-0's
only" is selected, only LUN-0 of the host ID will appear as a device
with the user-defined peripheral device type. If "all undefined
LUNs" is selected, each LUN in that host ID will appear as a device
with the user-defined peripheral device type.
Different "LUN applicability" selections are available: “Device
Type” selection, “Device Qualifier Support,” “Support Removable
media,” "LUN-0's only," and "All undefined LUNs." Please refer to
the table of peripheral device setting for details concerning various
operating systems.
Peripheral Device Type:
For connection without a preset logical unit to a host, the in-band
SCSI protocol can be used for the host to “see” the RAID controller.
Please refer to the reference table below. You will need to make
adjustments in the following submenu: Peripheral Device Type,
Peripheral Device Qualifier, Device Support for Removable Media,
and LUN Application.
In-band (SCSI or Fibre):
What is In-band?
External devices require communication with the host computer for
device monitoring and administration. In addition to the regular
RS-232, in-band SCSI can serve as an alternative means of
management communication. In-band SCSI translates the original
configuration commands into standard SCSI commands. These
SCSI commands are then sent to and received by the controller over
the existing host link, be it SCSI or Fibre.
Advanced Configurations
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peripheral Device Type Parameters for Various
Operating Systems:
A host can not “see” a RAID controller UNLESS a logical unit has
been created and mapped to host LUN via the RS-232/ front panel
interface; or that the "in-band SCSI" connection with the host is
established. If users want to start configuring a RAID system from
the host before any RAID configuration is made, the host will not be
able to “see” the RAID controller. In order for a host to “see” the
controller, it will be necessary to define the controller as a peripheral
device.
Different host operating systems require different adjustments.
Look at the table below to find the proper settings for your host
operating system. References to “Peripheral Device Qualifier” and
“Device Support for Removable Media” are also included.
Table 9 - 1 Peripheral Device Type Parameters
Operating System
Peripheral
Device Type Device
Qualifier
Peripheral
Device Support LUN Applicability
for Removable
Media
Windows NT® 4.0
0x1f
0x03
connected
connected
disabled
disabled
All Undefined
LUNs
All Undefined
LUNs
NetWare®
4.x/Windows 2000
SCO OpenServer
5.0x
SCO
UnixWare 2.1x,
UnixWare 7
Solaris™ 2.5.x/2.6
(x86 and SPARC)
0x7f
0x03
connected
connected
either is okay
either is okay
All Undefined
LUNs
All Undefined
LUNs
0x7f
0x03
connected
connected
either is okay
enabled
All Undefined
LUNs
Linux
All Undefined
LUNs
Infortrend
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 9 - 2 Peripheral Device Type Settings:
Device Type
Setting
No Device Present
Direct-access Device
Sequential-access Device
Processor Type
0x7f
0
1
3
CD-ROM Device
5
Scanner Device
6
MO Device
7
Storage Array Controller Device
Unknown Device
0xC
0x1f
Cylinder/Head/Sector Mapping:
In the world of SCSI, drive capacity is decided by the number of
blocks. For some of the operating systems (Sun Solaris...etc.) the OS
will read the capacity based on the cylinder/ head/ sector count of
the drive. For Sun Solaris, the cylinder cannot exceed 65535, so user
can choose "cylinder<65535,” the controller will automatically adjust
the head/ sector count, then the OS can read the correct drive
capacity. Please refer to “Advanced Features” in Appendix B and
also to the related documents provided with your operating system.
Cylinder, Head, Sector counts are selectable from the menu. To
avoid the difficulties with Sun Solaris configuration, the values
listed below can be applied.
Table 9 - 3 Cylinder/Head/Sector Mapping under Sun
Solaris
Capacity
Cylinder
Head
Sector
< 64 GB
?
?
?
?
?
64
32
64 - 128 GB
128 – 256 GB
256 – 512 GB
512 GB - 1 TB
64
64
127
127
255
64
127
127
Older Solaris versions do not support drive capacity larger than 1
terabyte.
Advanced Configurations
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Sector Ranges/ Head Ranges/ Cylinder Ranges:
Selecting Sector Ranges
Selecting Head Ranges
Selecting Cylinder Ranges
Infortrend
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.2 Drive-side Parameters:
Choose “Drive-side SCSI Parameters,” then press [ENTER]. The
Drive-side SCSI parameters menu displays.
SCSI Motor Spin-Up
When power supply is unable to provide sufficient current to start
all the hard drives and controllers at once, spinning-up hard drives
in a sequence is one of the best ways to solve the problem of low
power-up current.
By default, all hard drives will start spinning up when powered-on.
These hard drives can be configured so that drives will not spin-up
at the same time when the enclosure is powered-on. There are 3
methods for spinning-up the hard drive’s motor: “Spin-up at power-
on,” “Spin-up serially at random sequence” or “Spin-up by SCSI
command.” Please refer to the hard drive’s documentation for
instructions on configuring the hard drive using the “Spin-up by
SCSI Command.” The procedure for each brand/ model of hard
drive may vary.
Configure all hard drives (usually by switching jumpers on hard
disks). Choose “SCSI Motor Spin-Up,” then press [ENTER].
Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting.
Advanced Configurations
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT!
•
If the drives are configured as “Delay Motor Spin-up” or “Motor Spin-up
in Random Sequence,” some of these drives may not be ready at the moment
when the controller accesses them when powered up. Increase the disk
access delay time so that the controller will wait a longer time for the drives
to be ready.
SCSI Reset at Power-Up
By default, when the controller is powered up, it will send a SCSI
bus reset command to the SCSI bus. When disabled, it will not send
a SCSI bus reset command on the next power-up.
When connecting more than one host computer to the same SCSI
bus, the SCSI bus reset will interrupt all the read/ write requests that
are being delivered. This may cause some operating systems or host
computers to act abnormally. Disable the “SCSI Reset at Power-up”
to avoid this situation.
Choose “SCSI Reset at Power-Up”, then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes
in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting.
Infortrend
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power off all hard drives and controller, and power them on again.
Hard drives will not spin-up all at once. The controller will spin-up
the hard drives one at a time at the interval of four seconds.
Disk Access Delay Time
Sets the delay time before the controller tries to access the hard
drives after power-on. Default is 15 seconds.
Choose “Disk Access Delay Time,” then press [ENTER]. A list of
selections displays. Move cursor bar to a selection, then press
[ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to confirm the
setting.
SCSI I/O Timeout
The “SCSI I/ O Timeout” is the time interval for the controller to
wait for a drive to respond. If the controller attempts to read data
from or write data to a drive but the drive does not respond within
the SCSI I/ O timeout value, the drive will be considered as a failed
drive.
When the drive itself detects a media error while reading from the
drive platter, it usually retries the previous reading or re-calibrates
the head. When the drive encounters a bad block on the media, it
reassigns the bad block onto a spare block. However, it takes time
to perform the above actions. The time to perform these operations
can vary between different brands and models of drives.
During SCSI bus arbitration, a device with higher priority can utilize
the bus first. A device with lower priority will sometimes receive a
SCSI I/ O timeout when devices of higher priority keep utilizing the
bus.
The default setting for “SCSI I/ O Timeout” is 7 seconds. It is highly
recommended not to change this setting. Setting the timeout to a
lower value will cause the controller to judge a drive as failed while
a drive is still retrying, or while a drive is unable to arbitrate the
SCSI bus. Setting the timeout to a greater value will cause the
Advanced Configurations
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
controller to keep waiting for a drive, and it may sometimes cause a
host timeout.
Choose “SCSI I/ O Timeout –Default (7 seconds),” then press
[ENTER]. A list of selections will appear. Move cursor bar to a
selection, then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog box that
follows to confirm the setting.
Maximum Tag Count (Tag Command Queuing)
The controller supports tag command queuing with an adjustable
maximum tag count from 1 to 128. The default setting is “Enabled”
with a maximum tag count of 32. Choose “Maximum Tag Count”,
then press [ENTER]. A list of available tag count numbers displays.
Move cursor bar to a number, then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in
the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
Every time you change this setting, you must reset the controller for the
changes to take effect.
Disabling Tag Command Queuing will disable hard drives’ built-in cache
for Write-Back operation.
Infortrend
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Detection of Drive Hot Swap Followed by Auto
Rebuild
Choose “Periodic Auto-Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time”;
then press [ENTER]. Move the cursor to the desired interval; then
press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in the dialog box that follows to
confirm the setting.
The controller scans drive buses at this interval to check if a failed
drive has been replaced. If a failed drive is replaced, the controller
will proceed with the rebuild process.
SAF-TE and S.E.S. Enclosure Monitoring
If there are remote devices in your RAID enclosure being monitored
via SAF-TE/ S.E.S., use this function to decide at what interval the
controller will check the status of these devices. Choose “Periodic
SAF-TE and SES Device Check Time”; then press [ENTER]. Move
the cursor to the desired interval; then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes
in the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting.
Periodic Drive Check Time
The “Periodic Drive Check Time” is the time interval for the
controller to check all disk drives that were on the SCSI bus at
controller startup (a list of all the drives that were detected can be
seen under “View and Edit SCSI Drives”).
The default value is “Disabled.” “Disabled” means that if a drive is
removed from the bus, the controller will not be able to know – so
Advanced Configurations
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
long as no host accesses that drive. Changing the check time to any
other value allows the controller to check – at the selected time
interval – all of the drives that are listed under “View and Edit SCSI
Drives.” If any drive is then removed, the controller will be able to
know – even if no host accesses that drive.
Idle Drive Failure Detection
Periodic Auto-Detect Failure Drive Swap Check Time
The “Drive-Swap Check Time” is the interval at which the controller
checks to see whether a failed drive has been swapped. When a
logical drive’s member drive fails, the controller will detect the
failed drive (at the selected time interval). Once the failed drive has
been swapped with a drive that has adequate capacity to rebuild the
logical drive, the rebuild will begin automatically.
The default setting is “Disabled,” meaning that the controller will
not Auto-Detect the swap of a failed drive. To enable this feature,
select a time interval.
Choose “Periodic Drive Check Time;” then press [ENTER]. Move
cursor to the desired interval; then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes in
the dialog box that follows to confirm the setting.
Infortrend
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
By choosing a time value to enable the "Periodic Drive Check Time,” the
controller will poll all connected drives through the controller’s drive
channels at the assigned interval. Drive removal will be detected even if a
host does not attempt to access data on the drive.
If the "Periodic Drive Check Time" is set to "Disabled" (the default setting is
"Disabled"), the controller will not be able to detect any drive removal that
occurs after the controller has been powered on. The controller will only be
able to detect drive removal when a host attempts to access data on that
drive.
Advanced Configurations
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.3
Monitoring and Safety Mechanisms
Dynamic Switch Write-Policy
Select “View and edit Configuration parameters” on the main menu
and press [ENTER]. Choose “Caching Parameters,” then press
[ENTER] again. The Caching Parameters menu displays.
To reduce the chance of data loss, Write-back caching can be
disabled by the controller upon the following conditions:
1. Controller failure
2. BBU low or Failed
3. UPS AC Power Loss
4. Power supply Failure
5. Fan Failure
6. Temperature Exceeds Threshold
Note the thresholds on temperature refer to those set for RAID
controller board temperature.
View Peripheral Device Status
Select “View and edit Peripheral Devices” on the main menu and
press [ENTER]. Choose “View Peripheral Device Status,” then
press [ENTER] again. The device list displays.
Below is a list of peripheral devices (enclosure modules) monitored
by the RAID controller unit. Monitoring of device status depends
on enclosure implementation and is accessed through different
2
interfaces, e.g., SAF-TE, S.E.S., or I C bus.
1. Device Type
2. Enclosure Descriptor
Infortrend
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Power Supply
4. Cooling Element
5. Temperature Sensors
6. Audible Alarm
7. Enclosure Services Controller Electronics
Select the device interface then select individual module to check its
status.
Controller Auto-Shutdown - Event Trigger Option
Select “View and edit Peripheral Devices” on the main menu and
press [ENTER]. Choose “Set Peripheral Device Entry” and “Event
Trigger Option” by pressing [ENTER]. The auto-shutdown option
displays.
Advanced Configurations
9-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select a configurable time span between the detection of exceeded
temperature and the controller’s commencing an automatic
shutdown.
9.4
Disk Array Parameters
Select “View and edit Configuration parameters” on the main menu
and press [ENTER]. Choose “Disk Array Parameters,” then press
[ENTER] again. The Disk Array Parameters menu will appear.
Rebuild Priority
Choose “Rebuild Priority,” then press [ENTER]. A list of the
priority selections (Low, Normal, Improved, or High) displays.
Move cursor bar to a selection, then press [ENTER].
Infortrend
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Verification on Writes
Errors may occur when a hard drive writes data. To avoid the write
error, the controller can force hard drives to verify written data.
There are three selectable methods:
!
!
!
Verification on LD Initialization Writes
Performs Verify-after-Write when initializing a logical drive
Verification on LD Rebuild Writes
Performs Verify-after-Write during rebuild process
Verification on LD Normal Drive Writes
Performs Verify-after-Write during normal I/ Os
Each method can be enabled or disabled individually. Hard drives
will perform Verify-after-Write according to the selected method.
Move cursor bar to the desired item, then press [ENTER].
Choose Yes in the confirm box to enable or disable the function.
Follow the same procedure to enable or disable each method.
IMPORTANT!
•
The “verification on Normal Drive Writes” method will affect the “write”
performance during normal use.
Advanced Configurations
9-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
10
Redundant Controller
10.1 Operation Theory
Sample topologies using redundant controllers can be found in the Hardware
Manual that came with your controller or subsystem. The proceeding
discussions will focus on the theories and the firmware configuration of a
redundant controller system.
Because I/ O interfaces have increasing demands on signal quality,
combining controllers using the cabling method may not all work well.
Depending on enclosure design, signal paths for communications may have
been strung between controllers over a common backplane. The controllers
or subsystems, like Infortrend’s EonStor series, may come with preset IDs
and channel mode that require no further configuration.
Users who are familiar with the practice of redundant controller
configuration, please jump to section "10.3 Configuration."
Redundant Controller
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.1.1 Setup Flowchart
Figure 10 - 1 Redundant Controller Configuration Flowchart
NOTE that some of Infortrend’s dual-controller configurations come with
pre-set IDs for users’ ease of configuration. It is, however, always best to
check these IDs before proceeding with configuration.
10.1.2 Considerations Related to Physical
Connection
SCSI-Based Controllers
Figure 10 - 1 Dual-Controller Using SCSI-Based Controllers
10-2
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The physical connection between redundant controllers should be similar
to the one shown above. The basic configuration rules are:
1. All channels should be connected to both controllers as diagrammed
above or strung across via a common backplane. Disk drives are
connected to both controllers.
2. Cached writes are constantly duplicated in both controllers’ memory
over a dedicated SCSI channel. The default path for controller
communications (SCSI-based controllers) is channel 0.
Channel 0 is also the default for host interface; therefore, avail other
channel(s) for host connection by changing its channel mode. See
Chapter 7 for details about channel mode configuration.
3. SCSI channels should be terminated on both ends.
It is
recommended to use the termination jumpers on the SCSI-based
controllers to configure the termination setting. Terminators are
provided on controller back-end PCBs. This design allows the
controller to be removed during the controller failover process.
Fibre-Based Controllers
Connection between controllers is more flexible with the Fibre-based
controllers.
Figure 10 - 2 Dual-Controller Configuration Using Fibre-
Based Controllers
Redundant Controller
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The basic configuration rules are:
1. All channels should be connected to both controllers as diagrammed
above.
2. To reduce the chance of downtime, more than one hub or switch can
be used to connect to host computer for path redundancy.
3. For the Fibre-to-Fibre controllers or RAID systems, there are two
options with configuring the communications loops between
controllers:
1). Dedicated Communications Loops – “RCC”
The first option is choosing one or two Fibre loops as the
dedicated communications paths. Two for communications is
recommended for the path redundancy it provides.
Using two channels for the communications offers a greater
throughput and hence a better performance.
2). Communications over Drive Loops – “Drive + RCC”
Configure all drive loops into the “Drive + RCC” mode to let
them share the communications traffic. The controllers can
automatically distribute the communications traffic across all
drive loops.
Workflow is balanced among loops. Using the drive/ RCC mode
allows more channels to be used for drive connection. With a 6-
channel controller, for instance, there can be as many as two
channels for host and four channels for drive (drive + RCC). All
channels are used for IO traffic while the system is still benefited
from controller communications.
10.1.3 Grouping Hard Drives and LUN Mapping
Listed below are the array settings that need to be considered when
configuring a dual-controller system:
1. How many logical drives, logical volumes, or logical partitions, and
in what sizes?
2. System drive mapping (primary/ secondary ID): how many storage
volumes will appear to which host port? and managed by which
controller?
10-4
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Will those storage volumes be accessed in a multi-host or multi-path
configuration?
4. Fault Tolerance: Enabling the controllers for transparent failover and
failback. See 10.1.4
Logical Drive, Logical Volume, and Logical Partitions
Listed below are the basics about configuring a logical drive for a
redundant controller system:
!
All configuration options are available through the Primary
controller. Two controllers behave as one, and there is no need to
repeat the configuration on another controller.
!
!
!
Drive configuration process is the same using single or redundant
controllers.
Logical units can be manually assigned to different controllers to
facilitate the active-active configuration.
There is no limitation on drive allocation. The members of a
logical drive do not have to come from the same drive channel.
Grouping drives from different drive channels helps reduce the
chance of downtime by channel bus failure.
!
!
Each logical drive can be configured a different RAID level and
several logical drives can be striped across to compose a larger
logical volume.
Each of the logical units (logical drives, logical volumes, or one of
their partitions) can be made available on host ports through host
LUN mapping. Each of these logical units appears as a virtual
hard drive.
Redundant Controller
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 10 - 3 Grouping Hard Drives
Drive Channel 0
4
4
2
2
GB
GB
GB
GB
ID 3
ID 2
ID 5
ID 0
Drive Channel 1
4
4
2
2
GB
GB
GB
GB
ID 6
ID 1
ID 0
ID 14
Local Spare
Drive of LD1
Global
Spare
Drive
RAID 5
8GB
RAID 0
6GB
Logical Drive 0
Logical Drive 1
!
As diagrammed above, choosing the members of an array can be
flexible. You may divide a logical drive or logical volume into
several partitions as diagrammed below, or use the entire logical
drive as a single partition, with or without the support of one or
several spare drives.
Figure 10 - 4 Partitioning of Logical Units
Partition 0 - 2GB
RAID 5
Partition 1 - 1GB
8GB
Partition 2 - 5GB
Logical Drive 0
Partition 0
2.5GB
RAID 0
6GB
Partition 1
1.5GB
Logical Drive 1
!
Each logical unit can be associated (mapped) with a host ID
(Primary or Secondary ID) or the LUN numbers under host IDs.
System Drive Mapping:
Primary and Secondary IDs
!
Host Channel:
Keep in mind that when controllers are successfully combined,
host port IDs are available as “Primary” or “Secondary” IDs.
10-6
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drive Channel:
Since all channels are strung between two controllers, each
channel is connected to two chip processors, and each processor
must occupy one channel ID. In redundant mode, both a Primary
and a Secondary ID must be present on drive channels.
!
!
The Primary-Secondary relationship between the controllers is
automatically determined by firmware.
You may have to create Primary and Secondary IDs separately on
the host and drive channels if these IDs are not available. The
configuration procedure will be discussed in section "10.3".
Mapping
!
A logical unit made available through a Primary ID will be
managed by the Primary controller, and that through a Secondary
ID by the Secondary controller.
!
Each channel ID (or an LUN under ID) will act as one virtual
storage volume to the host computer.
Figure 10 - 5 Mapping System Drives (Mapping LUNs)
!
The diagram above displays a single host computer with two
HBA cards allowing the connection of dual I/ O paths. A host
port ID is presented on each host port as the Primary ID or
Secondary ID. Users may then map any logical configuration of
drives to these LUN numbers. The result is that workload can be
Redundant Controller
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
distributed across two host ports and managed by both
controllers.
Figure 10 - 6 Mapping System Drives (IDs)
!
Some operating systems do not read multiple LUNs under single
ID. As diagrammed above, you may have the host channel to
present several IDs and map logical configurations to these IDs.
Each of these IDs can be identified as Primary or Secondary. As a
rule for most operation systems, each configuration unit will be
mapped to LUN0 under each ID.
10.1.4 Fault-Tolerance
What Is a Redundant Controller Configuration?
Hardware failures can occur. A simple parity error may sometimes
cause a RAID system to completely hang up. Having two controllers
working together will guarantee that at least one controller will
survive the catastrophes and keep the system working. This is the
logic behind having the redundant controllers – to minimize the best
we could the chance of down time for a storage subsystem.
A redundant controller system uses two controllers to manage the
storage arrays. It requires two controllers to work together and both
must be working normally. During normal operation, each controller
serves its I/ O requests. If one controller should fail, the existing
controller will temporarily take over for the failed controller until it is
replaced. The failover and failback processes should be totally
transparent to host and require only minimum efforts to restore the
original configuration.
10-8
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How does Failover and Failback Work?
A. Channel Bus
Below is a sample illustration of the redundant controller operation:
Figure 10 - 7 Redundant Controller Channel Bus
The host computer is connected to both the Primary and the
Secondary controllers. Each controller has two of its SCSI/ Fibre
channels assigned as the host channels, and the other SCSI/ Fibre
channels assigned to drive connections.
There are two logical drives. Logical drive 0 is assigned to the
Primary controller (mapped to the Primary ID), and logical drive 1
assigned to the Secondary controller (mapped to the Secondary ID).
Should one controller fail, the existing controller will manage the
logical drive once belonged to the failed controller via the once
inactive ID (the standby ID).
The ID mapping is synchronized between the controllers. In fact, all
the configuration settings can be done only through the Primary
controller. See the table below:
Redundant Controller
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 10 - 1 ID Mapping Status (Normal Operation)
Channel
ID
Status
Target Chip
Active
Pri. Controller
channel 0
0
0 (Primary ID)
Standby
Active
Sec. Controller
channel 0
1 (Secondary ID)
1 (Secondary ID)
0 (Primary ID)
Sec. Controller
channel 1
1
Standby
Pri. Controller
channel 1
In the event of controller failure (say, the Primary controller fails), the
once inactive ID (chip) will become active:
Table 10 - 2 ID Mapping Status (Controller Failed)
Channel
ID
Status
Target Chip
Active
Pri. Controller
channel 0 – Failed!
0
0 (Primary ID)
1 (Secondary ID)
1 (Secondary ID)
0 (Primary ID)
Standby- becomes
Sec. Controller
channel 0
Active!
Active
Sec. Controller
channel 1
1
Standby
Pri. Controller
channel 1- Failed!
Figure 10 - 8 Controller Failover
For every channel that is actively serving I/ Os, there is another on the
alternate controller that stays idle and will inherit the task should its
counterpart fail.
An exception to this is that active IDs may co-exist on single or
multiple host channels. As long as I/ O bandwidth is not of the
concern, then standby chips may not be necessary.
10-10
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.Controller Failover and Failback
In an unlikely event of controller failure, the surviving controller will
acknowledge the situation and disconnect with the failed controller.
The surviving controller will then behave as both controllers and serve
all the host I/ O requests.
System failover is transparent to host. System vendors should be
contacted for an immediate replacement of the failed unit.
Replacing a Failed Unit:
The replacement controller should have the same amount of memory
and the same version of firmware installed. However, it is inevitable
a
replacement controller is usually running later revisions of
firmware. To solve this problem, Firmware Synchronization is
supported since firmware version 3.21. When the replacement
controller is combined, the existing controller will downgrade the
replacement’s firmware so that both controllers will be running the
same version of firmware.
Your system vendor should be able to provide an appropriate
replacement controller.
Auto-Failback:
Once the failed controller is removed and a replacement controller is
installed, the existing controller will acknowledge the situation. The
existing controller will automatically combine with the replacement
controller.
When the initialization process of the replacement controller is
completed, the replacement controller will always inherit the status of
the Secondary controller. The replacement controller will obtain all
related configuration parameters from the existing controller. If the
existing controller fails to re-establish this connection, you can also
choose to "de-assert" the replacement controller through the existing
controller so that both will serve the original system drive mapping.
C.Active-to-Active Configuration:
Active-to-active configuration conducts all system resources to
performance. Storage volumes can be equally assigned to both
controllers and thus both are actively serving I/ Os. This allows a
flexible association between logical units and host ID/ LUNs.
Workload can then be manually distributed between controllers.
Redundant Controller
10-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.Traffic Distribution and Failover Process
The diagram below illustrates a four-channel configuration using
channel 0 as the communications path. Channel 1 serves as the host
interface and multiple IDs are created to facilitate active-active
operation. Each controller occupies either a Primary ID or a
Secondary ID on drive channels. One logical unit is assigned to the
Primary controller and the other the Secondary controller. In the
event when one controller fails, the existing controller will inherit IDs
from the failed controller and continue I/ Os.
Figure 10 - 9 Traffic Distribution
Logical Drive 0
Logical Drive 1
Host LUN Mapping
Logical Drive Assignment
Drive Channel
ID0 / LUN
Primary
2
ID1 / LUN
Secondary
3
* (PID)
* (SID)
When creating a logical unit, users will be prompted to assign the
logical unit either to the Primary or to the Secondary controller. Once
the assignment is done, logical unit(s) assigned to the Primary
controller can only be mapped to the Primary IDs on host channel;
Logical unit(s) assigned to the Secondary controller can only be
mapped to the Secondary IDs on host channel.
The channel ID (Primary/ Secondary) assignment for a SCSI controller
should look like this:
Primary Controller ID
PID = 0
Secondary Controller ID
SID = 1
Host Chl SCSI ID
Drive Chl SCSI ID 7 (or 8 for the dual
redundant chassis)
6 suggested (or 9 for the
dual redundant chassis)
Redundant Controller
10-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 10 - 10 Controller Failover
E. Controller Failure
Controller failure is managed by the surviving controller. The
surviving controller disables and disconnects from its counterpart
while gaining access to all signal paths. The existing controller then
proceeds with the ensuing event notifications and take-over process.
The existing controller is always the Primary controller regardless of
its original status and any replacement combined afterwards will
assume the role of the Secondary.
Symptoms
!
LCD on the failed controller is off. LCD on the surviving controller
displays controller failure message.
!
!
!
The surviving controller sounds alarm
The "ATTEN" LED flashing on the existing controller
The surviving controller sends event messages notifying controller
failure
Connection:
The channels of the two controllers that are connected together must
be the same. For example, if controller A uses channel 2 to connect a
group of drives, controller B must also use channel 2 to connect to the
same group of drives.
10-13
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.2 Preparing Controllers
10.2.1 Requirements:
Cabling Requirements:
Communications Channels:
-
Controller Communications (Cache Synchronization) Paths:
Controller
SentinelRAID
EonRAID 2510FR
EonStor
RCC cable
A SCSI cable (CH 0)
Dedicated RCC or RCC over drive loops
Pre-configured RCC routes over the system
backplane
-
Using one or two of the I/ O channels for controller communications
(as listed above) is necessary especially when write-back caching is
preferred. If controllers are running in write-back mode, a battery
module is recommended for each controller.
-
-
Use the default channel (CH 0) for the SentinelRAID controllers.
Out-of-Band Configuration
-
-
RS-232C cable (for Terminal Interface Operation) connection.
Ethernet connection: If management through Ethernet is preferred,
connect the Ethernet interface from both controllers to ports on a hub.
The IP address assigned to one controller will be inherited by the
surviving controller.
Host and Drive Connection
-
-
All channels on one controller must be connected to the same channels
on its counterpart.
10-14
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controller Settings:
1. Enable Redundant Controller:
"Main Menu"→ "View and Edit Peripheral Devices"→ "Set Peripheral
Device Entry"→ "Redundant Controller Enable/ Disable"
2. Controller Unique Identifier:
Set unique identifier to each controller. "View & Edit Peripheral
Devices"→ "Set Peripheral Device Entry"→ "Controller Unique
Identifier." Enter a hex number between 0 and FFFFF (firmware 3.25 and
above) for each controller.
3. Create Primary and Secondary IDs on Drive Channels:
"View and Edit SCSI Channels"→ Choose
a
Drive Channel→
"Primary/ Secondary Controller SCSI ID."
4. Create Primary and Secondary IDs on Host Channels:
"View and Edit SCSI Channels"→ Choose a host channel→ "View and
Edit SCSI ID"→ Choose a SCSI ID→ "Add/ Delete Channel SCSI ID"→
"Primary/ Secondary Controller"→ Add SCSI ID from the list. Reset the
controller for the configuration to take effect.
5. Create Logical Configurations of Drives and assign each of them either to
the Primary or the Secondary Controller:
"View and Edit Logical Drives"→ Select a RAID level→ Select member
drives→ "Logical Drive Assignments"→ Create Logical Drive.
6. Map Each Logical Configuration of Drives to the Primary/ Secondary ID
on host channel(s):
"View and Edit Host LUN"→ Choose a "host channel-ID-controller"
combination→ Choose Logical Drive/ Logical Volume/ Physical SCSI
Drive→ Map to Host LUN (Create Host LUN Entry).
NOTE:
•
The redundant function of the controllers can be enabled via the front keypad or a
terminal emulation program. Section 10.3 describes the procedures for using the
terminal emulation and LCD front panel. The same result can be achieved regardless
of the interface used.
Redundant Controller
10-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.2.2 Limitations
•
Both controllers must be exactly the same. Namely, they must operate
with the same firmware version, the same size of memory, the same
number of host and drive channels, etc. If battery backup is preferred,
both should be installed with a battery module.
•
•
•
The takeover process should take less than one second (using SCSI or
Fibre for controller communications) to complete.
In redundant mode, each controller takes an ID on each channel bus.
This leaves the maximum number for disk drives on a SCSI bus to be 14.
Connection through Fibre hubs or switches is necessary for joining host
(Fibre) interfaces between controllers. The EonRAID 2510FR is an
exception. Its type-1 ports come with an onboard hub.
•
•
The controller defaults for ID settings are listed below:
Host
Host channel
Drive channel
interface
(Primary/ Secondary)
(Primary/ Secondary)
SCSI
Fibre
0 / 1…
7 / 6
112 / 113…
119 / 120
SCSI IDs 8 (PID) and 9 (SID) are the recommended defaults to the drive
channels of the SCSI-based dual-controller chassis using an integrated
backplane.
10.2.3 Configurable Parameters
Primary or Secondary
If necessary, users can specify a particular controller as Primary or
Secondary. By setting each controller to the "Autocfg" mode, the controllers
will decide between themselves which is the Primary and which is the
Secondary.
The controller firmware recognizes the two controllers used in a redundant
configuration as Primary or Secondary. Two controllers behave as one
Primary controller.
Once the redundant configuration takes effect, user's configurations and
settings can only be done on the Primary controller. The Secondary
controller then synchronizes with the configuration of the Primary controller,
making the configurations of two controllers exactly the same.
10-16
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The two controllers continuously monitor each other. When a controller
detects that the other controller is not responding, the working controller
will immediately take over and disable the failed controller. However, it is
not predictable which one of the controllers should fail. It is necessary to
connect all other interfaces to both controllers so that a surviving controller
can readily continue all the services provided for the RAID system.
Active-to-Active Configuration
Users can freely assign any logical configuration of drives to both or either of
the controllers, then map the logical configurations to the host channel
IDs/ LUNs. I/ O requests from host computer will then be directed to the
Primary or the Secondary controller accordingly. The total drive capacity
can be divided and equally serviced by both controllers.
The active-to-active configuration engages all system resources to
performance. Users may also assign all logical configurations to one
controller and let the other act as a standby.
Active-to-Standby Configuration
By assigning all the logical configurations of drives to one controller, the
other controller will stay idle and becomes active only when its counterpart
fails.
Cache Synchronization
The Write-back caching significantly enhances controller performance.
However, if one controller fails in the redundant controller configuration,
data cached in its memory will be lost and data inconsistency might occur
when the existing controller attempts to complete the writes.
Data inconsistency can be avoided using one or several of the I/ O channels
as the communications path between the controllers. The cached data is
always synchronized in each other's memory. Each controller saves an exact
replica of the cache content on its counterpart. In the event of controller or
power failure, the unfinished writes will be completed by the existing
controller.
Battery Support
Unfinished writes will be cached in memory in write-back mode. If power to
the system is discontinued, data stored in the cache memory will be lost.
Battery modules can support cache memory for a period of several days
allowing the controller to keep the cached data. When two controllers are
Redundant Controller
10-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
operating in write-back mode, it is recommended to install a battery module
to each controller.
10-18
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3 Configuration
Listed below are steps necessary for configuring a redundant controller
system:
1. Configure, separately, each controller in the "Autoconfig" mode. When
two controllers are powered on later, firmware will determine which is
the Primary controller.
2. If a channel is used as the communications channel, firmware will display
channel status as "RCCOM (Redundant Controller Communications)."
This channel will then be excluded from the use of host/ drive connection.
3. When powering on both controllers together, LCD will display "RC
connecting."
After the controller negotiation is completed, the
communications between controllers should be established.
4. Configure your SCSI/ Fibre channels as host or drive.
The default
configuration for SCSI channel termination is "enabled." Please refer to
Appendix D of your controller Hardware Manual and examine whether
the termination jumpers on controller backplane are shunted. If the
associated jumpers are shunted, SCSI channels will be terminated on the
controller side no matter firmware setting is "enabled" or "disabled."
5. Create both a "Primary ID" and a "Secondary ID" on every drive channel.
6. Reset controller for the configuration to take effect.
7. Create Logical drives/ logical volumes and assign each logical unit to the
Primary or to the Secondary controller.
8. Proceed with Host LUN mapping. After mapping each logical unit to a
Primary or Secondary ID/ LUN on the host channel(s), the redundant
controller configuration is complete.
Redundant Controller
10-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3.1 Via Front Panel Keypad
Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting
Power-on Controller 1. Make sure Controller 2 is powered-off.
1. Enable Redundant Controller
Press [ENT] for two seconds on the front panel of
View and Edit
Peripheral Dev
controller 1 to enter the main menu. Use ꢀ or ꢀ
to navigate through the menus. Choose "View
and Edit Peripheral Dev.. (View and Edit
Peripheral Devices)," then press [ENT].
Set Peripheral
Devices Entry
Choose "Set Peripheral Devices Entry," then press
[ENT].
Choose "Redundant Ctlr Function__", and then
press [ENT]. (Note: The current setting will be
displayed on the LCD) If this controller has never
been set as a redundant controller before, the
default setting of the redundant controller
function is "Disabled." The message "Redundant
Ctlr Function Disable" will be displayed on the
LCD. Press [ENT] to proceed.
Redundant Ctlr
Function Disable
Autoconfig.
The message "Enable Redundant Ctlr: Autocfg?"
will appear. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to scroll through the
available options ("Primary," "Secondary," or
"Autocfg"), then press [ENT] for two seconds to
select "Autocfg."
Enable Redundant
Ctlr: Autocfg ?
For the other controller is currently not
connected, status will be indicated as “Inactive.”
Once set, press [ESC] for several times to return
to the main menu.
Redundant Ctlr:
Autocfg Inactive
View and Edit
Config Parms
2. Controller Unique ID
Enter “View and Edit Config Parms”->
“Controller Parameters”. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to find
“Ctlr Unique ID- xxxxx”.
Controller
Parameters ..
This value will be used to generate a controller-
unique WWN node name and port names and to
identify the controller during the failover process.
Enter a hex number from 0 to FFFFF and press
Ctlr Unique
ID- 00012
?
[ENTER].
The value you enter should be
different for each controller.
10-20
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power-off controller 1, and then power on
controller 2. Set controller 2 to "Autocfg" as
described previously. Power off controller 2.
When the redundant controller function is set to
the "Autocfg" setting, the controllers will decide
between themselves which will be the Primary
controller. If you need to specify a particular
controller as Primary or Secondary, do not set it
as "autocfg;" choose "Primary" or "Secondary"
instead. Please refer to the following section for
more detail.
Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting
Power on controller 1. Make sure controller 2 is powered-off.
1. Enable Redundant Controller
Press [ENT] for two seconds on the front panel of
controller 1 to enter the main menu. Use ꢀ or ꢀ
to navigate through the menus. Choose "View
and Edit Peripheral Dev..," then press [ENT].
View and Edit
Peripheral Dev
Set Peripheral
Devices Entry
Choose "Set Peripheral Device Entry," then press
[ENT].
Choose "Redundant Ctlr Function__," and then
Redundant Ctlr
press [ENT]. (Note: The current setting will be Function Disable
displayed on the LCD. If this controller has never
been set as a redundant controller before, the
default setting of the redundant controller
function is "disabled." The message "Redundant
Ctlr Function Disable" will be displayed on the
LCD screen. Press [ENT] to proceed.)
The message "Enable Redundant Ctlr: Autocfg?"
will appear. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to scroll through the
available options ("Primary," "Secondary," or
"Autocfg"). Press [ENT] for two seconds on
"Primary."
Enable Redundant
Ctlr: Autocfg ?
View and Edit
Config Parms
2. Controller Unique ID
Enter “View and Edit Config Parms”->
“Controller Parameters”. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to find
“Ctlr Unique ID- xxxxx”.
Controller
Parameters ..
This value will be used to generate a controller-
unique WWN node name and port names and to
identify the controller during the failover process.
Ctlr Unique
ID- 00012
?
Redundant Controller
10-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enter a hex number from 0 to FFFFF and press
[ENTER]. The value you enter should be
different for each controller.
Power off controller 1, then power on controller 2.
Set controller 2 to "Secondary" as described
above.
Power off controller 2.
Starting the Redundant Controllers
Power on all hard drives and the two controllers.
If drives are installed in a drive enclosure, wait
for the drives to be ready, then power on the
enclosure where the RAID controllers are
installed.
RC connecting...
<ENT> to cancel
The message "RC (redundant controller)
connecting... <ENT> to cancel" will appear on the
LCD display of the two controllers. After a few
seconds, the Primary controller will startup with
the model number and firmware version
displayed on the LCD, while the Secondary
controller will display the message "RC Standing
By.. <ENT> to Cancel" on its LCD. A few seconds
later, the LCD display on the Secondary
controller will be similar to the LCD display on
the Primary controller. The upper right corner of
LCD will then be displaying a “P” or ”S,”
meaning “Primary” or “Secondary” respectively.
During normal operation, the controllers continuously monitor each other.
Each controller is always ready to take over for the other controller in an
unlikely event of a controller failure.
The Primary and Secondary controllers synchronize each other’s
configurations at frequent intervals through the communications channel(s).
Creating Primary and Secondary ID
Drive Channel
View and Edit
SCSI Channels ꢀ
Enter "View and Edit SCSI Channels." Press
[ENT] and use ꢀ or ꢀ to select the host or drive
channel on which you wish to create
Primary/ Secondary IDs.
CH1=Drive PID=7
SID=NA SXF=80.0M
Press [ENT] to proceed.
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to select "Set SCSI Channel Pri. Ctlr
ID .." or " "Set SCSI Channel Sec. Ctlr ID …" Press
[ENT] to proceed.
Set SCSI Channel
Sec. Ctlr ID ..
10-22
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set Sec. Ctlr
ID:NA to ID: 6?
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to select a SCSI ID and press [ENT] to
confirm. The configuration change will take
effect only after controller reset.
Host Channel
The process of creating Primary and Secondary
IDs on host channels is basically the same.
CHL=0 ID=0
Primary Ctlr ..
In “View and Edit SCSI Channels”, press [ENT]
to select a host channel. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to select “Set
SCSI Channel ID”. A pre-configured ID will
appear, press [ENT] to proceed. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to
select “Add Channel SCSI ID” and then press
Add Channel
SCSI ID
..
Primary
[ENT] for two seconds on the “Primary” or Controller ?
”Secondary Controller?” to proceed.
When prompted by this message, use ꢀ or ꢀ to
select an ID. Press [ENT] to confirm and you will
be prompted for resetting the controller.
Add CHL=0 ID=2
Primary Ctlr ?
A message will prompt to remind you to reset the
controller. Press [ENT] to reset the controller or
press [ESC] to move back to the previous menu.
The change of ID will only take effect after
controller reset.
Change Setting
Do Reset Ctlr ?
Assigning a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the Secondary
Controller
A logical drive, logical volume, or any of its logical partitions can be
assigned to the Primary or Secondary controller. By default, a logical drive
is automatically assigned to the Primary controller. It can be assigned to the
Secondary controller if the host computer is also connected to the Secondary
controller.
Note that the partitions of a logical drive that has previously been assigned
to the Secondary controller will automatically be assigned to the Secondary
controller.
Press [ENT] for two seconds on the front panel of the Primary controller to
enter the Main Menu.
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to navigate through the menus.
View and Edit
Choose "View and Edit Logical Drives..," then Logical Drives
press [ENT].
Create a logical drive or choose an existing logical
drive, then press [ENT] to see the logical drive
menu.
Redundant Controller
10-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choose "Logical Drive Assignment..," then press
Logical Drive
Assignment..
[ENT].
The message "Redud Ctlr LG Assign Sec Ctlr?"
will appear. Press [ENT] for two seconds to
confirm. The logical drive has now been assigned
to the Secondary controller.
Redud Ctlr LG
Assign Sec Ctlr?
Map the logical drive (or any logical unit) to a host ID or LUN number under
the designated Secondary controller ID. The host channel must have a
"Secondary" SCSI ID created. (Create the Secondary controller’s SCSI ID on
host channel and add a SCSI ID to every drive channel in "View and Edit
SCSI Channels").
Mapping a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the Host LUNs
Choose "View and Edit Host Luns" from main View and Edit
Host Luns
ꢀ
menu and press [ENT] to proceed.
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to navigate through the created IDs
and press [ENT] to select one of them. Note that
a logical unit previously assigned to a Primary
controller can only be mapped a Primary ID, and
vice versa.
Map Sec Ctlr
CH=0 ID= 000 ?
Map to
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to choose mapping "Logical Drive,"
"Logical Volume," or "Physical Drive" to host
LUN. If the logical unit has been partitioned,
map each partition to different ID/ LUNs.
Logical Drive ?
CH0 ID0 LUN0
No Mapped
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to choose a LUN number and press
[ENT] to confirm.
Map Host LUN ?
Press [ENT] again to confirm.
LG0 RAID5 DRV=3
9999MB GD SB=0
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to choose a logical drive/ logical
volume if there are many.
LG=0 PART=0
999MB ?
Press [ENT] and choose a partition if the logical
unit has been partitioned.
Map Host LUN ?
Press [ENT] again to confirm or scroll down to
"Edit Host Filter Parameter …" You may refer to
Chapter 8 for more details.
CH0 ID9 LUN0 Map
to LG0 PRT0?
Press [ENT] to confirm the mapping.
Press [ENT] to re-ensure.
Map Sec. Ctlr
CH=0 ID= 0 ?
This message indicates that the logical unit has
been successfully mapped to the ID/ LUN
combination. Use ꢀ or ꢀ to continue mapping
other logical units or press [ENT] to delete the
mapped LUN.
CH0 ID9 LUN0
Mapto LG0 PRT0
10-24
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat the process to map all the logical units to
host ID/ LUNs.
Front Panel View of Controller Failure
What will happen when one of the controllers fails?
Should one of the controllers fail, the existing controller will automatically
take over within a few seconds.
The red ATTEN LED will light up, and the Redundant Ctlr
Failure Detected
message "Redundant Ctlr Failure Detected" will
appear on the LCD. Users will be notified by
audible alarm.
NOTE:
•
Although the existing controller will keep the system working. You should contact
your system vendor for a replacement controller as soon as possible. Your vendor
should be able to provide the appropriate replacement unit.
•
Some operating systems (SCO, UnixWare, and OpenServer, for example) will not
attempt to retry accessing the hard disk drives while controller is taking over.
When and how is the failed controller replaced?
Remove the failed controller after the "working" controller has taken over.
For a controller with hot-plug capability, all you have to do is to remove the
failed controller.
The replacement controller has to be pre-configured as the "Secondary
Controller." (The replacement controller provided by your supplier
should have been configured as the Secondary controller.
It is
recommended to safety check the status of the replacement controller before
installing it to your redundant system. Simply attach power to the
replacement and configure it as "Secondary." When safety check is done,
remove the failed controller and install the replacement controller into its
place.)
When the replacement is connected, the "Auto-Failback" will start
automatically. If the replacement controller does not initialize, execute the
following steps to bring the new controller online. Press [ENT] for 2 seconds
on the existing controller to enter the main menu.
View and Edit
Peripheral Dev
Use ꢀ or ꢀ to choose "View and Edit Peripheral
Dev..," then press [ENT].
Redundant Controller
10-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choose "Set Peripheral Device Entry..," then press
[ENT].
Set Peripheral
Devices Entry ..
Choose "Redundant Ctlr Function__," then press
[ENT].
Redundant Ctlr
Function__
The message "Redundant Ctlr Autocfg Degraded"
will appear on the LCD.
Redundant Ctlr
Autocfg Degraded
Press [ENT] and the message "Deassert Reset on
Failed Ctlr?" will appear.
Deassert Reset
on Failed Ctlr?
Press [ENT] for two seconds and the controller
will start to scan for the new controller and bring
it online.
Redundant Ctlr
Scanning
Initializing...
Please Wait...
The new controller will then start to initialize.
Once initialized, it will assume the role of the
Secondary controller.
SR2000
gggggg
v3.**
10.3.2 Via Terminal Emulation
Redundant Configuration Using Automatic Setting
Power on Controller 1. Make sure Controller 2 is powered-off.
Enter the Main Menu.
Use the arrow keys to navigate through the menus. Choose "View and Edit
Peripheral Devices," then press [ENTER].
Choose "Set Peripheral Devices Entry," then press [ENTER]. Choose
"Redundant Controller [Function]," and then press [ENTER]. (Note: The
10-26
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
current setting will be displayed on the screen. If this controller has never
been set as a redundant controller before, the default setting is "Disabled."
The message "Redundant Controller - Disabled" will be displayed on the
screen. Press [ENTER] to proceed.)
The message "Enable Redundant Controller in Autoconfigure Mode" will
appear.
Use the arrow keys to scroll through the available options ("Primary,"
"Secondary," or "Autoconfigure"), then press [ENTER] to select
"Autoconfigure." When prompted by “enable redundant controller function
in Autoconfigure mode?,” choose Yes.
A “Controller Unique Identifier” box will appear. Enter a hex number from
0 to FFFFF, then press [ENTER] to proceed.
The value you enter for
controller unique ID should be different for each controller.
Power off controller 1, and then power on controller 2. Set controller 2 to
"Autoconfigure" as described in the steps mentioned above. Power off
controller 2.
When the redundant controller function is set to the "Automatic" setting, the
controllers will decide between themselves which will be the Primary
controller. If you need to specify a particular controller as Primary or
Secondary, do not set it as "autocfg;" choose "Primary" or "Secondary"
instead.
Redundant Configuration Using Manual Setting
Power on controller 1. Make sure controller 2 is powered-off.
Enter the main menu. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the menus.
Choose "View and Edit Peripheral Devices," then press [ENTER].
Choose "Set Peripheral Device Entry," then press [ENTER].
Redundant Controller
10-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choose "Redundant Controller [Function]," and then press [ENTER]. (Note:
The current setting will be displayed on the screen. If this controller has
never been set as a redundant controller before, the default setting is
"Disabled". The message "Redundant Controller - Disabled" will be
displayed on the screen. Press [ENTER] to proceed.)
The message "Enable Redundant Controller in Autoconfigure Mode" will
appear. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the available options
("Primary," "Secondary," or "Autoconfigure"). Press [ENTER] on "Primary."
•
Power off controller 1, then power on controller 2. Set controller 2 to
"Secondary" as described above.
•
•
Power off controller 2.
Power on drives, both controllers, and host computer(s) for the settings
to take effect.
•
The Primary and Secondary controllers synchronize each other’s
configurations at frequent intervals through the established
communications path(s). Write-back cache will be disabled if no sync.
cache path exists.
•
Select "View and Edit SCSI Channels" from the Main Menu, the
communications path will be displayed as "RCCOM (Redundant
Controller Communications)."
10-28
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Primary and Secondary ID
Enter "View and Edit SCSI Channels." Press [ENTER] and select the host or
drive channel on which you wish to create Primary/ Secondary ID.
Drive Channel
Host Channel
The configuration change will only take effect after controller reset.
Assigning Logical Drives to the Secondary Controller
A logical drive can be assigned to the Primary or Secondary controller. By
default, logical drives will be automatically assigned to the Primary
controller. It can be assigned to the Secondary controller if the host
computer is also connected to the Secondary controller.
Access "View and Edit Logical Drives" from main menu. Create a logical
drive by selecting members and then a selection box will appear on the
screen. Move cursor bar to "Logical Drive Assignments" and press [ENTER]
if you want to assign logical drive to the Secondary controller.
Logical drive assignment can also be changed after a logical drive is created.
Create a logical drive or choose an existing logical drive, then press
[ENTER] to see the logical drive menu. Choose "Logical Drive
Redundant Controller
10-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assignments," then press [ENTER]. Choose Yes and press [ENTER] to
confirm reassignment to the Secondary Controller.
The reassignment is evident from the "View and Edit Logical Drives" screen.
"S0" indicates that the logical drive is logical drive 0 assigned to the
Secondary Controller.
Mapping a Logical Drive/Logical Volume to the Host LUNs
Choose “host channel-ID”
Choose mapping to which “logical unit”
Select LUN number
Select partition
Mapping optioin
Confirming mapping
scheme
10-30
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal Interface View of Controller Failure
What will happen when one of the controllers fails?
When one of the controllers fails, the other controller will take over in a few
seconds.
A warning will be displayed that a "SCSI Bus Reset Issued" for each of the
SCSI channels.
In addition, there will be an alert message that reads "Redundant Controller
Failure Detected."
Users will be notified by audible alarm.
After a controller takes over, it will act as both controllers. If it was the
Primary controller that failed, the Secondary controller becomes the Primary
controller. If the failed controller is replaced by a new one later, the new
controller will assume the role of the Secondary controller.
NOTE:
•
Some operating systems (SCO, UnixWare, and OpenServer, for example) will not
attempt to retry accessing the hard disk drives while the controller is taking over.
10.3.3 When and How Is the Failed
Controller Replaced?
Remove the failed controller after the take-over of the "working" controller
has been completed. For a controller with hot-plug capability, all you have
to do is to remove the failed controller.
The new controller has to be pre-configured as the "Secondary Controller."
(The replacement controller provided by your supplier should have been
configured as the Secondary controller. It is recommended to safety check
the status of the replacement controller before installing it to your redundant
system. Simply attach power to the new controller and configure it as the
"Secondary." When safety check is done, remove the failed controller and
install the replacement controller into its place.)
Redundant Controller
10-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the new controller is connected, the existing controller will
automatically start initializing the replacement controller (IFT-3102U2G and
above). If the existing controller does not initialize the replacement
controller, execute the "Deassert Reset on Failed Controller" function.
If the replacement has been initialized normally, you may proceed to
examine the system status. From the main menu, select "View and Edit
Peripheral Devices" and then "View Peripheral Device Status" to see that the
new controller is being scanned.
When the scanning has completed, the status will change to "Enabled."
10-32
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Forcing Controller Failover for Testing
This function is reserved for de-bugging.
Testing the failover functionality can be performed using the following
methods.
1. Pulling out one of the controllers to simulate controller
failure
Pull out either the primary or the secondary controller
An error message will display immediately with sounded alarm. The
existing controller takes over the workload within a second. Clear all
errors by pressing the ESC key. You may now install the controller once
removed after all activities have been taken over by the existing
controller. It may take a while for the controllers to finish re-
initialization and assuming their load.
2. Failover by "Forcing controller failure"
Select "View and Edit Peripheral Devices," "Set Peripheral Device Entry,"
and "Redundant Controller Primary/ Secondary."
Select "Force Primary/ Secondary Controller Failure." You may now
pull out the controller you had just disabled. I/ Os should be continued
by the existing controller. Continue the aforementioned procedure to
complete the test.
WARNING!
•
This function should only be performed for testing the redundant controller
functionality before any critical data is committed to drives. Although the controller
is designed to be hot-swappable, unpredictable failures may occur during the process,
i.e. improper handling of PCB boards while replacing the controller.
Redundant Controller
10-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RCC Status (Redundant Controller Communications
Channel)
The item is display only, showing the current communications route.
Secondary Controller RS-232
This is an option reserved for debug purposes. When enabled, you can
access the secondary controller through its serial port. When combined into
a redundant controller system, only status display is available through the
terminal session with a secondary controller. No configuration change can
be done through a secondary controller.
Remote Redundant Controller
This is an advanced option reserved for system integrators.
Cache Synchronization on Write-Through
If your redundant controller system is not operating with Write-back
caching, you may disable the synchronized cache communications. You
system can be spared of the efforts duplicating and transferring data
between partner controllers. This tremendously increases array performance
but you risk losing cached data if power outage or controller failure should
occur.
10-34
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
11
Record of Settings
In addition to saving the configuration data in NVRAM to disk,
keeping a hard copy of the controller configuration is also
recommended. This will speed the recreation of the RAID in the
event of a disaster.
The following tables are provided as a model for recording the
configuration data.
As a general rule, the configuration data in the NVRAM should be
saved to disk or as a file (using RAIDWatch Manager) whenever a
configuration change is made (see Chapter 6 and 7).
11.1 View and Edit Logical Drives
Logical Drive Information
LG
ID
LV RAID Level
size (MB)
status 1
2
3
O
C
Record of Settings
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
#LN #SB
#FL NAME
Disk reserved space
Partition Information
LG
Partition
Size (MB)
LG
Partition
Size (MB)
Infortrend
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.2 View and Edit Logical Volumes
Logical Volume Information
LV
ID
Size
#LD
Stripe size
Partition Information
LV
Partition
Size (MB)
LV
Partition
Size (MB)
Record of Settings
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.3 View and Edit Host LUN’s
LUN Mappings
Host Channel
Pri. / Sec.
Controller
SCSI ID
LUN
Logical Drive /
Logical
Partition
Size
Volume
Host-ID/ WWN Name List
Host-ID/WWN
Name List
Access Restriction Setting
Logical Drive /
Logical
Partition
Read Only / Access Denied to / R/W
by:
Volume
HBA WWN list
Infortrend
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Filter Entries
LUN
LV/LD
DRV
Partition
Size (MB)
RAID
LV/LD
Partition
?
Host-
ID/WWN
Host-
ID/WWN
Mask
Filter Type
Access
Mode
Name
Record of Settings
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.4 View and Edit SCSI Drives
Slot
Chl
ID
Size
(MB)
Speed
LG DRV?
Global Spare?
Local Spare?
Vendor & Product ID
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
Infortrend
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.5 View and Edit SCSI Channels
Chl
Mode
Primary
Secondary
Default
Sync
Clock
Default Terminator Current
Current
Width
(Host / Controller Controller
Drive) SCSI ID(s) SCSI ID(s)
Wide Diff/Enable/
Disable/
Sync
Clock
Parity Check
View channel host-
ID/WWN
View device port name
list (WWPN)
Record of Settings
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.6 View and Edit Configuration
Parameters
Communication Parameters
RS-232 Port Configuration
COM 1 (RS-232 Port)
Baud Rate
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
38400
Data Routing
Direct to Port
Enabled
Through Network
Disabled
Terminal Emulation
COM 2 (Redundant Controller Port)
Baud Rate
2400
4800
9600
19200
Data Routing
Direct to Port
Enabled
Through Network
Disabled
Terminal Emulation
Ethernet Configuration
IP address
__________
__________
__________
NetMask
Gateway
PPP Configuration
PPP Access Name
__________
__________
PPP Access
Password
Modem Operation → Modem Setup
Configure Modem Port
Modem Port Not Configured
None (Default Used)
Replace Default
COM1
COM2
Modem Operation
Mode
Append to Default
Modem Initialization -
Custom Init.
Command
AT
AT
Dial-out Command
Auto Dial-out on
Initialization
Dial-out Timeout
Enabled
Seconds
Disabled
_____
Infortrend
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dial-out Retry Count
Dial-out Retry Interval
Retry
_____
times
_____ Minutes
Disabled Critical Events Only
Dial-out on Event
Condition
Critical Events and Warnings
All Events, Warnings and Notifications
Caching Parameters
Write-back Cache
Optimization for
Enabled
Disabled
Random I/O
Sequential I/O
Host Side SCSI Parameters
Maximum Queued I/O
Count
Auto
_________
LUNs per Host SCSI
ID
LUNs
Number of Tags
Reserved for each
Host-LUN connection
Peripheral Device
Type Parameters
__________
Peripheral Device Type -
Device Qualifier -
Removable media -
LUN applicability -
Cylinder -
Host
Cylinder/Head/Sector
Mapping configuration
Head -
Sector -
Fibre Connection
Options
__________
Drive Side SCSI Parameters
SCSI Motor Spin-up
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
SCSI Reset at Power
Up
Enabled
Disk Access Delay
Time
No Delay
_______ Seconds
SCSI I/O Timeout
Default
_______
_______
_______
Maximum Tag Count
Disabled
Disabled
Periodic Drive Check
Time
Periodic SAF-TE and
SES Device Check
Time
Periodic Auto-Detect
Failure Drive Swap
Check Time
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
_______
_______
Detect only
Drive Predictable
Failure Mode
Detect and Perpetual
Clone
Enabled
Detect and Clone + Replace
Disabled
Fibre Channel Dual
Loop
Record of Settings
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk Array Parameters
Rebuild Priority
Low
Normal
Improved
High
Verifications on Writes
Enabled
Verifications on LD
Initialization Writes
Verifications on LD
Rebuild Writes
Verifications on
Normal Drive Writes
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Redundant Controller Parameters
Redundant Controller
Communication Channel
Secondary controller RS-
232
__________
Enabled
Disabled
Cache synchronization
on write-through
Enabled
Disabled
Controller Parameters
Controller Name
Not Set
__________
LCD Tile Display
Controller Logo
Disabled
Controller Name
Password Validation
Timeout
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
Always Check
Controller Unique
Identifier
SDRAM ECC
__________
Enabled
Disabled
Infortrend
11-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.7 View and Edit Peripheral Devices
Set Peripheral Device Entry
Redundant Controller
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Power Supply Status
Fan Status
Temperature Status
UPS Status
Define Peripheral Device Active Signal
Power Supply Fail Signal
Active High
Active Low
Fan Fail Signal
Active High
Temperature Alert Signal
Active High
UPS Power Fail Signal
Active High
Drive Failure Outputs
Active High
Active Low
Active Low
Active Low
Active Low
View System Information
Total Cache Size
SDRAM ________ MB
Firmware Version
Bootrecord Version
Serial Number
Battery Backup
On
Off
Event Threshold Parameters
Thresholds for +3.3V
Upper ________ Lower ________
Record of Settings
11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thresholds for +5V
Thresholds for +12V
Thresholds for CPU
temperature
Upper ________ Lower ________
Upper ________ Lower ________
Upper ________ Lower ________
Thresholds for Board
Temperature
Upper ________ Lower ________
11.8 Save NVRAM to Disk, Restore from Disk
Update
Firmware
Date
Save NVRAM to
Disk or File
Date/Location
Restore NVRAM
from Disk
Date
11.9 RAID Security: Password
RAID Security
Controller Name
Password
__________
Infortrend
11-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
12
Array Expansion
The array expansion functions allow you to expand storage capacity
without the costs on buying new equipment. The expansion can be
completed on-line while system is serving host I/ Os.
This chapter is organized as follows:
12. 1 Overview
Note on using the expansion functions
12.2 Mode 1 Expansion
Theory and configuration procedure: expansion
by adding drives
12.3 Mode 2 Expansion
Theory and configuration procedure: expansion
by copying and replacing drives
12.4 Making Use of the Added Capacity
Configuration procedure of the Expand function
for logical drive
12.5 Expand Logical Volume
Configuration procedure of the Expand function
for logical volume
12.6 Configuration Example: Volume Extension in Windows 2000
12.1 Overview
What is it and how does it work?
Before the invention of RAID Expansion, increasing the capacity of a
RAID system meant backing up all data in the disk array, re-creating
disk array configuration with new drives, and then restoring data
back into system.
Infortrend’s RAID Expansion technology allows users to expand a
logical drive by adding new drives, or replacing drive members
with drives of larger capacity. Replacing is done by copying data
Advanced Configurations
12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from the original members to larger drives, and then the smaller
drives can be replaced without powering down the system.
Note on Expansion
1. Added Capacity:
When a new drive is added to an existing logical drive, the
capacity brought by the new drive appears as a new partition.
Assuming that you have 4 physical drives (each of the size of
36GB) in a logical drive, and that each drive’s miximum capacity
is used, you will have a logical drive of the size of 108GB. One
drive’s capacity is used for parity; e.g., RAID 3. A 36GB drive is
added, the capacity will be increased to 144GB in two separate
partitions (one is 108GB and the other 36GB).
2. Size of the New Drive:
A drive used for adding the capacity should have the same
capacity as that of the array’s members.
3. Applicable Arrays:
Expansion can only be performed on RAID 0, 3, and 5 logical
drives.
Expansion can not be performed on
a
logical
configurations that do not have parity; e.g., NRAID or RAID 1.
NOTE:
•
Expansion on RAID0 is not recommended, because the RAID0 array has
no redundancy. Interruptions during the expansion process may cause
unrecoverable data loss.
4. Interruption to the Process:
Expansion should not be canceled or interrupted once begun. A
manual restart should be conducted after the occurrence of
power failure or interruption of any kind.
Infortrend
12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Expand Logical Drive: Re-Striping
Figure 12 - 1 Logical Drive Expansion
RAID levels supported: RAID 0, 3, and 5
Expansion can be performed on logical drives or logical volumes
under the following conditions:
1. There is an unused capacity in a logical unit
2. Capacity is increased by using member drives of larger capacity
(see Copy and Replace in the discussion below)
Data is recalculated and distributed to drive members or members
of a logical volume. On the completion of the process, the added or
the previously unused capacity will become a new partition. The
new partition must be made available through host LUN mapping
in order for a host adapter to recognize its presence.
Array Expansion
12-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.2 Mode 1 Expansion:
Adding Drives to a Logical Drive
Use drives of the same capacity as that of the original drive
members. Once completed, the added capacity will appear as
another partition (new partition). Data is automatically re-striped
across the new and old members during the add-drive process. See
the diagram below to get a clear idea:
Figure 12 - 2 Expansion by Adding Drive
RAID levels supported: RAID 0, 3, and 5.
The new partition must be made available through a host ID/ LUN.
Add-Drive Procedure
First select from the main menu, “View and Edit Logical Drive,” and
select a logical drive to add a new drive to. The drive selected for
adding should have a capacity no less than the original member
drives. If possible, use drives of the same capacity because all
drives in the array is treated as though they have the capacity of the
smallest member in the array.
Infortrend
12-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press [ENTER] to select a logical drive and choose “add SCSI
drives” from the submenu. Proceed with confirming the selection.
Available drives will be listed. Select one or more drive(s) to add to
the target logical drive by pressing [ENTER]. The selected drive
will be indicated by an asterisk “ ” mark.
*
Press [ESC] to proceed and the notification will prompt.
Press [ESC] again to cancel the notification prompt, a status bar will
indicate the percentage of progress.
Array Expansion
12-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upon completion, there will appear a confirming notification. The
capacity of the added drive will appear as an unused partition.
The added capacity will be automatically included, meaning that
you do not have to "expand logical drive" later. Map the added
capacity to another host ID/ LUN to make use of it.
As diagrammed above, in "View and Edit Host LUN," the original
capacity is 9999MB, its host LUN mapping remains unchanged and
the added capacity appears as the second partition.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
Expansion by adding drives can not be canceled once started. If power failure
occurs, the expansion will be paused and the controller will NOT restart the
expansion when power comes back on. Resumption of the RAID expansion
must be performed manually.
If a member drive of the logical drive fails during RAID expansion, the
expansion will be paused. The expansion will resume after logical drive
rebuild is completed.
Infortrend
12-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.3 Mode 2 Expansion:
Copy and Replace Drives with Drives of
Larger Capacity
You may also expand your logical drives by copying and replacing
all member drives with drives of higher capacity. Please refer to the
diagram below for a better understanding. The existing data in the
array is copied onto the new drives, and then the original members
can be removed.
When all the member drives have been replaced, execute the
“Expand logical drives” function to make use of the added capacity.
Figure 12 - 3 Expansion by Copy & Replace
RAID levels supported: RAID 0, 3, and 5
Copy and Replace Procedure
Select from main menu “View and Edit Logical Drives.” Select a
target array, press [ENTER] and scroll down to choose “copy and
replace drive.” Press [ENTER] to proceed.
Array Expansion
12-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The array members will be listed. Select the member drive (the
source drive) you want to replace with a larger one.
Select one of the members as the "source drive" (status indicated as
ON-LINE) by pressing [ENTER], a table of available drives will
prompt. Select a "new drive" to copy the capacity of the source
drive. The channel number and ID number of both the “Source
Drive” and “the Destination Drive” will be indicated in the
confirming box.
Choose Yes to confirm and proceed.
Press [ESC] to view the progress.
Infortrend
12-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Completion of the Copy and Replace process will be indicated by a
notification message. Follow the same method to copy and replace
every member drive. You may now perform “Expand Logical
Drive” to make use of the added capacity, and then map the
additional capacity to a Host LUN.
12.4 Making Use of the Added Capacity:
Expand Logical Drive
In the following example, the logical drive is originally composed of
three member drives and each member drive has the capacity of 1
Gigabyte. “Copy and Replace” has been performed on the logical
drive and each of its member drives has been replaced by a new
drive with the capacity of 2 Gigabytes. The next step is to perform
“Expand Logical Drive” to utilize the additional capacity brought by
the new drives.
1. Select “View and Edit Logical Drives” from the main menu and
select the logical drive with its members copied and replaced.
2. Select “Expand Logical Drive” in the sub-menu and press
[ENTER] to proceed. A confirming box will appear.
3. Proceed by pressing [ENTER] or entering any value no larger
than the "maximum drive expand capacity" and press [ENTER].
Array Expansion
12-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choose Yes to confirm and proceed.
Upon completion, you will be prompted by the notification message.
Press [ESC] to return to the previous menu screen.
The total capacity of logical drive has been expanded to 6 Gigabytes.
Infortrend
12-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.5 Expand Logical Volume
To expand a logical volume, expand its logical drive member(s) and
then perform “expand logical volume.”
When prompted by "Expand Logical Volume?", Choose Yes to
confirm and the process will be completed immediately.
Array Expansion
12-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6
Configuration Example:
Volume Extension in
Windows 2000® Server
Limitations When Using Windows 2000
1. Applies only to the Windows NT Server or Windows 2000
Server Disk Management which includes the Extend Volume
Set function; Windows NT Workstation does not support this
feature. The volume set expansion formats the new area
without affecting existing files on the original volume.
2. The system drive (boot drive) of a Windows NT/ 2000 system
can not be expanded.
3. The drive to be expanded should be using the NTFS file system.
Example:
The following example demonstrates the expansion of a 16988MB
RAID 5 logical drive. The HyperTerminal emulation software that
comes with Windows Server is used to connect to the RAID
controller via RS-232C.
Infortrend
12-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can view information about this drive in the Windows 2000
Server’s Computer Management -> Storage -> Disk Management.
Place the cursor on Disk 1, right-click your mouse, and select
“Properties.” You will see that the total capacity for the Drive E: is
about 16.5GB.
Array Expansion
12-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow the steps described in the previous section to "add" or "copy
& replace" SCSI disk drives and perform Logical Drive Expansion.
The 16.5GB logical drive has become a 25GB logical drive. Place the
cursor on that logical drive, and then press [ENTER].
From the menu, select "Partition Logical Drive." You will see that
the 25GB logical drive is composed of a 17GB partition and an 8.4GB
partition.
Follow the directions in chapter 5 and chapter 7 to map the new
partition to a Host LUN. The new partition must be "mapped" to a
host LUN in order for the HBA (host-bus adapter) to see it. Once
you have mapped the partition, reboot your Windows server. The
HBA should be able to detect an additional “disk” during the
initialization process.
Infortrend
12-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Return to Windows 2000 Server’s Disk Management. There now
exists a Disk 2 with 8.3GB of free space. You may use the “rescan
disks” command to bring up the new drive.
Select an existing volume (Disk1) and then right-click on the disk
column. Select “Extend Volume” to proceed.
Array Expansion
12-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Extend Volume Wizard should guide you through the rest of
the process.
The screen will display that volume set of Drive E: has been
extended into a spanned volume by the 8.3GB in Disk2.
Logical Drive E: is now composed of two partitions with a total
volume of 2500MB. To see this, hold down on the <Ctrl> key and
select both Disk 1 and Disk2; then right-click your mouse and select
“Properties.”
Infortrend
12-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drive E: now has a capacity of about 25GB.
Array Expansion
12-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
A
LCD Keypad Navigation Map
A-1
Navigation Map
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-2
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation Map
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-4
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation Map
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-6
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation Map
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
B
Firmware Functionality
Specifications
Basic RAID Management:
Specification
RAID Levels
Feature
0, 1(0+1), 3, 5, 10, 30, and 50 (Multi-level RAID with
the logical volume implementation)
64 or 128 through OEM IAPPEND utility
Maximum Number of
logical drives
RAID level dependency to
each logical drive
Independent. Logical drive configured in different
RAID levels can co-exist in a logical volume and in a
RAID system
Maximum number of drives 128
for each logical drive
Configurable stripe size
Configurable write policy
Logical drive identification
4KB to 256KB per logical drive
Write-back or write-through per logical drive
Unique, controller randomly generated logical drive ID;
Logical drive name user-configurable
Maximum number of
partitions for each logical
drive
128, through OEM “iappend.exe” program
Maximum number of
logical drives in a logical
volume
128
Maximum number of
logical volumes
32
Maximum number of LUNs
Mappable
Up to 1024
Maximum number of LUNs
per Host ID
Up to 32, user configurable
Concurrent I/O
Supported
Tag Command Queuing
Dedicated Spare Drive
Supported
Supported, hereby defined as the spare drive
specifically assigned to a logical drive
Supported, the spare drive serving all logical drives
Supported, applies to non-configured drives
Supported
Global Spare Drive
Global Spare Auto-Assign
Co-existing Dedicated and
Global Spare Drives
Auto-rebuild onto spare
drive
Supported
B-1
Firmware Functionality Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto-scan of replacement
drive upon manually
initiated rebuild
Supported
One-step rebuild onto a
replacement drive
Immediate logical drive
availability
Supported
Supported
Auto-rebuild onto failed
drive replacement
Supported. With no spare drive, the controller will
auto-scan the failed drive and starts rebuild
automatically once the failed drive has been replaced.
Firmware can be downloaded during active I/Os.
Administrators may find appropriate time to reset
controller later.
Background firmware
download
Auto recovery from logical
drive failure
Supported. When user accidentally removed the
wrong drive to cause the 2nd drive failure of a one-
drive-failed RAID5 / RAID3 logical drive, fatal error may
occur. However, you may force the controller to
reaccept the logical drive by switching off the controller,
installing the drive back to its original drive slot, and
then power on the controller. The logical drive will be
restored to the one-drive-failed status.
Advanced Features:
Media Scan
Supported. Verify written data on drives to avoid bad
blocks from causing data inconsistency.
Supported
Transparent reset of hung
HDDs
Auto cache flush on critical When critical conditions occur, e.g., component failure,
conditions
or BBU under charge, cached data will be flushed and
the write policy will be changed to write-through mode.
Supported
Drive Low-level format
Drive Identification
Supported. Force the drive to light on the activity
indicator for user to recognize the correct drive.
Drive Information Listing
Supported. Drive vendor name, model number,
firmware revision, capacity (blocks), serial number,
narrow/wide and current sync. speed.
Supported
Supported. The logical drive information is recorded
on drive media. The logical drives can still be
accessed if using different Infortrend RAID
controllers/subsystems.
Drive Read/Write testing
Configuration on Disk
Save/ Restore NVRAM to /
from Disks
Supported. Save all the settings stored in the
controller NVRAM to the logical drive members
Save / Restore NVRAM to /
from a file
Supported. Save all the settings stored in the
controller NVRAM to a file (via GUI manager) on user’s
computer.
B-2
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host LUN Geometry
User Configurable Default
Geometry:
1. Capacity <64GB: Head=63, Sector=32, Cylinder=?
(depends on capacity)
2. 64GB<capacity<128GB:Head=64, Sector=64,
Cylinder=? (depends on capacity)
3. 128GB<capacity<256GB: Head=127, Sector=64,
Cylinder=? (depends on capacity)
4. 256GB<capacity<512GB: Head=127, Sector=127,
Cylinder=?
5. 512GB<capacity<1TB: Head=255, Sector=64,
Cylinder=? (depends on capacity)
6. 1TB<capacity: Head=225, Sector=225, Cylinder=?
(depends on capacity)
User Configurable
Geometry range:
Sector: 32, 64, 127, 255 or Variable
Head: 64, 127, 255 or Variable
Cylinder: <1024, <32784,<65536 or Variable
Supported. The controller will send spin-up (start unit)
command to each drive at the 4 sec. intervals.
Drive Motor Spin-up
Drive-side Tag Command
Queue
Supported. User adjustable up to 128 for each drive
Host-side Maximum
Queued I/O count
User adjustable up to 1024
Maximum concurrent Host
LUN connection
User adjustable up to 64
User adjustable up to 256
Number of Tags Reserved
for each Host-LUN
connection
Controller/Logical Drive
Shutdown
Turns controller or specific logical drive into a state that
does not receive I/Os. This function is available
through OEM “iappend” program.
Drive I/O timeout
IO channel diagnostics
Drive Roaming
User adjustable
Supported
Supported
Caching Operation:
Write-back Cache
Supported.
Write-through Cache
Supported.
Supported Memory type
SDRAM memory for enhanced performance
Fast Page Memory with Parity for enhanced data
security
Read-ahead Operation
Intelligent Dynamic read-ahead operation for
sequential data accessing
Multi-Threaded Operation
Scatter / Gather
Yes
Supported
I/O sorting
Supported. Optimized I/O sorting for enhanced
performance
Variable Stripe Size
Opt. for Sequential
I/O
Opt. for
Random I/O
32
RAID0
128
B-3
Firmware Functionality Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAID1
RAID3
RAID5
128
16
128
32
4
32
Caching Optimization
•
•
Cache buffer sorting prior to cache flush operation
Gathering of writes during flush operation to minimize the number of IOs
required for parity update
•
•
•
•
Elevator sorting and gathering of drive IOs
Multiple concurrent drive IOs (tagged commands)
Intelligent, predictive multi-threaded read-ahead
Multiple, concurrent host IO threads (host command queuing)
RAID Expansion:
On-line RAID Expansion
Supported.
Mode-1 RAID Expansion-
add Drive
Supported. Multiple drives can be added concurrently.
Mode-2 RAID Expansion –
Copy and Replace drives
Supported. Replace members with drives of larger
capacity.
Expand Capacity with no
extra drive bays required
Supported in Mode 2 RAID expansion. Provide “Copy
and Replace Drive” function to replace drives with
drives of greater capacity. No need to add another
enclosure for the extra drives.
Operating system support
for RAID Expansion
No. No operating system driver required. No software
has to be installed for this purpose.
B-4
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fibre Channel Support:
Fibre Channel Support
Channel Mode
All Firmware supports Fibre Channels
All channels configurable to Host or Drive mode, user
configurable.
Redundant controller
Host-side loop failure
detection
Redundant using FC controllers supported.
Supported. The LIPs on the host channels will not be
displayed to users.
Drive-side loop failure
detection
Supported.
Point-to-point topology
Arbitrated loop topology
Fabric topology
Supported.
Supported.
Supported.
Host Redundant loop /
dual-loop topology
Supported. (Also requires the host computer Fibre HBA
driver support)
Drive side redundant loop Workloads can be automatically balanced between
load-sharing
member loops for performance optimization.
User selectable from ID 0 to 125.
Supported
3-pin Copper: can be converted to optical with a MIA or
GBIC HUBs.
Fibre channel ID
Fibre channel CRC
Native Fibre Interface
DB-9 Copper: MIA compliant, a converter or extender is
necessary
Point-to-point and FC-AL
protocol
User configurable.
LUN Filtering (RAID-
Based Mapping)
Host LUN mapping with user-configurable Filter entry
and Filter type (access control), up to 128 Filter entries
can be appended to Host-ID/LUN combinations.
! Host channel HBA WWN browsing: a list of WWNs
from detected HBAs on the host channel will be
provided for user's convenience when masking LUN
Filtering.
! Bit-masking: Based on the user provided WWN of
the host HBA (user can enter the WWN manually
from a list browsed or that provided by the controller).
Users can also assign a bit-masking to group a
certain group of WWNs to be included in the LUN
Filtering.
! Read/Write Privilege: Users can choose the following
privilege for each LUN Filtering: Read/Write, Read
Only, and No Access.
WWN table stored in
NVRAM
Each WWN number can be assigned with a nick name
for ease of identification
Sync. cache channel over Supported, no extra cabling between two controllers;
Fibre loops
communications data can be distributed to one or two
dedicated channels or over all drive loops.
B-5
Firmware Functionality Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S.M.A.R.T. Support:
Copy & Replace Drive
Supported. User can choose to clone a member drive
before drive failure.
Drive S.M.A.R.T. Support
Supported, with intelligent error handling
implementations.
User selectable modes for 1. Detect only
S.M.A.R.T.
2. Perpetual Clone on detection of S.M.A.R.T. condition
3. Clone + Replace
Redundant Controller:
Active-active redundant Supported
controller
Synchronized cache
Supported. Through single or redundant, dedicated
synchronizing channels. Synchronized cache over Fibre
loops is supported.
Synchronized cache can be disabled when using write-
through mode in redundant controllers to prevent
performance trade-offs.
Write-back cache
enabled in redundant
controller mode
Yes; with synchronized cache connection between
controllers.
Automatic Failover
Yes for all PowerPC controllers (user's interaction
necessary)
Automatic Failback
Yes for all PowerPC controllers (user's interaction
necessary)
Fibre channel redundant Supported.
controller
Controller Hot-Swap
! No need to shut down the failed controller before
replacing the failed controller. (Customer's design-in
hot-swap mechanism necessary)
! Support on-line hot-swap of the failed controller.
There is no need to reset or shutdown the failed
controller. One controller can be pulled out during
active I/Os to simulate the destructive controller failure.
(Customer's design-in hot-swap mechanism
necessary)
Redundant Controller
SentinelRAID: SCSI; RCC Reset signals built-in
Communication channel EonRAID: Fibre channel(s); RCC cable necessary
Parity Synchronization
in redundant controller
write-back mode to
avoid write-hole
Supported.
B-6
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Redundant Controller
Communication over
Fibre loops
No Single-point-of-
failure
Dedicated loops or distribution over drive loops selectable
Supported.
Automatic engagement
of replacement
controller
Supported in PowerPC series
Dynamic cache memory Yes. Cache memory is dynamically allocated, not fixed.
allocation
Environment
management
2
Supported. SAF-TE, S.E.S., ISEMS (I C interface); and
on-board controller voltage/temp monitor are all supported
in both single and redundant controller mode. In the event
of controller failure, serves can be taken over by the
existing controller.
Cache battery backup
Load sharing
Supported. Battery backup solutions for cache memory
are supported in both single controller and redundant
modes.
Supported. Workload can be flexibly divided between
different controllers by assigning logical configurations of
drives (LDs/LVs) to different controllers.
User configurable
channel mode
Supported. Channel modes configurable (SCSI or Fibre)
as HOST or DRIVE in both single controller and redundant
controller mode.
Require a special
Firmware for redundant
controller?
No. All firmware and all Infortrend external RAID
controllers support redundant controller function.
Redundant Controller
Firmware upgrade can be downloaded to the primary
rolling firmware upgrade controller and then be adopted by both controllers, without
interrupting host I/O.
Redundant Controller
firmware
synchronization
In the event of controller failure, a replacement controller
running a different version of firmware can be combined to
restore a redundant system with a failed controller.
Different firmware versions can be auto-synchronized
later.
Data Safety:
Regenerate Parity of
logical drives
Supported. Can be performed every so often by user to
ensure that bad sectors do not cause data loss in the
event of drive failure.
Bad block auto-
reassignment
Supported. Automatic reassignment of bad block
Battery backup for
cache memory
Supported. The battery backup solutions provide long-
lasting battery support to the cache memory when power
failure occurs. The unwritten data in the cache memory
can be committed to drive media when power is restored.
Supported. Performs read-after-write during normal write
processes to ensure data is properly written to drives.
Supported. Performs read-after-write during rebuild write
to ensure data is properly written to drives.
Verification on Normal
Writes
Verification on Rebuild
Writes
B-7
Firmware Functionality Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Verification on LD
initialization writes
Drive S.M.A.R.T.
support
Supported. Performs read-after-write during logical drive
initialization to ensure data is properly written to drives.
Supported. Drive failure is predictable with reference to
the variables detected. Reaction schemes are selectable
from Detect only, Perpetual Clone and Copy + Replace.
These options help to improve MTBF.
Clone Failing Drive
Users may choose to clone data from a failing drive to a
backup drive manually
Automatic Shutdown on Controller automatically starts a shutdown sequence upon
over-temperature
condition
the detection of high-ambient temperature for an extended
period of time.
System Security:
Password protection
Supported. All settings requires the correct password (if
set) to ensure system security.
User-configurable
Password validation
timeout
SSL-enabled
RAIDWatch Agents
Supported. After certain time in absence of user
interaction, the password will be requested again. This
helps to avoid unauthorized operation when user is away.
Agents communicate to the controller through limited set
of authorization options.
B-8
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environment Management:
SAF-TE/S.E.S. support
Supported. The SAF-TE/S.E.S. modules can be
connected to the drive channel, the controller will
detect errors from SAF-TE/S.E.S. devices or notify
drive failure via SAF-TE/S.E.S..
•
•
•
Both SAF-TE/S.E.S. via drive and device-self-
interfaced are supported.
Redundant SAF-TE/S.E.S. devices are
supported
Multiple S.E.S. devices are supported
Dynamic on-lining of
enclosure services
Once an expansion unit (JBOD) with supported
monitoring interface is combined with a RAID system,
its status will be automatically polled.
User configurable (50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 500ms,
1~60sec)
SAF-TE/S.E.S. polling
period
ISEMS (Infortrend Simple
Enclosure Management
Service)
Supported.
Multiple SAF-TE/S.E.S.
modules on the same
channel
Multiple SAF-TE /S.E.S.
modules on different
channels
Mapping SAF-TE/S.E.S.
device to host channel for
use with Host-based SAF-
TE/S.E.S. Monitor
Dual-LED drive status
indicators
Supported.
Supported.
Supported.
Supported. Both single-LED and dual-LED drive
status indicators are supported.
SAF-TE/ S.E.S. Temperature
value display
Fault-bus support
Supported. Display the temperature value provided
by enclosure SAF-TE module (if available).
Provides the simplest implementation for the
enclosure management. All fault-bus input/output
signals are active-high/active-low user adjustable.
Supported. Monitors the 3.3V, 5V, and 12V voltage
status. Event trigger threshold user configurable.
Supported. Monitors the CPU and board
temperature status. Event trigger threshold user
configurable.
On-board controller voltage
monitors
On-board controller
temperature sensors
Enclosure redundant power
supply status monitoring
Enclosure Fan status
monitoring
Enclosure UPS status
monitoring
Supported. Fault-Bus/SAF-TE/S.E.S./ISEMS
Supported. Fault-Bus/SAF-TE/S.E.S/ISEMS
Supported. Fault-Bus/SAF-TE/S.E.S/ISEMS
Supported. Fault-Bus/SAF-TE/S.E.S/ISEMS
Enclosure temperature
monitoring
B-9
Firmware Functionality Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface:
RAIDWatch on-board
Out-of-band configuration via LAN. Browser
accessible configuration option by installing
RAIDWatch to reserved space on drive via ftp.
Supports terminal modes: ANSI, VT-100, ANSI Color.
Provides menu-driven user-friendly text-based
interface.
RS-232C Terminal
Graphical User Interface
(Java-based GUI Manager)
Provides user-friendly graphical interface.
Communicates with RAID controller via In-band
SCSI, In-band Fibre or SNMP (Windows-based GUI).
Customers can use Infortrend RAIDWatch or develop
their own GUI according to the "External Interface
Specification" (contact Infortrend support for this
OEM document).
External Interface API for
customized host-based
management
Supported.
LCD Front Panel
Buzzer alarm
Provides easy access for user instinct operation.
Warns user when any failure or critical event occurs.
Remote Manageability:
Modem Support
Auto dial-out
The COM 1 port of the controller can be connected to
a MODEM for remote manageability.
Supported. Can be configured to dial-out to a remote
terminal when controller is powered on – for remote
administration.
Event dial-out to terminal
Event dial-out to pager
Supported. Can be configured to dial-out a remote
terminal when an event occurs.
Supported. Can be configured to dial-out a pager
number with message (user configured with AT
commands) when an event occurs.
Terminal dial-in
Supported. Can be configured to accept a remote
terminal dial-in for remote administration.
Custom Inquiry Serial Number (for support of multi-
pathing software like Veritas, QLogic, etc)
Supported. Remote redundant controller
configuration (support fully automatic failback-user's
interaction free)
Custom Inquiry Serial
Number
Remote Redundant
Controller Configuration
B-10
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JBOD-Specific:
Format
Reassign Blocks
Restore controller-maintained defect list to default
Add entry to the defect list maintained by controller on disk
drives
Write-verification
SMART
Special mode
parameters
Write following by a verify
Sense data and mode parameters support
Error handling page – Enable/Disable retry
Caching page – Enable/Disable Read/Write caching
SMART enable parameters
Geometry – saved on format command completion
Others:
Customization of default
settings
Via the IAPPEND utility
Private logo
WWN seed read from
subsystem
Supported
Supported
Customizable SNMP trap
messages
Customizable inquiry serial
no. data to enable clustering
customization
Supported
Supported
B-11
Firmware Functionality Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
C
System Functions:
Upgrading Firmware
Upgrading Firmware
The RAID controller’s firmware resides in flash memory that can
be updated through the COM port, LAN port, or via In-band SCSI.
New releases of firmware are available in the form of a DOS file in
the "pub" directory of Infortrend’s FTP site or on a 3.5" diskette.
The file available at the FTP site is usually a self-extracting file that
contains the following:
FW30Dxyz Firmware Binary (where "xyz" refers to the firmware
version)
B30Buvw
Boot Record Binary (where "uvw" refers to the boot
record version)
README.TXT Read this file first before upgrading the
firmware/ boot record. It contains the most up-
to-date information which is very important to
the firmware upgrade and usage.
These files must be extracted from the compressed file and copied
to a directory in boot drive.
New Features Supported with Firmware 3.21
Background RS-232C Firmware Download:
Host I/ Os will not be interrupted during the download process.
After the download process is completed, user should find a
chance to reset the controller for the new firmware to take effect.
Redundant Controller Rolling Firmware Upgrade:
When download is performed on a dual-controller system,
firmware is flashed onto both controllers without interrupting host
I/ Os. After the download process is completed, the Primary
controller will reset and let the Secondary take over the service
temporarily. When the Primary comes back on-line, the Secondary
System Functions: Upgrading Firmware
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will hand over the workload and then reset itself for the new
firmware to take effect. The rolling upgrade is automatically
performed by controller firmware and user's intervention is not
necessary.
Redundant Controller Firmware Sync-version:
A controller used to replace a failed unit in a dual-controller
system is often running a newer release of firmware version. To
solve the contention, firmware running on the replacement
controller will be downgraded to that running on the surviving
controller.
IMPORTANT!
•
•
Allow the downloading process to finish. Do not reset or turn off the
computer or the controller while it is downloading the file. Doing so
may result in an unrecoverable error that requires the service of the
manufacturer.
While the firmware is new, the boot record that comes with it may be the
same version as the one in the controller. If this is the case, there is no
need to upgrade the Boot Record Binary.
NOTE:
•
Controller serial port COM 2can not be used to download firmware.
Upgrading Firmware Using In-band SCSI +
RAIDWatch Manager
Establish the In-band SCSI connection in RAIDWatch Manager
Please refer to RAIDWatch User' s Manual for details on
establishing the In-band SCSI connection for RAIDWatch
Manager.
C-2
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrade Both Boot Record and Firmware Binaries
1. Connect to the RAID system locally or from a remote host using
RAIDWatch Manager. While connected to the RAID system,
there will be icon(s) with IP address specified on the left of the
menu screen. Select by double-clicking the icon of the RAID
system which firmware is to be upgraded. Select the controller
icon and then select the “RAID system-to-host bus” (usually
appears as In-band SCSI). Double-click the RAID-to-host-bus
to connect to the desired controller. Choose the “RAID view”
icon on the controller panel or the RAID view icon on the
control bar. The RAID view window will appear. Choose
"Controller" > "Download" -> and click among the selections
"Download FW/ BR” (Firmware and Boot Record).
2. Provide the boot record binary filename, the RAIDWatch
Manager will start to download the boot record binary to the
controller.
3. After the boot record download is completed, provide the
firmware filename to the RAIDWatch Manager. It will start to
download the firmware to the controller.
4. Shutdown the system which is accessing the RAID, then reset
the controller in order to use the new downloaded firmware.
With firmware release 3.21 and above, host I/ Os will not be
interrupted by the download process. Users may find a chance
to stop host I/ O and reset the controller for new firmware to
take effect.
System Functions: Upgrading Firmware
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrade the Firmware Binary Only
1. Connect to the RAID system locally or from a remote host using
RAIDWatch Manager. While connected to the RAID system,
there will be icon(s) with IP address specified on the left of the
menu screen. Select by double-clicking the icon of the RAID
system which firmware is to be upgraded. Select the controller
icon and then select the “RAID system-to-host bus” (usually
appears as In-band SCSI or PCI bus…).
Double-click the
RAID-to-host-bus to connect to the desired controller. Choose
the “RAID view” icon on the controller panel. The RAID view
window will appear. Choose "Controller" > "Download" -> and
click among the selections "Download FW” (Firmware). If both
boot record and firmware are desired to upgrade, choose
"Download Firmware".
2. Provide the firmware filename to the RAIDWatch Manager. It
will start to download the firmware to the controller.
3. Shutdown the system which is accessing the RAID, then reset
the controller in order to use the new downloaded firmware.
Upgrading Firmware Using RS-232C Terminal
Emulation
The firmware can be downloaded to the RAID controller by using
an ANSI/ VT-100 compatible terminal emulation program.
Whichever terminal emulation program is used must support the
ZMODEM file transfer protocol. The following example uses the
HyperTerminal in Windows NT®. Other terminal emulation
programs (e.g., Telix and PROCOMM Plus) can perform the
firmware upgrade as well.
C-4
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Establishing the connection for the RS-232C Terminal Emulation
Please refer to chapter 4, “Connecting to Terminal Emulation,” and
also your hardware manual for details on establishing the
connection.
Upgrading Both Boot Record and Firmware Binaries
1. From the Main Menu, scroll down to "System Functions."
2. Go to "Controller Maintenance."
3. Choose "Advanced Maintenance."
4. Select "Download Boot Record and Firmware."
5. Set ZMODEM as the file transfer protocol of your terminal
emulation software.
6. Send the Boot Record Binary to the controller.
In
HyperTerminal, go to the "Transfer" menu and choose "Send
file." If you are not using Hyper Terminal, choose "Upload" or
"Send" (depending on the software).
7. After the Boot Record has been downloaded, send the
Firmware Binary to the controller. In HyperTerminal, go to the
"Transfer" menu and choose "Send file." If you are not using
Hyper Terminal, choose "Upload" or "Send" (depending on the
software).
8. When the Firmware completes downloading, the controller will
automatically reset itself.
System Functions: Upgrading Firmware
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrading the Firmware Binary Only
1. From the Main Menu, scroll down to "System Functions."
2. Go to "Controller Maintenance."
3. Choose "Download Firmware."
4. Set ZMODEM as the file transfer protocol of your terminal
emulation software.
5. Send the Firmware Binary to the controller. In Hyper Terminal,
select "Send file." If you are not using HyperTerminal, choose
"Upload" or "Send" (depending on the software).
6. When the Firmware completes downloading, the controller will
automatically reset itself.
C-6
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
D
Event Messages
The controller events can be categorized as follows:
Alert
Errors that need to attend to immediately
Warning
Notification
Errors
Command processed message sent from Firmware
The controller records all system events from power on, it can record up to
1,000 events. To power off or to reset the controller will cause an automatic
deletion of all the recorded event logs.
RAIDWatch manager' sub-module, Event Monitor, can be used to record
events on multiple controllers especially when controller reset or power-off is
an expected action. The Event Monitor runs independently on a host computer
and can store up to 1000 events (per controller unit) regardless of the
controller's current status. The software program is Java-based and is usually
bundled with RAIDWatch manager. Associated details can be found in the
RAIDWatch user's manual.
Descriptions below may contain abbreviations. Abbreviations and Capitalized
letters are preserved for the coherency with the event messages shown on LCD
screen or terminal.
Event Index
Controller Event
Alert:
[0104] Controller ALERT: DRAM Parity Error Detected
[0105] Controller <primary/ secondary> SDRAM ECC <multi-bits/ single-bit>
Error Detected
[0110] CHL:_ FATAL ERROR (_)
[0111] Controller ALERT: Redundant Controller Failure Detected
[0111] Controller NOTICE: Redundant Controller Firmware Updated
[0114] Controller ALERT: Power Supply Unstable or NVRAM Failed
Warning:
[0107] Memory Not Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config.
Event Messages
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notification:
[0181] Controller Initialization Completed
[0187] Memory is Now Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config.
[0189] NVRAM Factory Defaults Restored
[0189] NVRAM Restore from Disk is Completed
[0189] NVRAM Restore from File is Completed
Drive SCSI Channel/Drive Error
Drive:
Warning:
[1101] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unexpected Select Timeout
[1102] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Gross Phase/ Signal Error Detected
[1103] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unexpected Disconnect Encountered
[1104] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Negotiation Error Detected
[1105] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Timeout Waiting for I/ O to Complete
[1106] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: SCSI Parity/ CRC Error Detected
[1107] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Data Overrun/ Underrun Detected
[1108] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Invalid Status/ Sense Data Received (_)
[110f] CHL:_ LIP(_ _) Detected
[110f] CHL:_ SCSI Drive Channel Notification: SCSI Bus Reset Issued
[110f] CHL:_ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT: SCSI Bus Reset Issued
[1111] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unexpected Drive Not Ready
[1112] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Drive HW Error (_)
[1113] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Bad Block Encountered - _ (_)
[1114] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unit Attention Received
[1115] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Unexpected Sense Received (_)
[1116] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Block Reassignment Failed - _ (_)
[1117] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Block Successfully Reassigned - _ (_)
[1118] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Aborted Command (_)
[1142] SMART-CH:_ ID:_ Predictable Failure Detected (TEST)
[1142] SMART-CH:_ ID:_ Predictable Failure Detected
[1142] SMART-CH:_ ID:_ Predictable Failure Detected-Starting Clone
[1142] SMART-CH:_ ID:_ Predictable Failure Detected-Clone Failed
[11c1] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive NOTICE: Scan SCSI Drive Successful
Channel:
Warning:
[113f] CHL:_ ALERT: Redundant Loop Connection Error Detected on ID:_
[113f] CHL:_ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT: SCSI Channel Failure
[113f] CHL:_ ALERT: Fibre Channel Loop Failure Detected
[113f] CHL:_ ALERT: Redundant Loop for Chl:_ Failure Detected
[113f] CHL:_ ALERT: Redundant Path for Chl:_ ID:_ Expected but Not Found
[113f] CHL:_ ID:_ ALERT: Redundant Path for Chl:_ ID:_ Failure Detected
Notification:
[113f] CHL:_ NOTICE: Fibre Channel Loop Connection Restored
Infortrend
D-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[113f] CHL:_ ID:_ NOTICE: Redundant Path for Chl:_ ID:_ Restored
Logical Drive Event
Alert:
[2101] LG: <NA/ Logical Drive Index> Logical Drive ALERT: CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI
Drive Failure
[2103] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: Rebuild Failed
[2106] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: Add SCSI Drive Operation Failed
Warning:
[2102] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: Initialization Failed
[2104] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: Parity Regeneration Failed
[2105] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: Expansion Failed
[2111] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: CHL:_ ID:_ Clone Failed
Notification:
[2181] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Initialization
[2182] Initialization of Logical Drive _ Completed
[2183] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Rebuild
[2184] Rebuild of Logical Drive _ Completed
[2185] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Parity Regeneration
[2186] Parity Regeneration of Logical Drive _ Completed
[2187] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Expansion
[2188] Expansion of Logical Drive _ Completed
[2189] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Add SCSI Drive Operation
[218a] Add SCSI Drive to Logical Drive _ Completed
[218b] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Add SCSI Drive Operation Paused
[218c] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Continue Add SCSI Drive Operation
[21a1] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: CHL:_ ID:_ Starting Clone"
[21a2] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: CHL:_ ID:_ Clone Completed"
General Target Events
Alert:
SAF-TE Device:
[3f21] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: Power Supply Failure Detected (_)
[3f22] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: Cooling Fan Not Installed (_)
[3f22] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: Cooling Fan Failure Detected (_)
[3f23] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: Elevated Temperature Alert (_)
[3f24] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: UPS Power Failure Detected (_)
Controller on-board:
[3f23] Peripheral Device ALERT: CPU Temperature <high/ low threshold>
Temperature Detected (_._C )
[3f23] Peripheral Device ALERT: Board1 Temperature <high/ low threshold>
Temperature Detected (_._C )
[3f23] Peripheral Device ALERT: Board2 Temperature <high/ low threshold>
Event Messages
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Detected (_._C )
[3f22] Peripheral Device ALERT: Controller FAN _ Not Present or Failure
Detected
[3f22] Peripheral Device ALERT: Controller FAN _ <high/ low threshold>
Speed Detected (_RPM)
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: +3.3V <upper/ lower threshold> Voltage
Detected (_)
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: +5V <upper/ lower threshold> Voltage
Detected (_)
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: +12V <upper/ lower threshold> Voltage
Detected (_)
2
I C Device:
[3f23] Peripheral Device ALERT: Temperature Sensor _ Failure Detected
[3f23] Peripheral Device ALERT: Temperature Sensor _ Not Present
[3f23] Peripheral Device ALERT: <high/ low threshold> Temperature _
Detected (_(F/ C))
[3f22] Peripheral Device ALERT: FAN _ Failure Detected
[3f22] Peripheral Device ALERT: FAN _ Not Present
[3f22] Peripheral Device ALERT: <high/ low threshold> FAN _ Speed Detected
(_ RPM)
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: Power Supply _ Failure Detected
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: Power Supply _ Not Present
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: <high/ low threshold> Power Supply _
Voltage Detected (_)
[3f24] Peripheral Device ALERT: UPS _ AC Power Failure Detected
[3f24] Peripheral Device ALERT: UPS _ Battery Failure Detected
SES Devices:
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Power Supply _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Supported>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Power Supply _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Installed>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Power Supply _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Unknown Status>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Power Supply _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Available>!
[3f22] SES (C_ I_) Cooling element _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Supported>!
[3f22] SES (C_ I_) Cooling element _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
installed>!
[3f22] SES (C_ I_) Cooling element _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Unknown Status>!
[3f22] SES (C_ I_) Cooling element _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Available>!
[3f23] SES (C_ I_) Temperature Sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Supported>!
[3f23] SES (C_ I_) Temperature Sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not installed>!
[3f23] SES (C_ I_) Temperature Sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Infortrend
D-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unknown Status>!
[3f23] SES (C_ I_) Temperature Sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Available>!
[3f24] SES (C_ I_) UPS _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not Supported>!
[3f24] SES (C_ I_) UPS _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not installed>!
[3f24] SES (C_ I_) UPS _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Unknown Status>!
[3f24] SES (C_ I_) UPS _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not Available>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Voltage sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Supported>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Voltage sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
installed>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Voltage sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Unknown Status>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Voltage sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Available>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Current sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Supported>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Current sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
installed>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Current sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Unknown Status>!
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Current sensor _: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Available>!
General Peripheral Device:
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: Power Supply Failure Detected
[3f22] Cooling Fan Not Installed
[3f22] Cooling Fan Failure Detected
[3f24] Elevated Temperature Alert
[3f24] UPS Power Failure Detected
Notification:
SAF-TE Device:
[3fa2] SAF-TE Device (_) NOTICE: Fan Back On-Line (Idx:_)
[3fa3] SAF-TE Device (_) NOTICE: Temperature Back to Non-Critical Levels
(Idx:_)
[3fa1] SAF-TE Device (_) NOTICE: Power Supply Back On-Line (Idx:_ )
[3fa4] SAF-TE Device (_) NOTICE: UPS Power Back On-Line (Idx:_)
Controller Self Diagnostics:
[3fa3] CPU <high/ low threshold> Temperature Back To Non-Critical Levels (_
C )
[3fa3] Board _ <high/ low threshold> Temperature Back To Non-Critical Levels
(_ C)
[3fa1] +3.3V <upper/ lower threshold> Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits
[3fa1] +5V <upper/ lower threshold> Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits
[3fa1] +12V <upper/ lower threshold> Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits
Event Messages
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[3fa2] NOTICE: Controller FAN _ Back On-Line (_ RPM)
2
I C Device:
[3fa3] NOTICE: Temperature _ Back to Non-Critical Levels
[3fa3] NOTICE: Temperature _ is present
[3fa3] NOTICE: Temperature _ Back to Non-Critical Levels (_(C/ F))
[3fa2] NOTICE: FAN _ Back On-Line
[3fa2] NOTICE: FAN _ is Present
[3fa2] NOTICE: FAN _ Back On-Line
[3fa1] NOTICE: Power Supply _ Back On-Line
[3fa1] NOTICE: Power Supply _ is Present
[3fa1] NOTICE: Power Supply _ Back On-Line (<voltage>0
[3fa4] Peripheral Device NOTICE: UPS _ AC Power Back On-Line
[3fa4] Peripheral Device NOTICE: UPS _ Battery Back On-Line
SES Devices:
[3f21] SES (C_ I_) Power Supply _: Power Supply Failure Detected
[3f22] SES (C_ I_) Cooling element _: Cooling Fan Not Installed
[3f22] SES (C_ I_) Cooling element _: Cooling Fan Failure Detected
[3f23] SES (C_ I_) Temperature Sensor _: Elevated Temperature Alert
[3f24] SES (C_ I_) UPS _: UPS Power Failure Detected
General Peripheral Device:
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: Power Supply Failure Detected
[3f22] Cooling Fan Not Installed
[3f22] Cooling Fan Failure Detected
[3f24] Elevated Temperature Alert
[3f24] UPS Power Failure Detected
Infortrend
D-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controller Event
Alert:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
DRAM Parity Error Detected
[0104] Controller ALERT: DRAM Parity Error Detected
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
A DRAM parity error encountered.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Contact your RAID system supplier and replace with new module(s) if
necessary.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
DRAM Parity Error Detected
[0105] Controller <primary/ secondary> SDRAM ECC <multi-
bits/ single-bit> Error Detected
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
A DRAM ECC detected error encountered.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Contact your RAID system supplier and replace with new module(s) if
necessary.?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
CHL:_ FATAL ERROR (_)
[0110] CHL:_ FATAL ERROR (_)
!Alert
One channel has failed.
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check if cable connectors are firmly seated and SCSI buses are
properly terminated. With Fibre channels, disconnection may happen
on the host side, hub or switch, etc. In redundant mode, the
counterpart controller will take over and you may ask your system
provider to remove the controller with a failed channel for a repair.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Redundant Ctlr Failure Detected
[0111] Controller ALERT: Redundant Controller Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
One of the RAID controllers has failed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Contact your RAID system supplier for a replacement controller.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Redundant Ctlr Failure Detected
[0111] Controller NOTICE: Redundant Controller Firmware Updated
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
RAID controllers have finished shifting I/ Os, resetting, and have come
online with new version of firmware.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Event Messages
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
Power Supply Unstable or NVRAM Failed
[0114] Controller ALERT: Power Supply Unstable or NVRAM Failed
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The output voltage drops below preset thresholds or NVRAM
component failure.
Warning:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Memory Not Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config.
[0107] Memory Not Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config.
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
The installed size of memory does not support current configuration.
Try increase memory size.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Notification:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Controller Initialization Completed
[0181] Controller Initialization Completed
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Controller initialization completed
Happens?
What to
Do?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Memory is Now Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config.
[0187] Memory is Now Sufficient to Fully Support Current Config.
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Memory size has been expanded.
Happens?
What to
Do?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
NVRAM Factory Defaults Restored
[0189] NVRAM Factory Defaults Restored
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Firmware settings have been restored to factory defaults. Options for
restoring defaults are not available to users and are only reserved for
qualified engineers.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Infortrend
D-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
NVRAM Restore from Disk is Completed
[0189] NVRAM Restore from Disk is Completed
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Firmware configuration data previously saved to disk is restored.
Happens?
What to
Do?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
NVRAM Restore from File is Completed
[0189] NVRAM Restore from File is Completed
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Firmware configuration data previously saved as a file is restored.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Event Messages
D-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drive SCSI Channel/Drive Error
Drive
Warning:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ SCSI Target ALERT
[1101] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unexpected Select Timeout
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive SCSI target select timeout. The specified hard drive cannot be
selected by the controller. Whether the drive has been removed, or the
cabling/ termination/ canister is out of order.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check drive-side SCSI cable/ termination and drive canister
connections.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C:_ I:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Gross Phase/ Signal Error Detected
[1102] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Gross Phase/ Signal Error
Detected
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI phase/ signal abnormality detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C:_ I:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unexpected Disconnect Encountered
[1103] CHL:_ I:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unexpected Disconnect
Encountered
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI target unexpected disconnect detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check cabling/ termination and canister connections.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Negotiation Error Detected
[1104] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Negotiation Error Detected
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI target sync/ wide negotiation abnormality detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Infortrend
D-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C:_ I:_ Timeout Waiting for I/ O
[1105] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Timeout Waiting for I/ O to
Complete
Event Type
What
Happens?
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI target I/ O timeout. Possible drive-side
cabling/ termination and canister connection abnormal or drive
malfunctioning.
What to
Do?
Check drive-side cabling/ termination/ canister connections and hard
drive.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C:_ I:_ Parity Error
[1106] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: SCSI Parity/ CRC Error
Detected
Event Type
What
Happens?
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI channel parity or CRC error detected to the specified
hard drive.
What to
Do?
Check drive-side cable/ termination or drive canister connection.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C:_ I:_ Data Overrun/ Underrun
[1107] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Data Overrun/ Underrun
Detected
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI target data overrun or underrun detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check drive-side cabling/ termination/ canister connections and hard
drive.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C:_ I:_ Invalid Data Received
[1108] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Invalid Status/ Sense Data
Received (Sense_key Sense_code)
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI invalid status/ sense data received from target
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check cabling/ termination/ canister connections.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ LIP(__) Detected
[110F] CHL:_ LIP(__) Detected
"Alert
Fibre Loop LIP issued.
!Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press [ESC] to clear the error message.
Event Messages
D-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ SCSI Drive Channel Notification: SCSI Bus Reset Issued
[110f] CHL:_ SCSI Drive Channel Notification: SCSI Bus Reset Issued
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
SCSI bus reset issued
Happens?
What to
Do?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unexpected Drive Not Ready
[1111] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: CHL:_ ID:_ Clone Failed
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive installed does not respond with "Ready"
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check hard drive and drive-side cabling/ termination/ canister
connections.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C:_ I:_ Drive HW Error
[1112] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Drive HW Error (Sense_key
Sense_code)
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-Side SCSI drive unrecoverable hardware error reported
Happens?
What to
Do?
Replace hard drive and the rebuild may begin with a hot-spare or a
replacement drive
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C=_ I=_ Bad Block Encountered
[1113] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Bad Block Encountered -
Block_number (Sense_key Sense_code)
Event Type
What
Happens?
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Hard drive unrecoverable media error reported. A bad block is
encountered in the specified hard drive. The RAID controller will ask
the hard drive to retry.
What to
Do?
Press [ESC] to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C=_ I=_ Unit Attention Received
[1114] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Target ALERT: Unit Attention Received
(Sense_key Sense_code)
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI target unit attention received.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check hard drive and drive-side cabling/ termination/ canister
connections.
Infortrend
D-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C=_ I=_ Unexpected Sense Rec.
[1115] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Unexpected Sense Received
(Sense_key Sense_code)
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side SCSI drive unexpected sense data received.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Checking drive-side cabling/ termination/ drive canister connections.
This might result from a bad signal quality of poor connection, etc.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C=_ I=_ Block Reassign Failed
[1116] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Block Reassignment Failed -
Block_number (Sense_key Sense_code)
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Drive-side block reassignment failed. Drive will be considered failed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press [ESC] to clear this error message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C=_ I=_ Block Success Reassign
[1117] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Block Successfully Reassigned –
Block_number (Sense_key Sense_code)
Event Type
What
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Bad blocks have been reassigned successfully
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press [ESC] to clear this message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
CHL=_ ID=_ Aborted Command
[1118] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive ALERT: Aborted Command (Sense_key
Sense_code)
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
SCSI drive aborted command reported
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press [ESC] to clear the error message.
Event Messages
D-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
C:_ I:_ Predictable Failure Detected (TEST)
[1142] SMART-CH:_ ID:_ Predictable Failure Detected (TEST)
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
This message appears when simulating the SMART detect function.
This message shows that your drives support SMART functions.
Press [ESC] to clear the error message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ Predictable Failure Detected
[1142] SMART-CH:_ ID:_ Predictable Failure Detected
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
SMART-related errors detected. This message will only be displayed
when SMART detect is enabled.
Happens?
What to
Do?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ Predictable Failure Detected-Starting Clone
[1142] SMART-CH:_ ID:_ Predictable Failure Detected-Starting Clone
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
SMART errors detected, a spare is conducted to rebuild and to replace
the faulty drive. This is a response to the preset scheme.
Happens?
What to
Do?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ Predictable Failure Detected-Clone Failed
[1142] SMART-CH:_ ID:_ Predictable Failure Detected-Clone Failed
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
SMART errors detected and a spare is conducted to rebuild. The
cloning process is halted due to power interruption and some other
reasons.
Happens?
What to
Do?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ Scan SCSI Drive Successful
[11c1] CHL:_ ID:_ SCSI Drive NOTICE: Scan SCSI Drive Successful
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Scanning a new drive from on a SCSI drive successful.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Infortrend
D-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel:
Warning:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Chl:_ Redundant Loop Connection Error Detected on ID:_
[113f] CHL:_ ALERT: Redundant Loop Connection Error Detected on
ID:_
Event Type
What
Happens?
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
One of the dual loop members may have failed or been disconnected.
Make sure all channels are properly connected and topological
configuration properly set.
What to
Do?
Check the redundant fibre channel loop connection is right.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Chl:_ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT: SCSI Channel Failure
[113f] CHL:_ SCSI Drive Channel ALERT: SCSI Channel Failure
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Specific drive channel may have failed or disconnected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Chl:_ Fibre Channel Loop Failure Detected
[113f] CHL:_ ALERT: Fibre Channel Loop Failure Detected
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Fibre channel loop failure is detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Chl:_ Redundant Loop for Chl:_ Failure Detected
[113f] CHL:_ ALERT: Redundant loop for Chl:_ Failure Detected
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
The pair loop has failed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Chl:_ Redundant Path for Chl:_ ID:_ Expected but Not Found
[113f] CHL:_ ALERT: Redundant Path for Chl:_ ID:_ Expected but Not
Found
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Disconnection with the pair loop may have occurred.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Event Messages
D-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
C:_ I:_ -Red Path for C:_ I:_ Failure Detected
[113f] CHL:_ ID:_ ALERT: Redundant Path for Chl:_ ID:_ Failure
Detected
Event Type
What
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Disconnection with the pair loop may have occurred.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Notification:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ Fibre Chl Loop Connection Restored
[113f] CHL:_ NOTICE: Fibre Channel Loop Connection Restored
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Fibre loop connection restored
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ -Red Path C:_ I:_ Restored
[113f] CHL:_ ID:_ NOTICE: Redundant Path for Chl:_ ID:_ Restored
"Alert "Warning !Notification
The connection with pair loop regained.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Infortrend
D-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Logical Drive Event:
Alert:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
CHL:_ ID=_ Drive Failure
[2101] LG: <NA/ Logical Drive Index> Logical Drive ALERT: CHL:_
ID:_ SCSI Drive Failure
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The specified hard drive in the specified logical drive has failed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
If a spare is available, the controller will automatically start rebuild. If
there is no spare, replace the faulty drive and rebuild will be
automatically initiated.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG ALERT: Rebuild Failed!
[2103] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: Rebuild Failed
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Logical drive rebuild failed. It could result from one of the following
reasons:
Happens?
1. The rebuild has been canceled by user.
2. The drive used for rebuild might have failed during rebuild.
3. Bad blocks are encountered on another member drive during the
rebuild.
What to
Do?
Carefully identify and replace the faulty drive and perform logical
drive initialization again.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG ALERT: Add Drive Failed!
[2106] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: Add SCSI Drive Operation Failed
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
This is a fatal error encountered when a new drive is being added to an
existing logical drive. It could result from one of the following
reasons:
Happens?
1. Unrecoverable hardware failure during the expansion process.
2. Errors are found concurrently on two member drives.
3. Bad blocks are encountered on another member drive during the
expansion.
What to
Do?
Data in the target logical drive will be lost.
Event Messages
D-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG ALERT: Init Failed!
[2102] LG:_ Logical Drive ALERT: Initialization Failed
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
Logical drive initialization failed. It could result from one of the
following reasons:
Happens?
1. Logical drive initialization canceled by user.
2. On of the member drives failed during logical drive initialization.
3. One of the member drive encountered bad block.
Carefully identify and replace the faulty drive and let the logical drive
re-initialize and start rebuild.
What to
Do?
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Parity Regen Failed !
[2104] LG_ Logical Drive ALERT: Parity Regeneration Failed
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
During the parity-regeneration process, one member drive has failed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Rebuild the logical drive first, then perform "Regenerate Parity."
Regeneration can only be performed on a "Good" (GD) logical drive.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ Clone Failed!
[2111] LG_ Logical Drive ALERT: CHL:_ ID:_ Clone Failed
"Alert
!Warning
"Notification
The clone drive operation has failed or halted by system error.
Happens?
What to
Do?
One of the member drives might have failed during the process.
Replace the faulty drive and let the system rebuild. Data on the source
drive (from where the spare clone data) may still be intact. Locate and
replace the faulty drive and rebuild.
Notification:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Starting Init
[2181] LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Initialization
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
The controller starts initialize the logical drive.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Initialization Completed!
[2182] Initialization of Logical Drive_ Completed
"Alert "Warning !Notification
The initialization process of LG_ has been completed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message. See if host computer can recognize
the RAID drive.
2-Line LCD
LG=_ Starting Rebuild !
Infortrend
D-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal
Event Type
What
[2183] LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Rebuild
"Alert "Warning !Notification
The rebuild process has begun.
Happens?
What to
Do?
This is the message displayed when a stand-by spare is available or
when a faulty drive is replaced. The controller automatically detects a
drive for rebuild.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Rebuild Complete
[2184] Rebuild of Logical Drive_ Completed
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
The controller has successfully rebuilt a logical drive.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Starting Parity Regen
[2185] LG=_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Parity Regeneration
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Start regenerating parity of a logical drive.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Parity Regen Completed
[2186] Parity Regeneration of Logical Drive_ Completed
"Alert "Warning !Notification
The regeneration process completed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Start Expand
[2187] LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Expansion
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Start expanding the logical drive.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Event Messages
D-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Expansion Completed
[2188] Expansion of Logical Drive_ Completed
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Logical drive expansion completed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Add SCSI Drive Operation
[2189] LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Starting Add SCSI Drive Operation
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Expansion “by adding new drive” has started.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Add SCSI Drive Completed
[218a] Add SCSI Drive to Logical Drive_ Completed
"Alert "Warning !Notification
The expansion “by adding new drive” is completed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
LG=_ Add SCSI Drive Paused
[218b] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Add SCSI Drive Operation Paused
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
The expansion process is halted by:
Happens?
1. Logical drive expansion canceled by user.
2. On of the member drives failed during logical drive initialization.
3. One of the member drive encountered bad block
4. Hardware failure
What to
Do?
If the target logical drive has failed, try to rebuild the logical drive.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
LG=_ Continue Add SCSI Drive
[218c] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: Continue Add SCSI Drive
Operation
Event Type
What
Happens?
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
The target logical drive has been restored to its previous status, and the
add drive operation may continue.
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Infortrend
D-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ Starting Clone
[21a1] LG_ Logical Drive NOTICE: CHL:_ ID:_ Starting Clone
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
This message is displayed when a member drive is manually cloned to
a spare, or that a spare is automatically applied to clone a faulty
member according to the preset scheme.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message. When cloning is completed,
carefully identify and replace the faulty drive.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C:_ I:_ Clone Completed
[21a2] LG:_ Logical Drive NOTICE: CHL:_ ID:_ Clone Complted
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
The clone process has been completed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message. When cloning is completed,
carefully identify and replace the faulty drive.
Event Messages
D-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Target Events:
Alert:
SAF-TE Device:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
SAFTE_: Power (_) Failure Detected
[3F21] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: Power Supply Failure Detected (_)
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Power supply failure detected by SAF-TE enclosure management.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check the power supply module, contact your RAID system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
SAFTE_: Fan (_) Not Installed
[3F22] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: Cooling Fan Not Installed (_)
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The installed fan (_) is missing.
Happens?
What to
Do?
See if the fan has been removed or a general failure has occurred.
Contact your system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
SAFTE_: Fan (_) Failure Detected
[3F22] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: Cooling Fan Failure Detected (_)
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The cooling fan has failed.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Contact your system supplier for further diagnosis.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
SAF-TE_: Elevated Temperature Alert
[3F23] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: Elevated Temperature Alert (_)
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
High temperature detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
High temperature may lead to malfunctioning and system failure. The
most probable cause is the cooling system failure. Contact your system
provider immediately.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
SAF-TE_: UPS Power Failure
[3F24] SAF-TE Device (_) ALERT: UPS Power Failure Detected (_)
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
UPS Power Failure.
Happens?
What to
Do?
If UPS protection is lost, inconsistency may occur to cached data upon
power interruption. Auto-switch to write-through cache upon the
detection of UPS failure will be available in future release of firmware.
Contact your system provider for help.
Infortrend
D-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controller On-board:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
CPU (_._) Temp Detected
[3f23] Peripheral Device ALERT: CPU Temperature <high/ low
threshold> Temperature Detected (_._C)
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The detected CPU temperature is higher or lower than the preset
thresholds.
Check the enclosure ventilation condition. If necessary, temperature
thresholds can be modified to suit different working conditions.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Board 1 (_._) Temp Detected
[3f23] Peripheral Device ALERT: Board 1 Temperature <high/ low
threshold> Temperature Detected (_._C)
Event Type
What
Happens?
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The detected main circuit board temperature is higher or lower than
the preset thresholds.
What to
Do?
Check the enclosure ventilation condition. If necessary, temperature
thresholds can be modified to suit different working conditions.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Board 2 (_._) Temp Detected
[3F21] ALERT: +5V Low Voltage Detected (current_voltage)
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The detected main circuit board temperature is higher or lower than
the preset thresholds.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check the enclosure ventilation condition. If necessary, temperature
thresholds can be modified to suit different working conditions.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Fan_ Not Installed
[3F22] Peripheral Device ALERT: Controller FAN_ Not Present or
Failure Detected
Event Type
What
Happens?
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
This event refers to the cooling fan in front panel. Check cable
connection and see if the fan(s) has failed.
What to
Do?
Check cable connection and see if the fan(s) is rotating. Some OEM
solutions may have removed front panel fans and the “fan detect”
signals should be disabled by setting jumpers. Please refer to your
Hardware Manual for more details.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Fan (_._) Speed Detected
[3F22] Peripheral Device ALERT: Controller FAN_ <high/ low
threshold> Speed Detected (_RPM)
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
This event refers to the cooling fan in front panel. Higher or Lower
rotation speed detected.
Contact your system vendor for replacing the cooling fan.
Event Messages
D-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
High/ Low +3.3V Voltage Detected (_.__)
[3F21] Peripheral Device ALERT: +3.3V <upper/ lower threshold>
Voltage Detected (_)
Event Type
What
Happens?
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The detected +3.3V voltage source is now higher or lower than the
preset voltage threshold.
What to
Do?
Check power supply condition, voltage threshold settings and contact
the your system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
High/ Low +5V Voltage Detected (_.__)
[3F21] Peripheral Device ALERT: +5V <upper/ lower threshold>
Voltage Detected (_)
Event Type
What
Happens?
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The detected +5V voltage source is now higher or lower than the
preset voltage threshold.
What to
Do?
Check power supply condition, voltage threshold settings and contact
your system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
High/ Low +12V Voltage Detected (_.__)
[3F21] Peripheral Device ALERT: +12V <upper/ lower> Voltage
Detected (_)
Event Type
What
Happens?
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The detected +12V voltage source is higher or lower than the preset
voltage threshold.
What to
Do?
Check power supply condition, voltage threshold settings and contact
your system supplier.
Infortrend
D-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
I C Device:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Temp Sensor_ Failure Detected
[3F23] Peripheral Device ALERT: Temperature Sensor_ Failure
Detected
Event Type
What
Happens?
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The designated temperature sensor has failed. This may be caused by
mistakes with device target setting or device failure.
2
What to
Do?
Check I C cable connection and contact your system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
Temp Sensor_ Not Present
[3F23] Peripheral Device ALERT: Temperature Sensor_ Not Present
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The controller failed to detect the presence of the designated
temperature sensor.
2
2
Check I C cable connection, I C device setting, and contact your
system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
High/ Low (_) Temperature_ Detected
[3F23] Peripheral Device ALERT: <high/ low threshold> Temperature_
Detected (_(F/ C))
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Critical high or low temperature detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check enclosure ventilation status, and then contact your system
provider for help. .
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Fan_ Failure Detected
[3F22] Peripheral Device ALERT: FAN_ Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
2
Cooling fan failure detected by I C enclosure management.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check cooling fan(s) status, and contact your system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Fan_ Not Present
[3F22] Peripheral Device ALERT: FAN_ Not Present
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The controller failed to detect the presence of the designated
temperature sensor.
Happens?
2
2
What to
Do?
Check I C cable connection, I C device setting, and contact your
system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Fan (_._) Speed Detected (_RPM)
Event Messages
D-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal
[3F22] Peripheral Device ALERT: <high/ low threshold> Fan_ Speed
Detected (_RPM)
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Enclosure fans higher or lower rotation speed detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Contact your system vendor for replacing the cooling fan.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Power Supply_ Failure Detected
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: Power Supply_ Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Power supply failure detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Contact your system provider for help.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Power Supply_ Not Present
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: Power Supply_ Not Present
!Alert "Warning "Notification
Could not detect power supply.
Happens?
What to
Do?
2
2
Check I C cable connection, I C device setting, and contact your
system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
High/ Low Power Supply_ Voltage Detected
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: <high/ low threshold> Power
Supply_ Voltage Detected
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Voltage exceeding preset thresholds
Happens?
What to
Do?
Contact your system supplier.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
UPS_ AC power Failure Detected
[3f24] Peripheral Device ALERT: UPS_ AC Power Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
UPS power failure.
Happens?
What to
Do?
If UPS protection is lost, inconsistency may occur to cached data upon
power interruption. Contact your system provider for help.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
UPS_ Battery Failure Detected
[3f24] Peripheral Device ALERT: UPS_ Battery Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
UPS battery failure.
Happens?
What to
Do?
If UPS protection is lost, inconsistency may occur to cached data upon
power interruption. Contact your system provider for help.
Infortrend
D-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Messages
D-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SES Device:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Power Supply_: Device Not Supported
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Power Supply_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Supported>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Unrecognizable device type.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Power Supply_: Device Not Installed
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Power Supply_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Installed>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The installed power supply is missing.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Power Supply_: Device Unknown Status
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Power Supply_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Unknown Status>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Device reports unknown status strings.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Power Supply_: Device Not Available
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Power Supply_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Available>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
Device missing???
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Cooling element_: Device Not Supported
[3f22] SES (C_I_) Cooling element_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Supported>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
Unrecognizable device type
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help.
2-Line LCD
(_._) Cooling element_: Device Not Installed
Infortrend
D-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal
[3f22] SES (C_I_) Cooling element_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Installed>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
The installed device is missing
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check loop connection and contact your system provider for help.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Cooling element_: Device Unknown Status
[3f22] ] SES (C_I_) Cooling element_: <Vendor descriptor
strings/ Device Unknown Status>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Device reports unknown status strings.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Cooling element_: Device Not Available
[3f22] ] SES (C_I_) Cooling element_: <Vendor descriptor
strings/ Device Not Available>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
Device missing???
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Temp Sensor_: Device Not Supported
[3f23] SES (C_I_) Temperature Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor
strings/ Device Not Supported>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Temp Sensor_: Device Not Installed
[3f23] SES (C_I_) Temperature Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor
strings/ Device Not Installed>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
(_._) Temp Sensor_: Device Unknown Status
Event Messages
D-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal
[3f23] SES (C_I_) Temperature Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor
strings/ Device Unknown Status>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Temp Sensor_: Device Not Available
[3f23] SES (C_I_) Temperature Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor
strings/ Device Not Available>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
(_._) UPS_: Device Not Supported
[3f24] SES (C_I_) UPS_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Supported>!
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Voltage monitor detects the abnormal voltage has back to the normal
Happens?
range.
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) UPS_: Device Not Installed
[3f24] SES (C_I_) UPS_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Installed>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
(_._) UPS_: Device Unknown Status
[3f24] SES (C_I_) UPS_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Unknown
Status>!
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
(_._) UPS_: Device Not Available
Infortrend
D-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal
[3f24] SES (C_I_) UPS_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device Not
Available>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Voltage Sensor_: Device Not Supported
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Voltage Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Supported>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Voltage Sensor_: Device Not Installed
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Voltage Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Installed>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Voltage Sensor_: Device Unknown Status
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Voltage Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Unknown Status>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Voltage Sensor_: Device Not Available
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Voltage Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Available>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
(_._) Current Sensor_: Device Not Supported
Event Messages
D-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Current Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Supported>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Current Sensor_: Device Not Installed
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Current Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Installed>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Current Sensor_: Device Unknown Status
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Current Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Unknown Status>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
(_._) Current Sensor_: Device Not Available
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Current Sensor_: <Vendor descriptor strings/ Device
Not Available>!
Event Type
What
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Infortrend
D-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Peripheral Device:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
Power Supply Failure Detected
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: Power Supply Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
"Notification
"Notification
"Notification
"Notification
Power supply failure detected
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
Cooling Fan Not Installed
[3f22] Cooling Fan Not Installed
!Alert
"Warning
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
Cooling Fan Failure Detected
[3f22] Cooling Fan Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
Elevated Temperature Alert
[3f24] Elevated Temperature Alert
!Alert
"Warning
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
UPS Power Failure Detected
[3f24] UPS Power Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Event Messages
D-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notification:
SAF-TE Device:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
SAF-TE_: Fan(_) Back to On-Line
[3fa2] SAF-TE (_) NOTICE: Fan Back On-Line
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Failed fan back to on-line state.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
SAF-TE_: Temp(_) Back Non-Critical
[3fa3] SAF-TE Device (_) NOTICE: Temperature Back to Non-Critical
Levels (_)
Event Type
What
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Temperature back to non-critical level.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
SAF-TE_: Power Supply Back On-Line
[3fa1] SAF-TE Device (_) NOTICE: Power Supply Back On-Line (_)
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Power supply restored.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
SAF-TE_: UPS Back On-Line
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
[3fa4] SAF-TE Device (_) NOTICE: UPS Power Back On-Line
"Critical
"Warning
!Notification
UPS power restored..
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Infortrend
D-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controller Self Diagnostics:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
CPU Temp Back Non-Critical
[3fa3] CPU <high/ low threshold> Temperature Back to Non-Critical
Levels
Event Type
What
"Critical
"Warning
!Notification
CPU operating temperature back to non-critical level.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Board_ Temp Back Non-Critical
[3fa3] Board_ <high/ low> Temperature Back To Non-Critical Levels
"Critical
"Warning
!Notification
Board_ temperature back to non-critical level.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
+3.3V Back to Non-Critical
[3fa1] +3.3V <high/ low> Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits
"Critical "Warning !Notification
+3.3V voltage source back within acceptable limits.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
+5V Back to Non-Critical
[3fa1] +5V <high/ low> Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits
"Critical
"Warning
!Notification
+5V voltage source back within acceptable limits.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
+12V Back to Non-Critical
[3fa1] +12V <high/ low> Voltage Back within Acceptable Limits
"Critical "Warning !Notification
+12V voltage source back within acceptable limits.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Event Messages
D-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Contlr FAN_ Back On-Line (__)
[3fa2] NOTICE: Controller FAN_ Back On-Line (_RPM)
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Controller fan operating status back to normal
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2
I C Device:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
Temp_ Back to Non-Critical
[3fa3] NOTICE: Temperature_ Back to Non-Critical Levels
"Alert "Warning
Detected temperature back to non-critical levels.
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
!Notification
!Notification
!Notification
!Notification
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
Temperature_ is present
[3fa3] NOTICE: Temperature_ is present
"Alert
"Warning
Temperature sensor_ detected.
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Happens?
What to
Do?
FAN_ Back On-Line
[3fa2] NOTICE: FAN_ Back On-Liine
"Alert
"Warning
FAN_ back online.
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
FAN_ is present
[3fa2] NOTICE: FAN_ is present
"Alert
"Warning
FAN_ detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Infortrend
D-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Power Supply_ Back On-Line
[3fa1] NOTICE: Power Supply_ Back On-Line
"Alert
"Warning
!Notification
Power supply back online.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Power Supply_ is present
[3fa1] NOTICE: Power Supply_ is present
"Alert
Power supply_ detected.
"Warning
!Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
UPS_ AC Power Back On-Line
[3fa4] Peripheral Device NOTICE: UPS_ AC Power Back On-Line
"Alert "Warning !Notification
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
UPS_ AC Power Back On-Line.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
UPS_ Battery Back On-Line
[3fa4] Peripheral Device NOTICE: UPS_ Battery Back On-Line
"Alert
UPS_ battery back online.
"Warning
!Notification
Happens?
What to
Do?
Press <ESC> to clear the message.
Event Messages
D-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SES Device:
Alert:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Power Supply_ Failure Detected
[3f21] SES (C_I_) Power Supply_: Power Supply Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
Power supply failure detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check power module status and contact your supplier for a
replacement unit.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Cooling Fan_ Not Installed
[3f22] SES (C_I_) Cooling element_: Cooling Fan Not Installed
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
Cooling fan missing or not detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check proper fan installation or contact your supplier to replace a
failed unit.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Cooling Fan_ Failure Detected
[3f22] SES (C_I_) Cooling element_: Cooling Fan Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
Contact your system provider for an immediate replacement of fan
Happens?
modules.
What to
Do?
Contact your system provider for an immediate replacement of fan
modules.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
C_I_: Elevated Temperature Alert
[3f23] SES (C_I_) Temperature Sensor_: Elevated Temperature Alert
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
Detected temperature exceeding safety range.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check cooling fan status. Contact your system provider for an
immediate replacement of fan modules.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
UPS Power Failure Detected
[3f24] SES (C_I_) UPS_: UPS Power Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
UPS power failure detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check UPS status. If power should fail and UPS is not able to sustain
power, data loss might occur.
Infortrend
D-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Peripheral Device:
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Power Supply Failure Detected
[3f21] Peripheral Device ALERT: Power Supply Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
Power Supply Failure Detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check power module status and contact your supplier for a
replacement unit.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Cooling Fan_ Not Installed
[3f22] Cooling Fan Not Installed
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
Cooling fan missing or not detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check proper fan installation or contact your supplier to replace a
failed unit.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Cooling Fan_ Failure Detected
[3f22] Cooling Fan_ Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
Cooling fan failure detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Contact your system provider for an immediate replacement of fan
modules.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
Elevated Temperature Alert
[3f24] Elevated Temperature Alert
!Alert
"Warning
" Notification
General overheating warning.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check cooling fan status and proper installation of dummy plate.
Consult your enclosure vendor’s document for probable cause.
2-Line LCD
Terminal
Event Type
What
UPS Power Failure Detected
[3f24] UPS Power Failure Detected
!Alert
"Warning
"Notification
UPS device failure detected.
Happens?
What to
Do?
Check UPS status. If power should fail and UPS is not able to sustain
power, data loss might occur.
Event Messages
D-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Index
Background firmware
download
Bad block auto-
reassignment
Basic RAID
B-2
B-7
B-1
Management
Battery Support
Baud rate
10-17
3-1
beeper, mute
5-34, 7-34
A
Access Mode: Read
Only or Read/Write
Active-to-Active
Configuration
Active-to-Standby
Configuration
8-19
10-11, 10-17
10-17
C
Cache Dirty
4-7
Percentage: LCD
cache parameters
Cache Status
Cache Synchronization
caching parameters
Caching Parameters:
LCD
Caching Parameters:
terminal
Change Password:
LCD
Change Password:
terminal
Channel failure
protection
Channel Mode
channel mode,
redefining
Channel Mode: Fibre
channel mode: viewing
and redefining
check time, periodic
auto-detection of failed
drive swap
7-1~2
6-1
10-17
Adding a SCSI
5-26
Channel’s ID: LCD
Adding a SCSI ID:
terminal
Adding Drive to a
Logical Drive
Adding New Drive
Advanced Firmware
Features
Assign Spare Drives:
terminal
Assigning a Logical
Drive Name: LCD
Assigning Logical Drive
Name: terminal
Assigning Spare Drive:
LCD
Assigning Spare Drive:
terminal
Auto cache flush
Auto recovery from
logical drive failure
Auto-Failback
7-26
7-1~2
5-1, 5-3~4
12-4
7-1
5-34
7-34
1-14
12-4
B-2
7-7
5-18
7-17
5-14
7-15
B-5
7-25
8-6
5-25
B-2
B-2
9-23
10-11
B-7
Choosing Member
Drives: LCD
Choosing Member
Drives: terminal
Choosing RAID Level:
terminal
5-6
7-6
7-6
9-6
Automatic engagement
of replacement
controller
automatic rebuild
Automatic Shutdown
1-9
B-8
Clone + Replace,
S.M.A.R.T.
Clone Failing Drive
9-2, B-8
B-1
Co-existing spares
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications
Channel: Fibre
Communications over
drive loops
concurrent rebuild in
RAID (0+1)
8-7
8-13
1-11
Creating a Logical
Volume: LCD
5-10
7-10
Creating a Logical
Volume: terminal
Creating LUN Masks
Creating Primary and
Secondary IDs
8-15
10-22, 10-29
Configuration on Disk
B-2
Configuration
Procedure: LUN
Filtering
8-20
Cylinder/Head/Sector
Mapping
9-16
Connecting Drives with
Fibre Channel Dual
Loop
8-10
D
Connection Type
Controller
Communications Over
Fibre Loops
Controller Failover and
Failback
Controller Failure
Controller Name: LCD
Controller Name:
terminal
8-10
8-12
Dedicated
8-12
5-33
5-16
5-17
7-17
5-27
7-27
7-17
7-17
Communications loops
default setting,
restoring
Deleting a Logical
Drive: LCD
Deleting a Partition of a
Logical Drive, LCD
Deleting a Partition of a
Logical Drive: terminal
Deleting a SCSI
Channel’s ID, LCD
Deleting a SCSI ID:
terminal
Deleting Logical Drive:
terminal
deleting partition of
logical drive
deleting SCSI ID
deleting spare drive,
global or local
10-9
10-13
5-37
7-37
controller naming
5-37, 7-37, 7-
39, 8-11
2-10
Controller Parameter
Settings
Controller Parameters:
LCD
Controller Parameters:
terminal
controller reset
controller temperature
sensors
5-37
7-37
7-27
7-24
5-35, 7-36
B-9
Deleting Spare Drive:
LCD
Deleting Spare Drive:
terminal
deleting, LUN
mappings
deleting, partition of
logical drive
deleting, SCSI channel
ID
deleting, spare drive,
global or local
Detect Only
Detect, Clone+Replace
Detect, Perpetual
Clone
Detection of Drive Hot
Swap Followed by Auto
Rebuild
5-25
7-24
5-22
5-17
5-27
5-25
Controller Unique
Identifier
8-11
5-37
7-39
4-6
Controller Unique
Identifier: LCD
Controller Unique
Identifier: terminal
Controller Voltage and
Temperature: LCD
Controller Voltage and
Temperature: terminal
controller voltage
monitors
Controller/Logical Drive
Shutdown
Copy and Replace
Drives
Creating a Logical
Drive: LCD
Creating a Logical
Drive: terminal
6-9
B-9
B-3
12-7
5-6
9-9
9-10
9-9
9-22
7-5
detection, idle drive
9-23
Index-2
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
failure
Disabling Password:
LCD
Disabling Password:
terminal
Disconnecting Support:
LCD
flash memory
C-1
1-8
1-8
5-35
7-36
5-32
7-32
flashing all SCSI drives
flashing selected SCSI
drives
Forcing Controller
Failover for Testing
format, low-level: LCD
format, low-level:
terminal
10-34
5-40
7-43
Disconnecting Support:
terminal
disk access delay time
Disk Array Parameters,
Advanced config.
Drive I/O timeout
Drive Identification
Drive Motor Spin-up
Drive side redundant
loop
9-20
9-25, 9-27
G
B-3
B-2
B-3
B-5
Gauge Range
6-1
1-6
7-24
global spare drive
global spare drive,
deleting
Global Spare: LCD
Global Spare: terminal
drive status
drives, viewing and
editing
6-6
7-22
5-15
7-16
Drive-side Parameters,
Advanced config.
Dynamic enclosure on-
lining
9-18
B-9
H
host application
2-2, 2-10
B-3
Host LUN Geometry
Host-side and Drive-
side SCSI Parameters,
Advanced Config
Host-side Maximum
Queued I/O count
9-11
E
Environment
management
Ethernet
Event Logs: terminal
event logs: viewing and
editing: LCD
B-7
B-3
3-1
6-10
4-6~7
I
event message
Expand Logical Drive
Expand Logical Volume
expansion in Windows
NT® Server
1-5
12-9
12-11
12-12
I/O timeout, SCSI
ID, explained
ID, SCSI, deleting
Identifying a Drive: LCD
Identifying Drive:
terminal
9-20
9-11
7-27
5-24
7-23
identifying drives
1-8, 5-24, 7-
23
F
idle drive failure
detection
Idle Drive Failure
Detection
Implementation to
S.M.A.R.T
In-band Fibre
In-band SCSI
Initial Screen: LCD
Initial Screen: terminal
JBOD
9-23
9-23
9-6
Fault Management
Fault Prevention
Fault-Tolerance
Fibre Channel
Parameters
Fibre Chip
Fibre Connection
Options
2-10
9-1
10-8
2-10
8-4
8-10
8-5
9-14
4-1
6-1
1-3
Filter Type: Include or
Exclude
8-18
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUN, explained
LUNs per Host SCSI ID
2-7, 9-11
9-13
L
M
LCD Title Display
Controller Name: LCD
LCD Title Display
Controller Name:
terminal
local spare drive,
deleting
Local Spare: LCD
Local Spare: terminal
Logical Drive
Assignments: terminal
Logical drive
identification
Logical Drive
Preferences: LCD
Logical Drive
Preferences: terminal
logical drive status:
LCD
logical drive status:
terminal
logical drive, assigning
a name
logical drive, deleting
logical drive, explained
logical drive: assigning
a name
logical drive: viewing
drive members
Logical Unit to Host
LUN Mapping
logical volume
Logical Volume Status:
LCD
Logical Volume Status:
terminal
Loop ID
5-37
7-37
Main Menu: terminal
management: drive
failure
manual rebuild
Mapping in redundant
config.: LCD
6-2
1-6
7-24
1-10
10-24
5-14
7-15
7-7
Mapping a Logical
Volume to Host LUN:
terminal
Mapping a Logical
Volume/Logical Drive
to Host LUN: LCD
Mapping System
Drives, Redundant
config.
Maximum concurrent
Host LUN connection
Maximum Drive
Capacity: LCD
Maximum Drive
Capacity: terminal
Maximum number of
logical drives
Maximum number of
logical volumes
Maximum number of
LUNs
Maximum number of
LUNs per Host ID
Maximum number of
partitions
Maximum Queued I/O
Count
maximum synchronous
transfer clock
7-13
5-13
B-1
5-6
10-7~8
7-6
4-2
B-3
5-7
6-4
5-18
7-6
7-17
1-1
7-18
B-1
B-1
B-1
7-16
8-16
B-1
B-1
1-1, 1-12~17
4-3
9-13
5-31, 7-31
6-5
8-4
5-40
7-43
maximum tag count
7-32, 9-21
low-level format: LCD
low-level format:
terminal
LUN Applicability
LUN Filtering
maximum tag count:
LCD
Maximum Tag Count:
terminal
5-32
7-32
5-31
7-31
9-13
8-20, 8-22,
B-5
maximum transfer
width: LCD
Maximum Transfer
Width: terminal
Media Scan
LUN mappings, viewing
and deleting: LCD
LUN mappings, viewing
and deleting: terminal
LUN Mask (ID Range)
Configuration
5-22
7-21
8-18
B-2
1-4
mirroring
Index-4
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode-1 RAID
Expansion
Mode-2 RAID
Expansion
B-4
B-4
partitioning the logical
volume
partitions, mapping
them to LUNs
1-15
2-9
motor spin-up
Multi-Threaded
Operation
mute beeper: LCD
Mute Beeper: terminal
9-18
B-3
pass-through SCSI
commands: LCD
Pass-through SCSI
Commands: terminal
password , disabling
password changing
Password Validation
Timeout: LCD
Password Validation
Timeout: terminal
password, setting a
new
Periodic Drive Check
Time
periodic drive swap
auto check
Peripheral Device Type
Peripheral Device Type
Parameters for Various
Operating Systems
Peripheral Device Type
Settings
5-22
7-21
5-34
7-34
7-36
5-34
5-37
N
7-39
7-35
9-22
9-23
naming logical drive
naming, controller
navigation keys in
terminal emulation
NRAID, disk spanning
Number of Tags
Reserved for each
Host-LUN Connection
NVRAM
5-18
7-37, 7-39
3-3, 3-11
1-3
9-12
9-14
9-15
B-2
9-16
9-3
9-6
8-6
O
Perpetual Clone, Clone
Failing Drive
Perpetual Clone:
S.M.A.R.T.
Operational Theory
Optimization Mode
Optimization Mode:
LCD
Optimization Mode:
terminal
Out-of-Band
Out-of-band
Configuration,
Redundant config.
2-7
2-3, 2-10
5-1
Primary and Secondary
Controller ID: Fibre
Primary Controller
primary controller,
setting SCSI ID/drive
channel for
primary ID, SCSI
channel setting: LCD
Primary/Secondary
Controller ID: terminal
7-1
10-16
7-27
3-4, 3-6
10-14
5-27
7-26
P
parity check
5-19, 5-32, 7-
31
Q
Parity Check: LCD
Parity Check: terminal
partition, deleting
partition, logical drive,
deleting
5-32
7-31
5-17
7-17
Quick Installation: LCD
Quick Installation:
terminal
4-1
6-2
Partitioning a Logical
Drive/Logical Volume:
LCD
Partitioning a Logical
Drive/Logical Volume:
terminal
5-12
7-11
R
RAID
RAID (0+1)
RAID (3+0)
7-6
1-17
1-17
Index-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAID (5+0)
1-17
assigning logical drives
to secondary
redundant controller,
automatic configuration
of
redundant controller,
explained
redundant controller, if
one fails
redundant controller,
manual configuration of
redundant controller,
starting up
10-20, 10-26
RAID 0
RAID 1
RAID 3
RAID 5
RAID Expansion:
Example
RAID Expansion
RAID expansion with
logical volume
RAID Level: LCD
RAID Levels
1-4
1-4
1-5
10-8
10-25, 10-32
10-21, 10-28
10-22, 10-28
5-5~6
1-5
12-12
12-1
1-16
5-6
1-2
2-4
B-1
1-1
1-2
1-4
redundant controller:
automatic configuration
of: LCD
Regenerate Parity
Regenerating Logical
Drive Parity: LCD
Regenerating Logical
Drive Parity: terminal
Replace after Clone,
Clone Failing Drive
Replacing a Failed Unit
Reset Controller: LCD
Reset Controller:
terminal
Restore NVRAM from
Disks: LCD
Restore NVRAM from
Disks: terminal
Restoring the Default
Setting: LCD
rolling firmware
B-7
5-19
RAID, advantages
RAID, definition of
RAID, level (0+1), disk
striping with mirroring
RAID, level 0, disk
striping
RAID, level 1, disk
mirroring
RAID, level 3, disk
striping with dedicated
parity disk
7-19, 7-21
9-2
1-4
1-4
1-5
10-11
5-35
7-36
5-36
7-38
5-33
B-7
RAID, level 5, striping
with interspersed parity
RAID-Based Mapping
RCC
1-5
8-14
8-7
9-27
rebuild priority
Rebuild Settings: LCD
Rebuild Settings:
terminal
rebuild, automatic
rebuild, logical drive
Rebuilding a Logical
Drive: LCD
Rebuilding Logical
Drive: terminal
rebuilding, logical drive
Redefining Channel
Mode: LCD
Redefining Channel
Mode: terminal
Redundant
Configuration, Fibre
interface
redundant
configuration, SCSI
interface
5-14~15
7-15
upgrade
RS-232: configuration
via front panel
3-2
1-9
5-18
5-18
S
7-18
S.M.A.R.T.
9-1~2, 9-5~8,
B-6
5-18
5-25
SAF-TE and S.E.S.
Enclosure Monitoring
SAF-TE, periodic check
time
SAF-TE/S.E.S. polling
period
Sample Configuration:
LUN Filtering
Saving NVRAM to
Disks: LCD
9-22
9-22
B-9
7-25
10-3
8-20
5-36
10-2
Saving NVRAM to
7-38
redundant controller,
10-23, 10-29
Index-6
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disks: terminal
Scanning New Drive:
terminal
Scanning New Drive:
LCD
SCSI target/drive
channel: LCD
Secondary Controller
Secondary Controller
ID
5-30
7-23
5-23
10-16
8-6
SCSI channel ID,
deleting
SCSI channel ID,
setting
SCSI channel primary
ID, setting
5-27
secondary controller,
setting SCSI ID/drive
channel
secondary ID SCSI
channel, setting
Serial Port
7-28
5-28
5-26
5-27
3-1
SCSI channel
secondary ID, setting
SCSI channel
terminator
SCSI channel
terminator
SCSI channel,
explained
SCSI Channel’s Status:
terminal
5-28
serial port: connection
and setup
3-1, 3-6
5-28
Setting a New
Password: terminal
Setting a Primary
Controller’s SCSI ID:
terminal
7-35
7-27
7-28
9-11
Setting a channel’s ID:
LCD
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-28
6-7
Setting a channel’s
Primary ID: LCD
Setting a channel’s
Secondary ID: LCD
Setting a SCSI
channel’s Terminator:
LCD
Setting Transfer
Speed: LCD
Setting Transfer Width:
LCD
Shutdown Controller:
LCD
Single drive control
Slot number: LCD
Spanning
Spare drive
Spare Drive
SCSI channels, viewing
and editing
SCSI commands,
pass-through
7-25
5-22, 7-21
SCSI Drive Information:
terminal
SCSI Drive Low-level
Format: LCD
SCSI Drive Low-level
Format: terminal
SCSI Drive Read/Write
Test: LCD
SCSI Drive Read/Write
Test: terminal
SCSI Drive Status:
LCD
SCSI Drive Utilities:
LCD
SCSI Drive Utilities:
terminal
SCSI Drive’s Status:
terminal
7-42
5-40
7-43
5-41
7-44
4-4
5-29
5-30
5-35
1-3
5-31
1-3
2-4
5-7~8
5-40
7-42
6-6
Assignments: LCD
Spare Drives
1-6, 1-11, 1-
14
Spin-Up Parameters
Stripe size
Striping
Sun Solaris
configuration
2-10
B-1
1-4
9-16
SCSI drives, viewing
and editing
7-22
SCSI I/O Timeout
SCSI ID, deleting
SCSI Motor Spin-Up
SCSI Parameters
SCSI Reset at Power-
Up
SCSI target/drive
channel, viewing and
editing
9-20
7-27
9-18
2-10
9-19
Synchronized cache
System Functions: LCD
B-6
5-34
T
5-30
Tag Command Queue
B-3
Index-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tag count, maximum
tag count, maximum:
LCD
Terminal
Terminal emulation:
terminology
9-21
5-32
viewing and redefining
channel mode: LCD
viewing drive members,
logical drive
VT-100: connection
and setup
5-25
5-16
3-1, 3-3, 3-11
6-2
3-1, 3-6
Terminator, SCSI
channel: LCD
Traffic Distribution and
Failover Process
Transfer clock,
5-28
10-12
5-31
W
write policy
B-1
8-16
B-5
maximum synchronous
Transfer Rate Indicator
transfer speed setting:
LCD
WWN Name List
WWN table
6-1
5-29
transfer width: LCD
upgrading firmware
User Configurable
Geometry range
User-Assigned ID
5-31
C-2
B-3
Z
ZMODEM
C-4, C-6
8-8
V
Variable Stripe Size
Verification on Writes
B-3
9-28, B-7
View and Edit Drive-
Side Parameters: Fibre
View and Edit Event
Logs: LCD
View and Edit Fibre
Channel
8-10
4-7
8-6
8-8
8-9
View and Edit Fibre
Drive
View and Edit Host-
Side Parameters: Fibre
View Channel WWN
View Connected
Drives: LCD
8-7
5-5
View Device Port
Name List
8-8
View Drive Information
Viewing and Deleting
LUN Mappings: LCD
Viewing and Editing
Host LUNs: LCD
Viewing and Editing
Logical Drives: LCD
Viewing and Editing
SCSI Channels: LCD
Viewing and Editing
SCSI Drives: LCD
8-9
5-22
5-22
5-16
5-25
5-23
Index-8
Infortrend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|